The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPermit M99-0182 - ICG COMMUNICATIONSM99 -0182 .. x.,... 1 ��.. � i ��% aiiw�;` t ,, ` ,, y n:. Y; 4* rrS � ,,t.' " �.': : S t"4£ , : . +"s ` a � 3 �f.fi: 12201 Tukwila Int'1 Blvd. ICG Communications City of Tukwila Permit No: M99 -0182 Type: B -MECH Category: NRES MECHANICAL PERMIT Address: 12201 TUKWILA INTERNATIONAL BL Location: 3RD FLOOR Parcel #: 092304 -9120 Contractor License No: PARROMI081J9 TENANT OWNER CONTACT CONTRACTOR INSTALL HVAC SYSTEM - NEW - 3RD FLOOR. Permit Cente uthorized Signature Date ft;, (206) 4313670 Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 Status: ISSUED Issued: 10/14/1999 Expires: 04/11/2000 ICG COMMUNICATIONS 12201 TUKWILA INT'L BL. TUKWILA, WA 98168 SABEY DAVID A & SANDRA L Phone: 206 281 -8700 101 ELLIOTT AV W #330, SEATTLE WA 98119 DONNIE BRANT Phone: 206 - 406 -7716 12201 TUKWILA INT'L BL, TUKWILA, WA 98168 PARROTT MECHANICAL INC Phone: 208 - 772 -5165 6600 N GOVERNMENT WY, COEUR D'ALENE ID 83815 ** ** ****** ** *** * * * *** *** * **** **** *fir * ** * *** *** * **** * * * ** * * ** It * ***** *** *** *eft* Permit Description: UMC Edition: 1997 Valuation: 208,000.00 Total Permit Fee:. 248.75 * * * ** * *'k * * *** * * ** ** * *** pit ** * * * * ** * *** * * ** * * * ** *** * * * ** *fir * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * *.k ** IQ- (Li - qg I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this bui ing permit. A % /�!a -fig Date:_ . 10hY/ 9 r Signature: Print Name: L k ' Z aCA e_ Ti tle:IL J�/J�i1l This permit shall become null and void if the work is not,commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. t: s r v OF TUKW 1 Lr. dress : 1220 r1ll:,WILA INTEPNATIOi'PL 131. Permit I4c' : N99-0162 Suite: e.fl -t lt.: . _NG t':OMii1_INICP1TIr:rN'S Status: : ISS UED '.%:cte. 8- ,1Er:':H Applied: O' ; 2 1999 Parcel 4: 092304-9120 ' Issued: 10i14/1999 FM'F'kkkFk'F h*kFk**MAk**FkkkhhkF, khhkk kkhk kh,h4.hh Mkkkk kkkkAM kh MMkMb44Aokkkk4FF Permit C o n d i t i o n s : 1 _ A i r n ov i n 9 _ 3 V'_, t:enr;. .'.uttp 1 v i nta air in excess .rT 200 0 ctm to ericlosted spates within bu.ildinixs''Shs'.1t.. be. equipped with an . automatic shutoff: A.utOM t le aiitItOff.s,i'ia1 i Pe accomplished )y interr'rupt ir'a!a .thy, uOwer st;ttlrce r_it thie''ai'r "- m+. v into eaui merit upon :detection of :.nrol :::?':1ri the .rrrairi ':.upLi1 ' .iii ttutt served by sus. h ecyu i r fl)i : t + : yher ~e f i r e .d - e . t ic.ri or .alarm m V. tems are >ttrovidet fur the building, : the mu c l:r detet.tur °s. tr ; reu1red by this. set Linn, sha11' he,_.triaer�vi e'i by 2. E 1 ect:r i c''s l permitS hall be, ubrO ned t.hrrtuQli tie Washington Stsat,e "Cris,i:iori'tit' Labcor, anti Iridu trieu and all eleck.ric:; l work wi 1 1 :.he. inspected hv' that agency (246-6630). .:• . No c hanges. W i l 1 be made to the plans, unless aiti r c ved by the' Engineer . r d the Tukwila 13ui ldin9 Division. A 1 l 'ti,erm i t.s,', inspection recor and approved plans shall Lies . available at the icbt site prior tO the start of any con _.t.r'.tiction. These + oc4uments, are .t�o..i e ma1ri:a tined and ,.avai.l able unt, i 1 r inaT inspection approval l is. granted. `r. P,1.1'.C:un:.tr'ut:tiOn to be Clone in coilforillance witt1 approved ojsari.s, and requirementS, of the Uniform Bui1.?iing Code t1)9> E411t1�tn7,;a� amended. lluiform Code t19+)7 Edition) and , .Washi rig t'.on State Energy Code (J 97. Edition.) h Va1.Id1t; of Permit'.. The i:_.UanCe tit. a Ctt'rMit or aupr+ava91 C+ u ls3rl'a speCit'ICat. ions. and computations shall not 'b con- :strtied to be ,a permit or. or ari ., approval v . anu vitl,1ition: of any of the provisions of the',kiul1dirla code v'r' ttr any other Ordinance of the iuris.dic;:t,i' n. 11cti .uerm1t:: pr umiriq.;,. o give authority to violate or t:iarice 1 tisi tls ov i. ion: of thi. code shall be .va 1 i,d, 7 Man=.rracturers intt:al lsati.ttrl ins tru..t1un :. :r'eoU1red On site- f o r the bu i l .d i ri crec: tor rev, i ew ,:, M enant: MU NI t L.Wri OA 5 Lk. Description of work to be done: Value of Construction: Site Address: • � , �� } 2, 2 01 -- ro%e k)t L.A. 1nh tlavac. Fun" City State /Zip: T,Rww4. UJF4 ° (bl(o/5 Tax Parcel Number: 0 9 - Z3c4 - q 1 Zo - o (o Property Owner: 4 'AIS4Plagy CoV-60t1.A► IO(J 1 Phone: 206 - 281 - % Street Address: lol W L , : i ae -+ Contact Person: .J J ca I'r r City S to /Zip: - -. .L. - 0O Fax #: Zo 4.- 2134.-8951 Phone: Z - 9'oI-0019 Street Address: 12Zaf fit •)tc./ (N TrEr r t t $wD City State /Zip: ` )tcam,k1/��$I(at Fax #: 7.� - 9Q (`' 02 Co ctor: ` i rn C and Pa rvO+ - ± - nl City St a /Zip: ion / �� t_�rK�( .7P City State /Zip: 33o S W I M ; WA9N04 Phone: 9- 5 •:3-90--9 - Fax ft: g� - 'i Gi -I 5 4-'7 Phone: Ze•G• -•• t ( - j7 t o Fax ft: - z - Z.t I - occ 2,o Phone: 10 Fax #: I O3 13 - o , o StreetiA dress: . ' �� D • ,5ec� Architect: S CsRF' t,'�c�rcJ28 Street Address: 10 k 8 1a . t at--- Arlie W I Suns En Weer: I�T ocrckir Street 2,3 23 ` � - 1o �rJ N1b Sums ��cc 4- R0'�1 zo State/Zip: goi) MISCELLANEOUS. PERMIT REVIEW AND APPROVAL REQUESTED: (TO BE FILLED OUT BY'APPLICANT); `: .' Description of work to be done: /( - >1v • C-. -a ItL j f .- ` �� `-- . Will there be storage of flammable /combustible hazardous material In the building? ❑ yes r no Attach list of materials and stoma a location on separate 8 1/2 X 11 a er indicatin uantities & Material afety Data Sheets _ Above Ground Tanks U Antennas /Satellite Dishes Bulkhead /Docks Commercial Reroof ❑ Demolition ❑ Fence XMechanicat ❑ Manufactured Housing - Replacement only ❑ Parking Lots ❑ Retaining Walls ❑ Temporary Pedestrian Protection /Exit Systems ❑ Temporary Facilities ❑ Tree Cutting MONTHLY SERVICE BILLINGS TO:..: ,.. .:.: ; ... .. Name: Phone: Address: City /State /Zip: 0 Water 0 Sewer 0 Metro 0 Standby CITY OF TCWILA Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 n Ir� (206) 431 -3670 Miscellaneous Permit Application Application and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mall or facsimile. L APPLICANT FOR MISCELLANEOUS PUBLIC. WORKS PERMITS ❑ Channelization /Striping ❑ Curb cut/Access /Sidewalk ❑ Fire Loop /Hydrant (main to vault) #: Size(s): ❑ Flood Control Zone ❑ Land Altering: 0 Cut cubic yards 0 Fill cubic yards 0 sq. ft.grading /clearing ❑ Landscape Irrigation ❑ Sanitary Side Sewer It: ❑ Sewer Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public ❑ Storm Drainage ❑ Street Use ❑ Water Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public ❑ Water Meter /Exempt tt Size(s): 0 Deduct 0 Water Only ❑ Water Meter /Permanent # Size(s): ❑ Water Meter Temp ft Size(s): Est. quantity: gal Schedule: ❑ Miscellaneous in Moving Oversized Load /Hauling WATER METER DEPOSIT /REFUND BILLING: Name: Address: Phone: City /State /Zip: Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. Thls figure will be reviewed and Is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit is Issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 107.4 of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. MISCPMT.DOC 7/11/96 _o_spolcatIon a jjllonikeI(Ia!s) BUILDING 0 . a RAUTHORIZ ,/' PERMIT REVIEW Submit checklist No: M -9 Signature: , Awnings /Canopies - No signage Commercial Tenant improvement Permit Date: 4 ,/ Z2 / ct °) Print name: ' r3D Commercial.Reroof: Submit checklist . No: M 6 :' Phone: 2811)704 City /State /Zip Fax # 116-181 - OcktO 1 \Wx 9 �' L9 Address: 101 .V�a'r'r \ ,' ' '50 1 33 O ALL MISCELLANEOUSF":13MIT APPLICATIONS MUST BE SU' . ITTED WITH THE FOLLOWING: • ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN 4);013'UIL I4" PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED • ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED ARCHITECT • STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER A CIVIL/SITE PLAN DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED CIVIL ENGINEER (P.E.) Copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If not available at the time of application, a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued, unless the homeowner will be the builder OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". BuIlding :Owner /Authorized Agerit, If the applicant is other` than the :owner, registered: architect /engineer,', or.contracto; licensed; by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property, ownerauthorizing the agent to submit this. permit aPplIcatlarvand obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal, I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND 1 AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. MIS • /96 t � ✓ C �k JF 'c. 4 40.mq vi , N4 R' `4 • "11 4;74 .4 p'"tl •.aR .r.tT SUBMIT APPLICATION AND REQUIRED CHECKLISTS FOR Above Ground: Tanks /Water Tanks - Supported ; directly upon •grade exceeding 5,000 gallons and a ratio of height to diameter or width, which exceeds 2 :1 PERMIT REVIEW Submit checklist No: M -9 Antennas/Satellite-Dishes Submit checklist No: M -1 Awnings /Canopies - No signage Commercial Tenant improvement Permit Bulkhead/Dock Submit checklist.;. No: M-10 E Commercial.Reroof: Submit checklist . No: M 6 :' r Demolition:: Submit checklist: No: %M 3, M -3a Fences - Over 6 feet :in Height 'Submitchecklist ` No: . K.9 0 Land Altering/Grading /Preloads Submit checklist . No: M -2 E Loading Decks +: Commercial Tenantiiniprovement Permit.. Submit checklist H -17 0 Mechanical' (Residential' Commercial) Submit checklist <. No. ` S, 'Residential only °- H -6, -16.. H n Miscellaneous, Public Permits ;; Submit checklist' No: H=9 Manufactured: Housing (RED INSIGNIA ONLY) • Submit checklist ` No: M -5 . . ' Moving Oversized Load /Hauling Submit checklist No: M-5 n Parking. Lots Submit.checklist No: M -4 in Residential - Exempt with following exception! If roof structure to be repaired or replaced Residential Building Permit Submit checklist No:. M -6 Retaining Walls - Over 4 feet in height Submit checklist No:. M -1 Temporary Facilities Submit checklist No:, M-7 Temporary:Pedestrian Protection/Exit Systems Submit checklist No: M-4 E Tree Cutting Submit checklist , No: M -2 ALL MISCELLANEOUSF":13MIT APPLICATIONS MUST BE SU' . ITTED WITH THE FOLLOWING: • ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN 4);013'UIL I4" PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED • ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED ARCHITECT • STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER A CIVIL/SITE PLAN DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED CIVIL ENGINEER (P.E.) Copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If not available at the time of application, a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued, unless the homeowner will be the builder OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". BuIlding :Owner /Authorized Agerit, If the applicant is other` than the :owner, registered: architect /engineer,', or.contracto; licensed; by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property, ownerauthorizing the agent to submit this. permit aPplIcatlarvand obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal, I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND 1 AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. MIS • /96 t � ✓ C �k JF 'c. 4 40.mq vi , N4 R' `4 • "11 4;74 .4 p'"tl •.aR .r.tT ':***A* V\ Cl/—\ .A TRANSN1T Number: R9800167 Amount •avmonh Method: CHECK Notatim| CITY OF TUKNlLA. WA ~~.~._.-.^.'._..~- --~.•_~.^ • ---~-------- Permit No: N99-0182 Typo: 8~N[CH MECMHNICAL P6RM1[ Ptkrcel No: 092304~9120 8ite A4dross: 12201 TUKNILA • Location: 3RD FLUOR rota] Faes: 248...75 Thia P�vment • 248.75 Tot ALLpmts: � 248.75 . Oalanep: ~ 00 • *++**+* a*�^ a*a + 1 ‘ + a^+* + +*^aa*^*A+*+kA/+ +^ *a*A+,kk*+A,*"4*+*.A+*+**^+ Account Code 0ei,criotion O00/345.830 PLAN CHECK - NOhRES 000/322.100 MECHANICAL ~ WONKEQ INTERNA[IANAi 8L t*A*A**xN/*ox**A+1.k., | **++*+k 248.75 10/14/99 ]OW; ): •PARk8TT MV.CHAN%C 1:nit: TLU Amount 9.75 199.00 41 . `'.�. rn ..v.% .� ` �^�w��,,�z��' - '��~. - �r�°��'^»+^�' claw: Typ spection: 1,4r) Address: 1220/ ' ? i Date ca e : Special instructions: /t(PG 8. Date wan 3 a, m: Re Phone: CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 l /rI 206)431 -3670 INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD I Retain a copy with permit Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval, COMMENTS: El $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: -0/, ERMIT NO. COMMENTS: 11 /� 4 ,4-i 0 6 d 5 r Ft e_E Pia-m P64, of tt , ge. (f(fAc - (//.6: D6,7 Add ss: I a o aTuuwila in-41.0 vc( - r-- S� wt-�4 -n � 4Q01 It .-. Special instructions: 3((A f (Q ( Ogee-- 4 a{ M' n m 44 4. ,P.6? v,z ?1 ('b::.1 /-7 I (a' , 6401 C. Q 4k.de∎f 400'.* p.m. AV1 C / 0lt).L Q T 1 /Me At rrs ,cbqt/e smo46. 77 c77e1A1 /'c( re, ,zit/ ,4 /,e /7/3' c;444/e--45 /AM14kd - , 7 4e'- - 53o0cFk' Pro ec : ILO (om airr��{iOis Type of Inspection; fina Add ss: I a o aTuuwila in-41.0 vc( Date called: ( 'l r ) .-. Special instructions: 3((A f (Q ( Ogee-- 4 a{ M' n m Date want 4 .I M 41 U1 a.m. p.m. Requester: - e q_ Phone: (4G 3' --- gc; INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0 Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit (206)431 -3670 corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: e Date: 0 $47.00 RE PECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: 1 Project Type of Ins / Address: 20 77/e ' 6! Date called: Special instructions: / r fiz !�d tN Date want �}� l / /� Ca.m p.m. Requester: 1t Phone: CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION INSPECTION NO. Inspector: Pi lwil dli g i gia. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 E Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 61 / 7 071 /77.(../446-'b A-444 , p row S Nor", 'i&''4 l a/od $47.00 REINSP CTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Date: PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 COMMENTS: . ', p e >svc 7 s7 O LY u: 9c 4 01,o ow Date called: , / / , , 2. a c,„, 10 . - go/ tit 5 l/-(/i ✓ if g .$41 4 Date wanted: t // n `� p�m. Requester: �� - gi 5 - goi./ti- s . /,U 75 ✓ ie $ /1,'l Pr t C i 41 ', e €dnspe t TypC��f �'2 ".1 ) u: 9c 4 01,o ow Date called: , / / , , 2. a c,„, Special instr ctions: ,o4� &Q .,- L -' (lC , ( � (.� I 4 Date wanted: t // n `� p�m. Requester: �� Phone - & s -7g INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 1 /7/ PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 Z Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: Project: T pe pecti n: 1..M0/ pe ,... A ie4 / ate called: i / q pe5lactio . ip re.„ Date wanted: i Requester: Phone: 75:2-7 INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 ri7tr PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Approved per applicable codes. r7 Corrections required prior to approval. D a),e 06 11 7 El $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Soulhcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: COMMENTS: F i2,4-0904.e 47,e,e Project: 1 r . e - Type of In pection: / .4 22. 50104 I. Address: �j /2--2 c2/ 7:4 / Vi <I Date called: Special instructions: /0;00 '0., In 34)""" 7/C6/ 'Date wanted: a. Requester: Phone: 3 C I S 71g2.� • INSPECTION NO. 1 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Si bQi�JW�PC 1. PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 Approved per applicable codes, lA Corrections required rior to approval. COMMENTS: r "r t i l e )144 1 El $47.00 REINSPECTION FE: REQUIRE . Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: P i Tiboe ., o e f.inpectickn; 1 10/ -/-/tiumftc i kddress: i Tor u4 )\/ Date called: 1 1 / i / .---,. Special instructions: / ,...) c 1 1 Date wanted: / efie—l' P.m. (::: Requester: —r-, Ph°11 COMMENTS: ..., 4.. ,..'-', ..."----. .1,6 L .'";',4-4-1. .... / be.-40.7 , .,..,,• C 49 di 1 ,t Kr - ......:, _ ,,,,........ ,,-.... _..e....e. _ — -,./ /7 a-4-1 ( 5c-e.-2.-.1., 4, 5 i- r- /.4.,., / ri i / / 12 / )7 ..# l / .. I .... ..- - ...... 4 - e c 4. Inspector . Date: INSPECTION NO. Approved per applicable codes. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Corrections required prior to approval. $47.00 REINSPECTIO EE REQ ED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: COMMENTS: Type of InspeCtion: f (MI/VW )Vibtee e O 'e.-iez:e Date called: l 1 //ce "-fi* -?e-e Spe3lauctions• c /x7s4,-._s/w424 a rii P.m. 7,.:7,16. ,,,, Phone: ' ee -76 Ab2ig-258. • Pro)t Type of InspeCtion: f (MI/VW AI dg ,....7,6c.e 9 2. d i e i n v Date called: l 1 Spe3lauctions• Date wanted: a rii P.m. Requester: - 44, Phone: ' INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 (206)431-3670 0 Approved per applicable codes. Date: / Li $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: [4k required prior to approval. City of Tukwila Fire Department Project Name ,_L.. G . COM w1UM∎1tA 1 I Address 1 2. z.o ( t , 2 Retain current inspection schedule ___, Needs shift inspection 3 & 5 1., Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued Sprinklers: )< Fire Alarm: )C Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor : •6 Pre -Fire: Permits: Authorized Signature 5 10 FINALAPP.FRM Rev. 2/19/98 TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Thomas R Keefe, Fire Chief Permit No. LJ 1 t" 0 . S\ - 7 IM : " • (:2. 4 cic\ 3:15 Suite # 43 W Date s ob T.F.D. Form F.P. 85 Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206 -S7S -4404 • Fax: 206 -S7S -4439 AT:'lnY�:3i'.Y TheConstrudionOrrnizilige ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility BID PACKAGE AUGUST 25, 1999 RECEIVED Crre OF TUKWILA sEP Z 1999 PERMIT CENTER .�' --- IC COPY COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES GROUP Mcici :.u..�.n.;.,Yrrt'i':iv.�:is : ::, : i.y�c'�,rP�.,. �� a':: {YV�r , .t-s•i.a:.a +:�:.xnm.rn. a..awi ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 BID PACKAGE TABLE OF CONTENTS Bid Package Manual (Part 1— Issued with Bid Package): I. Introduction II. IV. Instructions to Bidders Special Conditions Standard Subcontract Agreement A) Exhibit A — Contract Documents c V. BID PACKAGE: Invitation to Bid "A" - Bid Proposals Form "B" - Specific Instructions to Bidders (Scope) "C" - Unit Prices "D" - Schedule of Values "E" - Project Schedule w/ ICG Equipment Schedule Project Manual (Part 2 — Issued with LOI/Contract): NOT INCLUDED WITH THIS MANUAL 1 . VII. Insurance Procedures: • Standard Form • Builders Risk Floater VIII, Example Payment & Performance Bond Forms IX. Payment Procedures: • Application for Payment • AIA G702 • Schedule of Values (AIA G703) • Partial & Final Lien Release Form X. Standard Request for Information (RFI) Form XI. Standard Change Order Request Form XII. Standard Daily Report XIII. Alternate Submittal Form XIV, Subcontract Close -Out Package with Attachments r i r_ �., 5r: i.tiC:;iS'.F =P .' + ?'1uf:Y•x';at� 2r:;v.1K'fftSiavac+Sry ) fi C' ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 BID PACKAGE I. INTRODUCTION I. INTRODUCTION : M.A. Mortenson Company has been selected as the Construction Manager for the ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility located in Tukwila, WA. The project consists of tenant finishes and MEP systems along with fire protection. The space is approximately 14,000 SF, with the generator located behind the building and the condensers located on the roof. The project will be challenging due to an aggressive schedule, tight construction and existing operating business in the complex. Due to the nature of this project only pre - qualified subcontractors and suppliers will be allowed to bid on the work. The major project milestone is to have the switch space ready for equipment installation by October 4, 1999. Please refer to the schedule attachment to this BID PACKAGE for a more detailed description of the project schedule. After review and analysis of the bids submitted, it is our intention to meet with the most responsive bidder and award upon confirmation of a complete proposal. The purpose of this meeting is to review the scope and the proposal to ensure that we have a complete bid without scope omissions or overlaps. Should you have any questions concerning the project or this request, please do not hesitate to contact us at (970)266 -7228 or by facsimile at (970)223 -5418. We sincerely appreciate your interest in this project and we will look forward to receiving your proposals. ' �_ :,ra +w:.a Mr x,'.;c ::��.rY ".•r." ;.`rXi: ?i a�S +Xk ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 BID PACKAGE II. INSTRUCTIONS. TO BIDDERS yh„�!iI+YA't , 1 4�PY.nAgWnYM ,IflW 2`n4%�nXVFSt4wawr I. General INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. M.A. Mortenson Company is the General Contractor /Construction Manager for the ICG Communications, Seattle Switch Facility Project. Bidders agree, if awarded a contract, to enter into a subcontract agreement with Mortenson on the enclosed contract form, without amendment. B. Bids will be taken for work items as described in the Invitation for Proposal. Scope of work descriptions for each work category/bid item are included in Bid Package Attachment "C" of this BID PACKAGE. C. Bidders may propose on more than one bid package, but separate amounts must be stated for each. If a bidder's proposal for a given bid package is contingent on award of another bid package, bidders shall so state in their proposal. II. PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS To be considered, proposals must be made in accordance with these Instructions to Bidders: A. Plans and specifications One (1) set of plans will be issued to all invited bidders for bidding purposes. It is mandatory that all unsuccessful bidders return all bid documents within one (1) week after they have been notified that they were not the successful bidder. A set of reproducible (sepia) prints have been issued to Mortenson in 1112 OakRidge Dr., Suite 104- 227,Fort Collins, CO. If bidders require additional bid documents, they may contact Superior Repographics - Steve Olson at 206.443.6900 to purchase additional documents. B. Examination of Contract Documents and site of work The bidder shall examine carefully the site of the contemplated work, the proposal form, plans and specifications, and represents that he has visited the site of the work and has investigated and correlated his observations as to (a) the conditions to be encountered, (b) the character, quality, and (c) the requirements of the Contract Documents. No extra consideration will be subsequently allowed by reason of error or oversight on the part of the Bidder. 4B C. Proposal The proposals shall be made on an unaltered proposal form furnished herein. Bidders shall state in the bidding blanks, on proposal form, the prices to cover the cost of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services and incidentals necessary to perform the work required under the respective bid item. If the unit price and the total amount named by the Bidder for any item doe not agree, the unit price shall govern. The proposal shall be signed with the name typed below the signature. If the proposal is made by an individual, his name and address must be shown; or if by a firm, the firm or partnership name shall be shown; or if by a corporation, the proposal must be signed with the legal name of the corporation followed by the name of the state of incorporation and the legal signature of an officer authorized to bind the corporation to a contract. Oral proposals or modifications will not be considered. D. Submittal The following shall be filled in and submitted with the bid: 1. Attachment "A" — Bid Proposal 2. Attachment `B" — Scope of Work 3. Attachment "C" — Unit Prices 4. Attachment "D" — Schedule of Values 5. Standard Insurance Certificate E. Modifications and withdrawal Proposals may not be modified after submittal. Bidders may withdraw proposals at any time before bid opening, provided that a request in writing, executed by the Bidder or his duly authorized representative, for the withdrawal of such proposal is filed with M.A. Mortenson Company prior to the time fixed for the opening of bids. The withdrawal of a proposal shall not prejudice the right of a Bidder to file a new proposal. No proposal may be withdrawn after bid opening. F. Bid opening Proposals will be accepted until the date and hour stipulated in the Contract Documents and/or the published advertisement for bids. A proposal may not be accepted after that time. The bid opening shall be in private. G. Acceptance & Rejection of Bid Proposals More than one proposal from an individual, firm or partnership, corporation or association, under the same or different names, will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that a Bidder is interested in more than one proposal for the work contemplated will cause the rejection of all proposals in which said Bidder is interested. 5B • If form furnished is not used or is altered. Bids are considered unresponsive and may be rejected for the following reasons unless otherwise provided by law: • If there are unauthorized additions, conditional bids, or irregularities of any kind which may tend to make Bid incomplete, indefinite, or ambiguous as to meaning. • If bidder adds any provisions reserving right to accept or reject any award, or to enter into Contract pursuant to an award. • If unit or lump sum prices contained in bid schedule are obviously unbalanced either in excess of, or below, reasonable cost analysis values. • If bidder fails to insert alternate and unit prices for every item indicated. • If bidder fails to complete Bid proposal as requested thereby detracting from proper evaluation of bid. A separate price must be clearly noted for each respective bid package being bid. Material price including WA tax must be shown separately from labor, equipment, and overhead costs. Bids will be received by M.A. Mortenson Company 1112 OakRidge Dr., Suite 104 - 227,Fort Collins, CO, 80525 until the time and date stated in the Invitation to Bid. Bidders agree, if awarded a contract, to enter into a contract agreement with M.A. Mortenson Company on the enclosed contract forms, Proposals shall remain open for acceptance for a period of 30 days for the base bid and 7 days for the alternate bids from the date and time of bid, The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bid Proposals and to waive any or all informalities or irregularities. A Bid Security • None. I Discrepancies or Omissions If any person contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed contract is in doubt as to the meaning of any part of the drawings, specifications or other proposed contract documents, a written request for an interpretation thereof shall be received at the office of M.A. Mortenson Company, 1112 OakRidge Dr., Suite 104- 227,Fort Collins, CO, 80525. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation of the Contract Documents or decisions will be made by an addendum duly issued no later than three (3) days in advance of receiving bids. The Owner or the Construction Manager will not be responsible for any other interpretation of the Contract 6B J Addenda Documents. It shall be the responsibility of the sub - bidders to ascertain that all addenda have been received, and the appropriate allowances therefore have been incorporated into the proposal. All addenda issued during the time of bidding shall become a part of the Contract Documents and receipt thereof shall be listed in the Bid Proposals. K Substitutions, Prior Approvals, Voluntary Alternates Base bid only on materials, equipment, and procedures specified in the contract documents. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications by means of trade names, catalog numbers and/or manufacturers names. Where this occurs, it is not intended to exclude from consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other trade names, catalog number and/or manufacturer's names capable of accomplishing the purpose of the types of equipment and kinds of material specifically indicated. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner and Architect. The Owner is the final authority of substitute materials. Any cost modifications necessary as a result of the use of an approved substitute shall be paid by the Subcontractor proposing the substitution. Types of equipment and kinds of materials to be used, if not specifically indicated in specifications, must be approved in writing by the Architect and be agreed upon by Owner prior to award of Contract. No substitutions will be allowed after the Bid opening. A part of the bid form is designated for voluntary bid alternates. All substantiation, technical information, test reports, etc., required to evaluate the bid alternate, must be submitted with the bid proposal on the form attached herein. Design alterations due to the proposed alternate must be specifically identified. Alternates will only be considered if the bidder completes the base bid portion of the bid proposal form and quotes the base bid. Voluntary alternates may also be submitted up to ten 7) days following award provided the altemate submittal form attached herein is used. L Form of Contract The form of agreement for subcontracts with the Construction Manager will be the enclosed Subcontract or Purchase Agreement, including Additional Provisions and Supplementary Conditions included as a part of this Project BID PACKAGE. All documents presented at the time of bid including, but not limited to, the BID PACKAGE with attachments, protocol manual, safety manual, the plans and specifications will be incorporated into the contract agreement between the successful bidder and Mortenson. All exclusions, clarifications, or requested changes to the subcontract/purchase agreement must be submitted at the time of bid. 713 M Subcontracts N Taxes Bidder is specifically advised that any person, firm or other party to whom it is proposed to award a subcontract under this contract, must be acceptable to Owner and must be safety pre - qualified and have insurance in accordance with the contract document The Construction Manager and the Owner reserve the right to reject any proposed subcontractor if Contractor fails to satisfy the Construction Manager and/or the Owner that proposed subcontractor is properly qualified to complete the work contemplated within the allotted time. All State, County, or City Sales/Use tax shall be included in bid or paid by Subcontractor. On a monthly basis, with the schedule of values (G703) invoice, the Subcontractor shall submit an itemized list of all materials provided to the job. At the end of the Project, the Subcontractor shall submit an affidavit verifying that all material costs have been submitted. All revised federal taxes, fees, or permits, other than the building permit, shall be paid by the Subcontractor. 0 Contract Security Coincident with execution of contract, if requested, Subcontractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds in an amount equal to 100 percent (100 %) of contract price as security, which shall be provided if requested by Owner or Construction Manager on the forms designated by M.A. Mortenson Company. P Laws, Permits, Licensees, Regulations, Etc. Attention is particularly directed to the General Conditions for requirements, which deal with laws, permits, licenses, regulations, etc. The general building permit shall be obtained and paid for by the M.A. Mortenson Company. All other permits, both acquisition of and cost related to, are the responsibility of Subcontractor whose work required the permit. Subcontractor shall conform to all applicable Federal and State laws, municipal ordinances, rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction, including all construction codes and safety codes, which may apply to: Performance of the work. Protection of adjoining and adjacent property. Maintenance of passageways, guard fences or other protective facilities. Subcontractor shall arrange for all inspections required by Federal, State, Municipal or other authorities and pay all fees and costs incurred. 8B r i S Questions Q Insurance's R Alternate & Unit Price Bids No work will be allowed to be conducted on site until satisfactory evidence has been submitted that the subcontractor has insurance that complies with the . Subcontract Agreement. For complete descriptions of the alternates and unit prices to be listed on the bid proposal form refer to the section for Alternates and Unit Prices in the specifications. The number assigned each alternate and unit price was selected at random and is for identification only, and does not indicate priority of work. The Owner may accept none, any or all alternates for inclusion with the base bid work. The bidders alternate and unit price bids will be bound by the same conditions, which govern the base bid. All questions regarding the drawings and specifications are to be submitted to M.A. Mortenson Company in writing at least two (2) days prior to the bid opening date. Normal replies or interpretations that do not give unfair advantage or information to the questioning Bidder will be answered directly without formal record of Addenda. Questions which might necessitate an Addendum and are received less than five (5) calendar days before the day of bid opening cannot be answered, but will be resolved after the bid opening or contract award. * * END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS * * ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 BID PACKAGE III. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1CG Communications Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 BID PACKAGE 1. OVERALL PROJECT SCHEDULE: A preliminary project schedule is included under the bid package attachment "D" of the BID PACKAGE. Construction period is as stated. Overtime, double - shifting or any other measures required to maintain the project schedule, are to be undertaken without adjustment of contract price. Achieving the interim "Tech Ready" and "Early Advocate" milestones is critical to the overall project schedule and the start of on -site work by the Owner's vendors. "Equipment Ready:" "Equipment Ready" must occur after Notice to Proceed, not later than October 4, 1999. "Equipment Ready" is defined as: • Completion of all architectural finishes, mechanical rough -in, electrical rough -inand fire protection rough -in (Leak Tested) work in the area identified as the ICG switch transmission, MCC and DC power (approximately 7,000 SF). • Lighting complete and temporarily powered. • Space is complete with punch list work and minor finishes remaining "Space Tempered" "Space tempered" must occur after Notice to Proceed, not later than October 15, 1999. "Space tempered" is defined as: • Completion of all architectural finishes, mechanical and electrical work, and fire protection system components in place in the areas designated as ICG switch transmission, DC battery, MCC, break area, electrical room, and mechanical space. • Electrical equipment is in place, tested, certified and operating • Mechanical equipment is in place, tested, certified and operating. • Complete final cleaning of the spaces. "Substantial Completion" Substantial completion and acquisition of the Certificate of Occupancy for the project as a whole is required after Notice to Proceed, not later than November 19, 1999. No more than two weeks thereafter will be allowed for punchlist completion. • Completion of all architectural finishes, mechanical and electrical work, and fire protection system components in place in the areas designated as ICG switch transmission, DC battery, MCC, break area, electrical room, mechanical space, collocation, and generator location. • Generator equipment is in place, tested, certified and operating 11B • Complete final cleaning of the spaces. 2. WORK PROGRESS SCHEDULE: 3. SUBMITTALS: 4. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: 12B Note: After "Equipment Ready" milestone, the Owner's vendors will have primary access to, and will be in control of these areas. Access to these spaces after the milestones will be restricted and must be coordinated with the Owner's vendor and approved in advance by Mortenson's site supervisor. Subcontractor will also submit a long lead equipment list which will include the piece of equipment, quantity, manufacturer, fabrication duration, shipping duration, equipment dismantling and mantling period (if required), and installation duration. A. Within FIVE (5) days after award of contract, each Subcontractor shall submit for approval, two (2) completed copies of each of the following: 1. Schedule of Values breakdown indicating value of work required under each specification section and major items within each section. This breakdown will be used for percent complete analysis and processing Applications for Payment. 2. Complete list of all items of equipment, including, but not limited to, items of mechanical and electrical equipment, together with manufacturer's names, catalog numbers, type and/or trade name. B. No work shall be commenced until Certificates of Insurance, bonds and safety plans have been submitted and approved by Mortenson. No request for payment will be processed until Work Progress Schedule, Schedule of Values and Subcontractor's Materials and Equipment lists have been submitted. C. Guarantees required in various sections, and on items of work, shall be furnished in same number of copies as required for shop drawings. All Subcontractor /Supplier warranties shall be assignable to the Owner upon substantial completion. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted for approval no later than the scheduled "Switch Ready" date. As -built drawings shall be submitted within ten (10) days of substantial completion. Additional retainage in the amount of 10% of the contract will be withheld for any period in which the Subcontractor is not in compliance with the above. Final payment will not be released prior to the Architect's approval of 0 & M Manuals and as- builts. Wherever any reference is made to an item that should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's standard specifications or manufacturer's instructions, the Subcontractor shall submit to M.A. Mortenson Company, in writing, for approval, the manufacturer's standard specifications, recommendations, or instructions for the installation of the particular item under consideration. The number of copies required shall be defined under the "Shop Drawings" requirements. Within THREE (3) days after award of Contract, Subcontractor shall submit, in a form acceptable to M.A. Mortenson Company, two (2) copies of a detailed Work Progress Schedule, for Project Manager's approval and use in completing the overall project schedule. 5. MAINTENANCE MANUAL AND INSTRUCTIONS: At least TEN (10) days prior to "Substantial Completion" date, each Subcontractor shall deliver to M.A. Mortenson Company, for review and approval, six (6) copies of maintenance and operating instructions for all finish items, and for all mechanical and electrical or other operable equipment, and care and maintenance of all finishes in accordance with specifications. 6. LAYOUT: A. Layout shall be provided by each Subcontractor requiring same. Mortenson will provide a control point. 7. FIELD OFFICES: �f A. M.A. Mortenson Company shall provide field office and telephone for its use and the use of its project representative (if required and space is available). Electrical Subcontractor shall provide temporary electrical service for Mortenson field office within three (3) days of Notice to Proceed and remove same at completion (if required). B. Subcontractor shall make provisions for jobsite office, utilities and phone service (if available). All Subcontractors shall coordinate the location of designated parking, staging, storage, and administrative office areas with M.A. Mortenson Company prior to set up & to verify availability. C. All Subcontractor's offices are to meet applicable code requirements and Subcontractor shall obtain necessary permits. D. Temporary field offices and storage sheds when space permits, shall be constructed on proper foundations, structurally sound, weather tight, with raised floors, with heat and ventilation of products requiring controlled conditions, with adequate space for organized storage and access, lighting for inspection of stored materials and connections for utility services. 1. Secure portable or mobile buildings, when used. 2. Fill and grade site for temporary structures to provide surface drainage (as required) 3. Any required permits shall be obtained by Subcontractor. 4. Subcontractor shall provide direct line telephone service to Subcontractor's own field offices for operations and pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal and service charges. 5. All storage sheds and trailers will be setup and maintained per OSHA requirements E. Electrical Subcontractor to provide all electrical service requirements for all jobsite office trailers and each individual subcontractors expense. F. Electrical Subcontractor to provide all electrical service requirements for Mortenson jobsite office. 8. PROJECT SIGNS: A. M.A. Mortenson Company shall furnish and install one project sign as designed by the Owner, if required. B. No other signs are allowed. 13B 9. DELIVERY AND STORAGE AREAS: A. M.A. Mortenson Company and Subcontractors shall make suitable provisions for the storage of their materials and provide such temporary weatherproof shed as may be necessary for the protection of their materials. Subcontractors are Notified that space is limited and that all equipment deliveries need to be coordinated closely with the Mortenson site supervisor and the building owner. B. Each Subcontractor shall schedule deliveries and unloading to prevent congestion, blocking and access to project site, and interference with the work. Arrange deliveries to avoid larger accumulations than can be suitably stored at the site. C. Provide for continuity of supplies to avoid change of supplier or manufacturer, or change in brand materials during work. D. Store materials in such a manner so as to prevent damage to materials or structure and to prevent injury to persons. E. Temporary structures and sheds shall be arranged to avoid interference with construction. Location shall be approved by M.A. Mortenson Company. All use of the site and structure shall be subject to approval of M.A. Mortenson Company. F. Subcontractors receiving owner supplied equipment may be required to store equipment if it arrives .3 early or until a scheduled delivery time can be coordinated with the building owner. During such t._ cases, subcontractor will take the proper precautions to protect the equipment from damage or theft and carry proper insurance's for storage, hoisting, and rigging. 10. WATCHMAN: L~ Services of a watchman will not be provided by the M.A. Mortenson Company. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for and make good any loss or damage to their work or property due to vandalism or robbery during construction. 11. TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES: A. Restrooms are provided by the building owner on floors that he will instruct us to use. B. Type of facilities shall meet with Mortenson's approval C. Clean, service, and maintain required facilities and enclosures. 12. TEMPORARY UTILITIES: A. Electrical Subcontractor shall provide main panels, circuits, breakers, and branch wiring with area distribution boxes located to allow power and lighting by means of construction -type power cords and conduits, as required all Subcontractor's use, and for those Subcontractors contracted directly with the Owner. B. Electrical Subcontractor shall provide artificial Iighting for construction operations when natural light is not adequate for all Subcontractor's work, for Subcontractors contracted directly with the Owner, and for areas accessible to the public, for the entire project duration. Artificial lighting shall EXCEED minimum illumination intensities as required by OSHA. C. Water will be made available from existing sources located on jobsite by the Mechanical Subcontractor. Mechanical Subcontractor will also be responsible for providing required back flow 14B i 7 i • preventers, valves, etc. for utilization of existing sources, if required, for all Subcontractors, and for those Subcontractors contracted directly with the Owner, for the entire project duration. D. All Subcontractors are to make their own arrangements for telephone service. E. Mortenson will pay for energy costs associated with temporary power only. F. Temporary building heat, if required, to be provided by either the mechanical or the General Works Contractor. 13. TEMPORARY HOISTING: All hoisting shall be provided by the Subcontractor requiring same. 14. SCAFFOLDING: Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for providing scaffolding as may be required to perform Subcontractor's Work. 15. TEMPORARY FENCES: Not required 16. TEMPORARY HEAT: A. Heating requirements during construction are as follows: 1. All heating and weather protection for the general building enclosure shall be furnished by the Electrical Subcontract unless defined otherwise in the scope of work until such time as permanent HVAC systems are operable. Use heating units of types approved by Architect and conforming to safety codes. Keep equipment and surroundings in a clean and safe condition. 2. Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors shall expedite completion of permanent heating and cooling systems for use during construction period. B. Electrical subcontractor shall provide power, if used for temporary heat. Where permanent- heating system is used for temporary heat and is connected to existing service, energy costs will be paid by M.A. Mortenson Company. Any warranty or guarantee period on any permanent items used during temporary heating period shall commence on date of final acceptance of building by Owner. C. In event that temporary gas fired or open flame- heating devices are used, they shall comply with local, state and federal laws, codes and ordinances. 17, FIRE PROTECTION: r A. Mortenson and/or the General Works Subcontractor shall furnish general area fire extinguishers during construction in accordance with OSHA requirements and local authorities having jurisdiction. B. All Subcontractors and workmen shall exercise care to maintain and exercise fire safety precautions throughout the work. This shall include providing sufficient fire fighting devices, watchmen, standby personnel or other precautions during construction, while utilizing temporary heat, welding, brazing, sweating, testing or other phases of work. C. The Subcontractor shall be responsible to ensure that fire protection, access and egress be maintained at all times, and work must be arranged to permit immediate access by fire fighting equipment. This includes but is not limited to maintaining access to the area fue hydrants at all times. 158 c 18. PUMPING AND DRAINAGE: A. Each Subcontractor performing excavating, trenching, etc., shall provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing to prevent earth from caving or washing into the building excavation. B. All pumping necessary to keep excavations and trenches free from water during the entire progress of this work shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor who is responsible for said excavations and trenches. Do not discharge water on adjoining property. Leave streets, yards and all property free of dirt, debris and damage as a result of such discharge. 19. OPENINGS, BLOCKING. BACKING AND GROUNDS: A. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for providing the blocking, backing and grounds in all walls and above ceiling necessary for the installation of its work. B. Each Subcontractor shall make suitable preparations for the installation of its work including all piping, conduit, hangers, inserts, anchors, grounds and supports that are to be embedded in concrete, masonry walls, floors, partitions or structural members, or that are to pass through or be attached thereto. Each Subcontractor shall provide and install proper sleeves, boxes, receptacles or chases for all openings or recesses to receive its work occurring in or passing through such members, all of which shall be located accurately and secured firmly in place before any such masonry has been erected or concrete poured. 20. PROTECTION OF ADJACENT FACILITIES: A. Each Subcontractor shall provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing underground utilities, sewers and building foundations, encountered during excavation work to protect them from collapse or other type of damage until such time as they are to be removed, incorporated into the new work, or can be properly backfilled upon completion of new work. B. Each Subcontractor shall provide and maintain protection during site work for all existing lawns, trees, curbs, gutters, drives, walks and buildings not noted for removal. Damaged work shall be repaired or replaced, and damaged lawns shall be replaced with sod. Trees shall be protected until final grading has been completed. C. Where work is conducted above or adjacent to existing roofing, protect the existing roof as required. Storage of materials will not be permitted on any roof. D. Where floors are subject to construction traffic, protect the entire floor as required. 21. CLEANING UP: A. M.A. Mortenson Company shall oversee cleaning and insure that building and grounds are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and debris. B. Each Subcontractor shall: Clean up all waste materials, rubbish and debris resulting from his own operations at such frequencies as required by M.A. Mortenson Company. 2. Each Subcontractor shall deposit debris in dumpster provided by M.A. Mortenson Company after first reducing such debris to minimum volume, e.g., all cardboard boxes are to be opened and flattened, all dunnage to be disassembled, etc. 1. 16B �;. C. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible to remove from the site waste materials of such size and shape or weight to make use of dumpster type box unreasonable. D. No trash chute will be provided for the project. Removal of each Subcontractor's waste materials, rubbish and debris from levels above the first floor, shall be the responsibility of the Subcontractor. E. If the Subcontractor fails to comply with the requirements of this Article, M.A. Mortenson Company, with prior notice to the Subcontractor, shall perform the necessary clean up and deduct the cost of such work from the monies due, or to become due, said Subcontractor. 22. USE OF PREMISES, BARRICADES AND PROTECTIONS: A. Subcontractors shall be subject to such rules and regulations for the conduct of the work as the Owner or M.A. Mortenson Company may establish. B. Before entering upon the work, the Subcontractor shall ascertain from M.A. Mortenson Company what entrances, routes or roadways shall be used for access for work, and use only the entrance, routes and roadways designed for movement of personnel, materials and vehicles to and from the work. 23. TEMPORARY STAIRS, LADDERS, RAMPS, RUNWAYS AND BARRICADES: A. Each Subcontractor is to provide and maintain all necessary temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, and runways to facilitate conveyance of men, materials, tools and equipment for proper execution of the work. All protection and safety barricades, devices, covers, etc., shall be provided by each Subcontractor as it relates to the safe conduct of its work in accordance with OSHA requirements. 24. SAFETY: A. Each Subcontractor is responsible for its own safety program in accordance with applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act. B. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for payment of all fines and/or claims for damages levied against the Owner, Architect, or M.A. Mortenson Company for safety deficiencies relating to the conduct of Subcontractor's work. C. Every Subcontractor shall comply with all applicable local, State, and Federal Safety and Health Regulations and with the Mortenson Safety Program. D. Mortenson has always considered safety of prime importance. A Safety Program has been established to control losses through accident prevention. As a Subcontractor and employer, you are required by Federal and State Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, Standards, Codes, Rules and Regulations, in addition to your contract with Mortenson, to provide protection for customers, employees, and the public who may come into contact with your operations. 17B 26. DAILY FIELD REPORTS: 27. RECORD DRAWINGS: 28. TESTING A. REQUIREMENTS 25. BUILDERS RISK INSURANCE: The Owner is providing Builders Risk Insurance and Mortenson is providing an additional Difference of Coverage policy. See attached installation floater policy standard conditions (3 pages). If Subcontractor requires deductible limits and/or conditions different than provided, it is the Subcontractor's responsibility to arrange and pay for any additional coverage. The Subcontractor shall submit Daily Field Work Reports defining activity, manpower, equipment and materials received and installed. These reports shall be turned into Mortenson field office by 10:00 a.m. the following day. Failure to provide reports as directed may result in progress payment delays. The Subcontractor shall keep one record copy "as- builts" of all specifications, plans, addenda, supplementary drawings, shop drawings, change orders and clarifications as it pertains to their work. These as- builts are updated each week. Periodic checks will be made by Mortenson to ensure that the updates are being done. Pay Applications will be held until updates are completed and verified (by Mortenson) if updates are found to be incomplete. 1. M.A. Mortenson will employ and pay for Independent Testing Laboratory services to perform specified construction materials testing (earthwork, concrete and welding) only. a. M.A. Mortenson shall maintain the right to test and/or inspect any material or equipment at any state of construction or fabrication, whether or not specified, including but not limited to the manufacturer's plant or mill. Such inspection will not release the Subcontractor from any responsibility or liability with respect to such material or equipment. b. Any tests and/or inspections performed by said testing laboratory on behalf of M.A. Mortenson shall be paid for by M.A. Mortenson. Any necessary re- testing or re- inspection required due to the failure of an initial test and/or inspection will be performed on behalf of M.A. Mortenson at Subcontractor's expense. c. Work concealed before specified test and/or inspections are performed shall be exposed, tested, approved, and restored at Subcontractor's expense. d. Each Subcontractor shall cooperate with the Independent Testing Laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. 2. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible to provide Work, as specified, to facilitate testing by the Independent Testing Laboratory. 3. These inspections and tests do not relieve the Subcontractor of its responsibility to perform the Work properly in accordance with the Contract Documents, and do not relieve the Subcontractor of its responsibilities to carry out its quality control, inspections, and supplemental testing. B. RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1. Provide inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or approvals of public authorities having jurisdiction. 18B D. SUBCONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 1913 2. Refer to each individual section of the specifications for the tests to be performed by the Independent Testing Laboratory. C. LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF THE INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY 1. The Independent Testing Laboratory is not authorized to: a. Release, revoke, alter, relax or enlarge on requirements of the Contract Documents. b. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. c. Perform any duties of the Subcontractor. 1. Provide all tests as required by local or state code which are not performed by the Owner, M.A. Mortenson, or its agent. 2. Cooperate with Laboratory personnel, at all times provide access to the Work, storage areas, and to manufacturer's operations. 3. Secure and deliver to the Laboratory adequate quantities (as determined by M.A. Mortenson) of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing 4. Cooperate with Laboratory personnel in securing samples of materials to be used for testing purposes. 5. Provide M.A. Mortenson with the preliminary design mix proposed for concrete, mortar, specially placed concrete, and other material mixes, which require control by the Laboratory. 6. Ensure Laboratory access to all fabrication plants and concrete plant for inspections and testing as required by M.A. Mortenson. 7. Furnish copies of products test reports as directed by M.A. Mortenson. 8. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested. b. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. c. To facilitate inspections and tests. 9. Based on project schedule and project inspection dates, notify the Laboratory a minimum 24 hours in advance of required inspection to allow Laboratory scheduling of personnel and equipment. a. When tests or inspections are canceled by the Subcontractor after such notice, reimburse M.A. Mortenson for laboratory personnel, equipment and travel expenses incurred. The Subcontractor will be responsible for standby time and overtime. 10. Make arrangements with the Laboratory to pay for additional services as may be requested by the Subcontractor for its convenience. 11. Retain the services of an independent testing laboratory to prepare mix designs for each type of concrete and other material mixes required by the Contract Documents. Submit mix designs and cylinder tests of each type of concrete for review prior to commencement of the Work. SUBCONTRACTOR By: E. INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES 12. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible for the costs of additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial tests indicate Work does not comply with the Contract Documents. 1. Cooperate with the Owner, M.A. Mortenson, and the Subcontractor; provide qualified personnel after due notice. 2. Perform specific inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction: a. Comply with specific standards. b. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Promptly notify the Architect, M.A. Mortenson and Subcontractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work products. 4. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection to M.A. Mortenson and Subcontractor. 5. Perform additional tests as required by M.A. Mortenson. 6. Obtain product and material certifications from each Subcontractor and maintain same. Date) * * END OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS * * 20B M.A. MORTENSON COMPANY By: Project Manager ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 BID PACKAGE IV. STANDARD SUBCONTRACT AGREEMENT ("Architect "). 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. M. A. MORTENSON COMPANY SUBCONTRACT AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, effective this — day of , 19 , between M.A. Mortenson Company ('Mortenson ") and _ ( "Subcontractor "). WHEREAS, Mortenson has entered into a contract with ( "Owner ") to perform labor and fumish material for the constructionof located at ( "Project "), pursuant to Drawings and Specifications prepared by IN CONSIDERATION of their mutual promises herein, Subcontractor andMortenson agree as follows: 1.1 The Drawings, Specifications, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Addenda have been made available to Subcontractor for examination. All of these documents, and this Subcontract Agreement and itsExhibits through , attached hereto, constitute the Contract Documents ( "Contract Documents "). 1.2 In the event of conflict in the Contract Documents, the provisions of this Subcontract Agreement shall govern. 1.3 Subcontractor binds itself to Mortenson under this Agreement with respect to Subcontractor's Work in the same manner as Mortenson is bound to Owner under the Contract Documents. 1.4 Subcontractor has carefully examined and understands the Contract Documents, has investigated the site of the Work and the conditions under which it is to be performed, and enters into this Subcontract on the basis of its own examination, investigation and evaluation of such matters and not in reliance upon any opinions or representations ofNortenson, Owner, or any of their respective officers, agents, or employees. 2. SCOPE OF WORK. Subcontractor shall furnish and pay for all supervision, labor, materials, tools, equipment, services, scaffolds, appliances and all other items necessary to fully perform this Subcontract, consistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents, including completion of all of the following ( "Work "): 3. SUBCONTRACT PRICE. For the full and satisfactory performance of this Subcontract, in compliance with the provisions of this Agreement, Mortenson shall pay Subcontractor the fixed sumof Dollars (5 ). This sum may be changed only in accordance with the provisions of this Subcontract Agreement. 4. TAXES AND CONTRIBUTIONS. The Contract Price includes, and Subcontractor hereby accepts, exclusive liability for payment of all Federal, state, county, municipal and other taxes imposed by law or contract, and based upon labor, services, materials, equipment or other items acquired, performed, furnished or used in connection with the Work, including but not limited to (a) contributions, taxes or premiums (including interest and penalties) measured upon payroll or required to be withheld from employees; (b) sales, use, personal property and other taxes (including interest and penalties), whether stated separately, imposed by reason of pertormance of the Work, or any materials, equipment, labor, services or other items in connection with the Work; or (c) pension, welfare, vacation, annuity and other benefit contributions payable in connection with labor agreements or applicable law. 22B 5. LAWS AND PERMITS. The Subcontract Price includes, and Subcontractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, and fees necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractor shall perform the Work in compliance with all applicable Federal, state, municipal and local laws, codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, and requirements, including without limitation those relating to O.S.H.A., discrimination in employment. fair employment practices and equal employment opportunity, without additional expense tMortenson, and shall correct, at its own cost and expense, any violations thereof resulting from pertbrmance of the Work. Subcontractor shall furnish such proof as Mortenson may request showing compliance and correction of violations. 6. TIME OF COMPLETION. 6.1 Subcontractor shall begin Work as soon as the Project is ready for Work or,within _ calendar days after being notified in writing by Mortenson, and shall prosecute and complete the Work in accordance with the construction schedule, as such may be from time to time revised and within the following time limits: 6.2 Subcontractor shall promptly furnish all data requested byMortenson for preparation and revision of construction schedules. 6.3 Should Subcontractor be delayed in the commencement, prosecution or completion of the Work by any cause beyond Subcontractor's control and not due to any fault, neglect, act or omission on its part, then Subcontractor shall be entitled to an extension of timeSuch extension shall be for a period equivalent to that granted to Mortensorby Owner under the Contract Documents for the same cause of delay, and shall release and discharge Mortenson from any and all claims by Subcontractor on account of the delay. Subcontractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time unless a claim therefor is presented in writing toMortenson within five (5) calendar days of the commencement of such claimed delay. Notwithstanding the toregoing Subcontractor shall be entitled to compensation for delay if, and to the extent, thatMortenson secures compensation from Owner for delay on behalf of Subcontractor. 7. PAYMENTS. 7.1 Subcontractor shall submit an application for payment onMortenson's form not later than the 25th day of each month for (a) 90% of the value of Subcontractor's labor and materials incorporated into the Work as computed on the basis of the schedule of values, prices and quantities of Work, as determined byMortenson and Owner or Architect; and (b) to the extent allowable by the Contract Documents, 90% of the value of materials not incorporated into the Work but delivered and stored at the Project site. Prior to its first application for payment, Subcontractor shall submit a detailed schedule of values in form acceptable toMortenson for use in checking Subcontractor's monthly application for payment. The schedule of values will be used for payment purposes only and shall not relieve Subcontractor from furnishing all Work required byhis Subcontract. All applications must be certified and completed utilizing the payment forms required by the Contract Documents. Subcontractor agrees that, upon request by Mortenson, it shall furnish such information, and consents of surety as Mortenson may require, to confirm Subcontractor's entitlement to payment. 7.2 No payment will be made to Subcontractor until receipt by Mortenson of (a) an executed Subcontract Agreement; (b) evidence of insurance consistent with Article 16; and (c) payment and performance bonds required under Article 18 hereof. 7.3 Monthly progress payments (lessretainage) shall be made to Subcontractor within seven (7) days aftcrMortenson's receipt of payment from Owner, so long as Subcontractor is not in default or breach of this Subcontract and is not subject to other reasons for withholding. Mortenson and Subcontractor expressly agree that payment toMortenson on the Subcontractor's account by the Owner is an absolute condition precedent to Mortenson's obligations to pay the Subcontractor under this Subcontract. Subcontractor expressly agrees that it relies on the credit of the Owner, not Mortenson, for payment of its Work. Subcontractor shall not be entitled to payment to the extent there is: (a) any indebtedness owed by Subcontractor to Mortenson; (b) defective Work not remedied or defective materials not removed and replaced; (c) third party claims; (d) claimed failure of Subcontractor to make payments to its subcontractors, suppliers or laborers; (e) reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Subcontract Price; (f) damage to Mortensonor another contractor or subcontractor; (g) unsatisfactory or untimely prosecution of the Work by Subcontractor; or (h) failure of Subcontractor to comply with the Contract Documents. 7.4 Mortenson shall have the right at all times to contact Subcontractor's sub-subcontractors and suppliers to ensure that the same are being paid by Subcontractor for labor or materials furnished for use in performing Subcontractor's Work. 7.5 Should Subcontractor: (a) fail to make timely payment to its suppliers, subsubcontractors, laborers, or fringe benefit funds; (b) fail to compensate Mortenson or another contractor or subcontractor for damage caused by Subcontractor; or (c) fail to perform its clean up obligations pursuant to paragraph 8.5 hereof,Mortenson, in its sole discretion, may make direct payment to such individuals or entities and reduce the Subcontract Price accordingly. 7.6 When required by Mortenson and as a prerequisite to payment, Subcontractor shall provide, in a form satisfactory to Mortenson, partial lien or claim waivers and affidavits from Subcontractor, and its sub-subcontractors and suppliers for completed work. Such waivers may be made conditional upon payment. 23B c 7.7 When payment is based upon quantities at applicable unit prices, Subcontractor shall substantiate the quantities, and Mortenson and Owner shall have the right to examine, copy and audit relevant books and records of Subcontractor or any suisubcontractor in order to verify accuracy and completeness of the quantities. 7.8 Final payment to Subcontractor shall be due after completion and acceptance of the Work byMortenson and Architect and within seven (7) days of Mortenson's receipt from Owner of final payment for the Work, provided that: (a) Subcontractor shall have furnished evidence satisfactory to Mortenson that there are no claims, obligations, or liens for labor, services, materials, equipment, taxes or other items performed, furnished or incurred in connection with the Work; (b) Subcontractor shall have executed and delivered in a form satisfactory to Mortenson a General Release in favor of Mortenson, Mortenson's surety, if any, and Owner; and (c) Subcontractor shall have delivered toMortenson written consent of its surety, if any, to final payment. Final payment to Subcontractor shall constitute waiver of any past, present and future claims by Subcontractor against Mortenson and Owner arising out of payment for Work under this Subcontract. 7.9 Progress or final payments shall not be acceptance of improper, faulty or defective Work or material, shall not release Subcontractor of any of its obligations under this Subcontract and shall not constitute a waiver of any rights or provisions hereof b3Mortenson. Beneficial use or occupancy is not acceptance of the Work. 7.10 Subcontractor shall pay promptly for all materials, skills, labor and equipment used in performance of this Subcontract, as bills or claims become due. Subcontractor shall protect the Project and defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner andMortenson and Mortenson's surety, if any, from and against all claims, bond claims, equitable liens, mechanics' liens, damages, losses and expenses on account thereof, including without limitation legal fees and disbursements paid or incurred by Owner orMortenson in connection therewith. 8. PROSECUTION OF WORK. 8.1 Subcontractor shall perform the Work in a diligent, efficient and skillful manner, as the Work or any portion thereof bcomes available, to allow Mortenson to promote the general progress of the entire construction and so that Subcontractor's Work shall not interfere, hinder or delay other work. 8.2 Should Subcontractor delay the progress of the Work or of the Project, Sibcontractor shall take necessary action to meet and ( ! maintain job progress, without additional compensation, and shall be liable to and rcimbursdvlortenson for damages resulting from such delay. 8.3 Subcontractor shall promptly secure delivery commitmens, place orders for materials, equipment and services required in connection with the Work to avoid delays, and shall fumish copies of procurement documents and purchase orders upon request. Subcontractor shall fumish goods, materials, equipment and services in compliance with all applicable safety, certification and testing codes and laws. 8.4 Shipments of all goods, materials and equipment to the Project shall be consigned to Subcontractor c /oMortenson, c/o Owner with all transportation, freight or delivery charges prepaid by Subcontractor. Subcontractor shall be solely responsible for receiving and unloading shipments. 8.5 Subcontractor shall clean up and remove all debris caused by its operations. Upon written noticeMortenson may arntnge to have this work performed and charge the cost to Subcontractor. 8.6 Subcontractor shall be solely responsible for protection of its Work and for loss or damage to materials, tools, equipment, or other personal property, owned or rented or used by Subcontractor in performance of its Work. 8.7 When as -built drawings are required by the Contract Documents, Subcontractor shall record asbuilt conditions on the Drawings and Detail Drawings in a form acceptable to Mortenson, on a weekly basis, during performance of the Work. 8.8 Notwithstanding dimensions given in the Drawings, Detail Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents, Subcontractor shall take such measurements as will insure proper matching and fitting of Subcontractor's Work. 8.9 Subcontractor shall promptly prepare and submit to Mortenson such shop drawings, submittals and samples as may be necessary to describe completely the details of the Work and to ensure timely fabrication, delivery and installation of the Work. Approval of such shop drawings by Mortenson shall mean only that the submission conforms to the general concept of the Project, and shall not relieve Subcontractor of its obligation to perform the Work in compliance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Should performance of the Work hereunder depend upon performance of other work, Subcontractor shall carefully examine all contiguous or dependent work, determine whether it is suitable for performance of the Work hereunder, report immediately any unsuitable conditions to Mortenson in writing, and allow Mortenson reasonable time to have such unsuitable conditions remedied. Unless Subcontractor reports such unsuitable conditions, Subcontractor shall be deemed to have accepted dependent work as adequate for completion of the Work. 8.11 Subcontractor is responsible for intermeshing of various parts of its Work so that no part shall be left unfinished or incomplete owing to any disagreement between Subcontractor and its subsubcontractors or other subcontractors. 8.12 No substitutions of similar supplies, materials or equipment for items called for by the Contract Documents shall be made unless approved in writing by Mortenson, Owner and Architect, which approval shall not relieve Subcontractor from satisfactory and timely completion of all Work, or from compliance of all Work with the Contract Documents. 24B 11. SAFETY. 9. LABOR. Subcontractor shall not employ personnel, means, materials or equipment which may cause strikes, work stoppages or interferences by workers employed by Subcontractor,Mortenson or other contractors or subcontractors. Subcontractor agrees to be bound by any applicable Project Labor Agreement. 10. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT. Subcontractor shall provide all tools and equipment necessary to perform its Work, including but not limited to scaffolds, hoisting and specialty items. Monenson's tools and equipment shall be available to Subcontractor only atMortenson's discretion and on mutually satisfactory terms. Subcontractor agrees to assume sole responsibility for all claims for loss or damage to its property, and Mortenson's property, arising out of Subcontractor's use ofMortenson's equipment, including without limitation hoisting of material. Subcontractor agrees that operators ofMortcnson's equipment during the period of Subcontractor's use, either singly or with others, shall be deemed loaned servants of Subcontractor even though actually employed byMortenson or others. 11.1 Subcontractor shall perform the Work in a safe manner, shall comply with all sdety measures initiated by Mortenson or required by the Contract Documents, and shall comply with all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any public authority for the safety of persons or property, including such provisions as are stricter than the safety measures initiated byMortenson or required by the Contract Documents, Subcontractor shall be solely responsible for protection and safety of its employees, including employees of its subcontractors and suppliers of every tier, for final selection of safety methods and means, for required safety reports and records, for daily inspection of its work area and its employees' safety equipment, and for instruction of its employees on health and safety, including weekly safety meetings. Subcontractor agrees to establish a goal of zero accidents and injuries for the Project, and to implement and maintain and enforce a safety program consistent with such goal. Subcontractor agrees to comply with the Mortenson Zero Injury Safety Training Manual and, if requested in writing, to prepare a written site - specific safety plan for the Project prior to commencing the Work. Subcontractor agrees to complete all documents and conduct or participate in all site - specific programs related to elimination of accidents and injuries at the site, as enumerated in Exhibit _ attached hereto. 11.2 Subcontractor shall reimburse Mortenson for all costs incurred by Mortenson arising out of or connected with a failure or alleged failure of Subcontractor to comply with this Article, including costs of investigation and fines and penalties for alleged safety violations by Subcontractor, regardless of whethcrMortenson has or has not assisted or advised Subcontractor in fulfilling such responsibilities. 11.3 Subcontractor shall stop any part of the Work which either Mortenson or Subcontractor determines to be unsafe until corrective measures have been taken. Failure on the part ofMortenson to stop any part of the Work shall in no way relieveSubcontractor of its responsibility hereunder. 12. CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD WORK ORDERS. 12.1 Mortenson shall have the right by written order (change order or field work order), without notice to Subcontractor's surety, if any, to order changes consisting of additions or deletions to the Work, or othcr revisions to the scope of Work or time of completion of this Subcontract. Subcontractor shall submit to Mortenson, in writing, within twenty (20) days of receipt of notification of the change, or within such shorter period as may be required by the Contract Documents, any claim for adjustment of the Subcontract Price. Should issuance of instructions, drawings, or directions by other than written order be claimed to result in additional costs, Subcontractor shall submit written notice tMortenson within five (5) calendar days of receipt thereof and prior to commencing such work. Subcontractor shall not be entitled to change or adjustment unless authorized in writing by Mortenson. Subcontractor shall not have the right to maintain an action in court or arbitration to recover for extra work, unless Subcontractor has complied with the requirements set forth above, 12.2 The value of the Work to be changed, added or deleted shall be determined by one or more of the fdbwing methods or combinations thereof as Mortenson may elect: (1) mutual acceptance of a lump sum with properly itemized costs; (2) unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon (unit prices shall be deemed to include an allowance for all of Subcontractor's direct and indirect costs, including, without limitation, office or shop expense, overhead, profit and bond); or (3) actual field cost incurred in performance of the changed Work, plus allowance for overhead, supervision and profit, defined as follows: 12,2.1 Actual field cost shall mean costs necessarily incurred in the proper performance of the Work and paid by Subcontractor at rates not higher than the standard paid in the locality of the Project (except with the prior consent oMortenson) defined as follows: (a) Wages paid for labor in the direct employ of Subcontractor in performance of the Work plus a payroll mark -up of % for field labor and % for fabrication shop labor to cover all overhead items applicable to payroll, such as insurance, taxes, F.1.C.A., workers' compensation, unemployment taxes, and fringe benefits. (b) Net cost of all materials, supplies and equipment used in or incorporated in the Work. (c) Third party rental charges of all necessary machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, used in performing the changed Work, including installation, minor repairs and replacements, dismantling, removal, transportation and delivery costs thereof at rental charges consistent with those prevailing in the area. Total third party rental charges on machinery or equipment rented under an agreement containing a purchase option clause shall not exceed 75% of the option purchase price. Subcontractor owned machinery and equipment used on the Project;hall be charged at not more than 75% of current A.E.D. rates. 12.2.2 The maximum percentage allowance added to itemized costs under a lump sum proposal or to actual field cost shall be 10% for changed or extra work performed by Subcontractor's own forces and an additional 5% for changed or extra work performed by a sub-subcontractor. The allowance will be paid as full compensation for Subcontractor's and subsubcontractor's profit, general superintendence, hand tools, capital and interest expense, insurance expense, field office expense, overhead, and all other elements of extra cost not defined herein as actual 25 B field cost. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the allowance payable to Subcontractor and its sub - subcontractors pursuant to this paragraph shall not exceed the lesser of (a) 15% or (b) the maximum mark -up permitted in the Contract Documents for changed or extra work lesMortenson's mark -up on such work. 12.2.3 Mortenson shall have the right to inspect, copy and audit the books and records of Subcontractor or any sulsubcontractor making claim for reimbursement for actual field costs and allowances in order to verify the accuracy andallowability of all costs and allowances claimed. 12.3 Should the parties be unable to agree as to the value of theWork to be changed, added or omitted, Subcontractor shall proceed with the Work promptly under written order ofMortenson and the Work shall be paid for at actual field costs or other applicable method approved by Mortenson. 12.4 All changes, additions or deletions to the Work ordered in writing byMortenson shall be deemed part of the Work hereunder and shall be performed in compliance with all provisions of the Contract Documents. 13. INSPECTION. 14. TAKING OVER PERFORMANCE- TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT. 13.1 Mortenson, Architect, Owner and their authorized representatives shall have the right to inspect and test the Work and the components thereof at all times and places to verify compliance with the Contract Documents and standards of good workmanship. 13.2 Subcontractor shall provide safe facilities for inspection of the Work by Mortenson, Architect and their authorized representatives in the field, at shops, or at any other place where materials or equipment for the Work arc in preparation, testing manufacture, treatment or storage. 13.3 All inspections and tests are for the benefit ofMortenson and Owner and shall not relieve Subcontractor of responsibility for providing its own quality control measures to assure that the Work complies with the Contract Documents. Inspection or testing by Mortenson or Architect shall not be construed as constituting acceptance and shall not relieve Subcontractor of responsibility for any noncompliance, damage to or loss of the Work prior to acceptance, or in any way affect the continuing rights olv1ortenson or Owner after acceptance of completed Work. 13.4 Within twenty -four (24) hours after receiving written notice from Mortenson that Work has been rejected by Mortenson or Architect as defective or in any way failing to comply with the Contract Documents, Subcontractor, at its own expense shall remove all portions of such Work from the premises and shall replace the same with conforming Work and make good all work of others damaged or destroyed by or as a result of such defective, or nonconforming Work or by removal or replacement thereof. 14.1 Should Subcontractor at any time: (a) fail to maintain the insurance coveragesspecified in Article 16 hereof; (b) fail to provide the payment and performance bonds required in Article 18 hereof; (c) fail to supply sufficient skilled workers, equipment or materials of proper quality and quantity; (d) fail to make timely payments for labor or materials; (e) fail to proceed with the Work in the sequence directed byMortenson; (1) fail to prosecute the Work with prompmess and diligence; (g) cause stoppage, delay or interference to work oflvtortenson or any other contractor or subcontractor; (h) fail to perform the Work in compliance with the Contract Documents; or should i there be filed by or against Subcontractor a petition in bankruptcy or for an arrangement or reorganization Mortenson being unwilling to accept and hereby declines performance by any trustee in bankruptcy); or (j) Subcontractor become insolvent or go into liquidation or dissolution or make a general assignment for the benefit of creditors or otherwise acknowledge insolvency; then in any of such events, each of which shall constitute a default of SubcontractorMortenson shall have the right, to the extent permitted by law, and in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by the Contract Documents or by law, after seventbwo (72) hours written notice to Subcontractor mailed or delivered to its last known address, i to perform (through itself or through others) any uncompleted part of the Work and to deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due to Subcontractor under this Subcontract or (ii) to terminate employment of Subcontractor for all or any portion of the Work, enter upon the premises and take possession of all materials, equipment, scaffolds, tools, and other items thereon, all of which Subcontractor hereby transfers, assigns and sets over to Mortensorfor the purpose of completing the Work, and to employ persons as necessary to complete the Work and to provide all labor, services, materials, equipment and other items required therefor. 14.2 In case of termination, Subcontractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment under this Subcontract untithe Work shall be wholly completed to the satisfaction ofMortenson, at which time, if the unpaid balance of the amount to be paid under this Subcontract shall exceed the cost incurred by Mortenson in completing the Work, such excess shall be paid by Mortensonto Subcontractor, but if such cost shall exceed such unpaid balance, then Subcontractor shall pay the difference to Mortenson. Such costs shall include the cost of completing the Work in conformance with the Contract Documents and of performing and furnishing all labor, services, materials, equipment, and other items required therefor, and also all losses, damages, costs and expense, including legal fees and disbursements incurred by reason of or resulting from Subcontractor's default. 15, CONVENIENCE TERMINATION. 15.1 Mortenson may terminate this Subcontract in whole or in part, at any time by written notice to Subcontractor whether or not Subcontractor is in default, in the event and to the extent that Owner has exercised any of its rights of terminating the agreement betweerMortenson and Owner. Such termination shall be effective at the time and in the manner specified in said notice and shall be without prejudice to any claims which Mortenson or Owner may have against Subcontractor. Upon receipt of any such notice, Subcontractor shall, unless the notice directs otherwise: (a) immediately discontinue the Work on the date and to the extent specified in the notice; (b) place no further orders for materials, equipment or services, except as may be necessary for completion ot'such portion of the Work as is not discontinued; (c) promptly make every reasonable effort to procure cancellations, upon terms satisfactory to Mortenson, of all orders or of sub-subcontracts to the extent they relate to the performance of the 26B • .. `.•rt: ; ;.:M 5s7t toM. 7M: tN e... s.+ oM .wva,..q.......s.a....w,.ru.••■ ... Work discontinued; and (d) thereafter execute only that portion of the Work as may be necessary to preserve and protect Work already in progress and to protect materials and equipment at the Project site or in transit thereto. 15.2 Subcontractor waives any claims for damages, including loss of anticipated profits for uncompleted Work, on account of termination by Mortensonpursuant to paragraph 15.1 and shall accept as its sole remedy payment of the amount recovered b)Mortenson from Owner allocated as compensation for Subcontractor's Work. 16. INSURANCE. 16.1 Prior to starting the Work, Subcontractor shall procure, maintain and pay for such insurance as will protect against claims for bodily injury or death, or for damage to property, including loss of use, which may arise out of operations by Subcontractor or by any sub - subcontractor or by anyone employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such insurance note less than the greater of coverages and limits of liability specified in paragraph 16.2 below, any coverages and limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or coverages and limits required by law. 16.2 Subcontractor shall procure and maintain the following minimum insurmce coverages and limits of liability: Workers' Compensation Statutory Limits Employer's Liability S1,000,000 each accident 51,000,000 disease policy limit 51,000,000 disease each employee Commercial General Liability 52,000,000 each occurrence 52,000,000 aggregate (applicable on a per project basis) Comprehensive Automobile Liability 52,000,000 each accident Commercial General Liability insurance required under this paragraph shall be written on an occurrence form and shall include coverage for Products/Completed Operations (extending two (2) years after final acceptance of the Project by Owner or such longer period as the Contract Documents may require), Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations, Personal Injury with Employment Exclusion (if any) deleted, Blanket XCU and Blanket Contractual Liability insurance applicable to Subcontractor's defense and indemnity obligations under Article 17 below, and other contractual indemnities assumed by Subcontractor under the Contract Documents. Commercial General Liability insurance shall include "stop gap" coverage for work in those states where Workers' Compensation insurance is provided through a state fund if Employer's liability coverage is not available. Comprehensive Automobile Liability insurance required under this paragraplshall include coverage for all owned, hired and non -owned automobiles. Workers' Compensation coverage shall include a waiver of subrogation againsMortenson and Owner. 16.3 Employer's Liability, Commercial General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability insurance may be arranged under single policies for full minimum limits required, or by a combination of underlying policies with the balance provided by an Excess or Umbrella Liability policy. The general aggregate on the Commercial GeneralLiability policy shall apply on a project specific basis. 16.4 Subcontractor shall endorse its Commercial General Liability (including products /completed operatins coverage), Comprehensive Automobile Liability, and Umbrella/Excess Liability policies to addMortenson, Owner, and such other parties as Mortenson is required under the main contract to name as additionalinsureds on Mortenson's insurance, as "additional insureds" with respect to liability arising out of (a) operations performed for Mortenson or Owner by or for Subcontractor, (b) acts or omissions ofMortenson or Owner in connection with their general supervision of operations by or for Subcontractor, (c) Subcontractor's use of Mortenson'sools and equipment, and (d) claims for bodily injury or death brought against Mortenson or Owner by Subcontractor's employees, or the employees of Subcontractor's subcontractors of any tier, however caused, related to the performance of operations under the Contract Documents. Such insurance afforded to Mortenson, Owner, and others as additional insureds under Subcontractor's policies shall be primary insurance and not excess over, or contributing with, any insurance purchased or maintained by Mortenson or Owner, or others required to be included as additionalinsureds. 16.5 Subcontractor shall maintain in effect all insurancecoverages required under this Article, or by the other Contract Documents, at Subcontractor's sole expense and with insurance carriers licensed to do business in the State in which the Project is located and having a current A.M. Best rating of no less than B +, unless another A.M. Best rating is specifically accepted by Mortcnsorin writing. In the event Subcontractor fails to procure or maintain any insurance required by this Article,Mortenson may, at its option, purchase such coverage and deduct the cost thereof from any monies due to Subcontractor, or withhold funds from Subcontractor in an amount sufficient to protccMortenson and other insured parties, or terminate this Agreement pursuant to its terms. 16.6 All insurance policies shall contain a provision thatcoverages and limits afforded thereunder shall not be canceled, materially changed, non - renewed, or restrictive modifications added, without thirty (30) days prior written notice to Mortenson. Certificates of Insurance shall be filed with Mortenson prior to start of Subcontractor's Work. Renewal certificates shall be provided toMortenson not Tess than ten (10) days prior to the expiration date of any of the required policies. All Certificates of Insurance shall be in a form acceptable toMortenson and shall provide satisfactory evidence that Subcontractor has complied with all insurance requirements. Mortensorshall not be obligated to review such certificates or other evidence of insurance, or to advise Subcontractor of any deficiencies in such documents, and receipt thereof shall not relieve Subcontractor from, nor be deemed a waiver of Mortenson's right to enforce, the terms of Subcontractor's obligations hereunder. Mortenson shall have the right to examine any policy required under subparagraphs 16.1,16.2 and 16.3. 16.7 To the extent of coverage atTorded by Builder's Risk orany other property or equipment floater insurance applicable to the Work or the Project or equipment used in performance of the Work or the Project, regardless of whether such insurance is owned by or for the benefit of Subcontractor, Mortenson, Owner, or their respective agents and subcontractors,Mortenson and Subcontractor waive all rights against each other and Owner, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees each of the other, for loss or damage to the extent that the interests otMortenson and Subcontractor are covered by such insurance, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. If policies of insurance referred 28B r : 13 to in this paragraph require an endorsement to provide for continued coverage where there is a waiver of subrogation, the owners of such policies will cause them to be so endorsed. 16.8 Any deductible amount applied to any loss payable under the Builders Risk Insurance shall be borne by the insured whose Work is damaged in direct proportion as its individual loss bears to the total loss, regardless of whether such loss is to work installed and completed, to materials storcd on or off site, or to materials in transit. Mortenson and Owner neither represent nor assume responsibility for the adequacy of the Builders Risk Insurance to protect the interests of Subcontractor. It shall be the obligation of Subcontractor to purchase and maintain any supplementary property insurance that it deems necessary to protect its interest in the Work. 16,9 If the Work of this Agreement includes design, Subcontractor shall procure, maintain, and pay for Professional Errors and Omissions insurance with limits of not less than $2,000,000 per claim and $2,000,000 annual aggregate. If such insurance is written on a claims made basis, the retroactive date shall be prior to the start of Subcontractor's Work. Subcontractor agrees to maintain such coverage for two years after final acceptance of the Project by the Owner or such longer period as the Contract Documents may require. Renewal policies during this period shall maintain the same retroactive date. 17. INDEMNITY. 17.1 Subcontractor agrees to assume entire responsibility and liability for all damages or injury to all persons, whether employees or otherwise, and to all property, including the loss of use therefrom, arising out of, arising from or in any manner connected with the exccution of the Work under this Subcontract or occurring or resulting from the use by Subcontractor, its agents or employees, of materials, equipment, instrumentalities or other property, whether the same be owned by Mortenson, Owner, Subcontractor or third parties; and, to the fullest extent permitted by law, Subcontractor shall defend and indemnifyMortenson, Owner and their agents and employees from and against all such claims, damages, losses and expenses, including without limitation claims for whichMortenson or Owner may be or may be claimed to be liable, and legal fees and disbursements paid or incurred to defend any such claims or to enforce the provisions of this Article. 17.2 Subcontractor shall procure, maintain and pay for such general liability, contractual liability and employer's liability insurance (including endorsements) as will insure the provisions of this Article and other contractual indemnities assumed by Subcontractor in this Subcontract to the fullest extent insurable, but not Icss than thecoverages and limits specified in Article 16 above. 17.3 In any claims against Mortenson or Owner or any of their agents or employees by any employee of Subcontractor, anyone employed by Subcontractor, or anyone whose acts the Subcontractor may be liable, the indemnification under this Article 17 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 18. BONDS. 18.1 If indicated in the space provided below, Subcontractorshall obtain and fumish to Mortenson performance and payment bonds covering faithful performance of this Subcontract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. The bonds shall be written orMonenson's Subcontract Perfonnance Bond and Payment Bond forms, each in the full amount of the Subcontract Price. The penal sum of the bonds shall be increased in the same amount as any increase in the Subcontract Price. The surety(s) executing the bonds shall be authorized to conduct surety business in the state in which the Project is located and shall be listed in the current Department of Treasury Circular No. 570, with an underwriting limitation equal to or greater than the penal sum of the bonds to be furnished. The premium for such bonds shall be included in the Subcontract Price and shall be paid by Subcontractor. Bonds Required Bonds Not Required 18.2 Subcontractor shall furnish such performance and payment bonds, if required above, within ten (10) days of receipt of this Subcontract, but in any event prior to commencement of any Work under this Subcontract. Should Subcontractor fail to fumish the required bonds within the specified time, Mortenson shall have the right to terminate this Subcontractpursuant to Article 14. 19. PATENT INFRINGEMENT. Subcontractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights arising out of the Work. 20. WARRANTY. 20.1 Subcontractor warrants and guarantees that it shall furnish new materials and equipnent of good quality, fit for the purpose intended and free from defects and in compliance with all requirements of the Contract Documents; that without cost tcMortenson or Owner it shall promptly correct improper or defective Work, materials or equipment and other work affected by such correction which may be discovered within one year from the date of final acceptance of the Project by Owner. Subcontractor shall also provide any broader guarantee or longer warranty period required by the Contract Documents. Required equipment and system warranty documents and as -built drawings shall be delivered tcMortenson within thirty (30) days of completion of the Work. Nothing contained in this paragraph shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Subcontractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one year time period herein (and any other period elsewhere in the Contract Documents) relates only to Subcontractor's specific obligations to correct the Work and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced. 20.2 Subcontractor represents, warrants and covenants that the Work shall be Year 2000 Compliant and that Subcontractor shall conduct a thorough review and testing of the Work to verify that it is Year 2000 Compliant. For the purposes of this Agreement, an item is Year 2000 Compliant only if (a) it accurately processes, stores and displays, in an unambiguous manner, date data, including calculating, comparing, and sequencing dates correctly and without interruption, both before, during, and after the year 2000; (b) it correctly interoperates and exchanges 29B date data with any other system which conforms to clause (a); and (c) the specifications and instructions associated with the item contain no information contradicting clause (a) or (b). Upon becoming aware that the Work is or might be in breach of the Year 2000 Compliant requirement, Subcontractor shall immediately provide complete details to Mortenson regarding the actual or possible breach, and the steps that Subcontractor will take to cure such breach or to verify that there is no breach. Subcontractor agrees,to provide assistance, at no additional charge to Mortenson, which Mortenson reasonably believes is necessary for Mortenson to conduct its own Year 2000 Compliance testing. 21. DISPUTES. 21.1 If Arbitration of disputes is provided for in the Contract Documents, and ilMortenson, in its sole discretion, elects to demand Arbitration with Subcontractor individually, or as part of joint proceedings with Owner or others, any dispute arising betweenMortenson and Subcontractor under this Agreement, including breach thereof, shall be decided by arbitration in the manner provided for in the Contract Documents. 21.2 If the Contract Documents do not provide for Arbitration and ifMortenson, in its sole discretion, elects to demand Arbitration with Subcontractor individually, or as part of joint proceedings with Owner or others, any dispute arising between Mortensorrind Subcontractor under this Subcontract, including breach thereof, shall be decided by Arbitration in accordance with the then current Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. Arbitration proceedings shall be held in Minneapolis, Minnesota, or such other place as Mortenson may designate. The award rendered by the arbitrator shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 21.3 If the Contract Documents provide for administrative procedures for resolution of disputes, Subcontractor agrees to comply with such procedures and submit any claims or disputes to Mortenson in such manner and time as will permit Mortenson to comply with such administrative procedures. Subcontractor agrecsnot to institute (and to stay) legal or other proceedings againstMortenson until such administrative procedures and remedies have been exhausted. 21.4 Any claim by Subcontractor as a result of acts, errors or omissions of Owner or its agents or representatives, including without limitation Architect, may be advanced by Mortenson at its election and in its sole discretion. IfMortenson decides in good faith not to proceed with such claim, Subcontractor shall be entitled to proceed with its claim directly against the Owner or its agents. IfMortenson elects to advance Subcontractor's claim, Subcontractor's right of recovery on such claim shall be limited solely to that dollar amount and other relief, which is recovered by Mortenson on behalf of Subcontractor from Owner. Mortenson shall not be liable to the Subcontractor for any monies or other relief except those granted to Mortenson by Owner for the benefit of Subcontractor. Monies recovered from Owner on behalf of Subcontractor shall be paid by Mortenson to Subcontractor. Subcontractor hereby agrees to make no claim to further payment beyond the Subcontract Price arising out of the acts, errors, or omissions of Owner or its agents or representatives, except to the extent that Mortenson may receive funds from Owner on behalf of Subcontractor less costs and expenses incurred byMortenson in prosecuting such claims. 22. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. 22.1 Neither this Subcontract nor any monies due or to become due hereunder shall beassignable without prior written consent of Mortenson. Any assignment without prior written consent shall be of no effect and shall vest no right in the assignee against MortensonMortenson's consent to any assignment shall not relieve Subcontractor of any of its obligations under the Contract Documents, and Subcontractor shall remain as fully responsible for the defaults, acts and omissions of its assignees and all persons directly or indirectly employed by them as it is for its own defaults, acts and omissions and those of its own officers, agents, and employees. 22.2 Subcontractor shall submit to Mortenson a listing of all sub - subcontractors who will perform work on the Project. Subcontractor shall bind each of its subsubcontractors to all of the provisions of the Contract Documents with respect to the Work. Mortenson's consent to any subcontracting shall not create any contractual relationship betweenMortenson and any subsubcontractor to whom the Work or any portion thereof is subcontracted. 23. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY. Subcontractor, during performance of this Subcontract, shall take affirmative action to insure that all employees and applicants are treated without discrimination with regard to race, color, creed, age, sex, disability, or national origin; shall comply with all applicable Federal, state and local laws, ordinances, orders and regulations with respect to employment practices; and shall certify that it does not maintain or provide for its employees any segregated facilities at any of its establishments as required by the law, ordinance, order or regulation. 24. CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACT. Subcontractor hereby consents to assignment of this Subcontract Agreement by Mortenson to Owner (or Owner's Lender) provided that: (a) Such assignment is effective only after Owner's termination of the Contract between Owner and Mortenson for cause pursuant to the terms thereof. In such event, Subcontractor agrees to complete the Work for the benefit of the Owner (or Owner's Lender), conditioned upon Owner's written agreement (1) to pay for all labor, material, and services tumished at Owner's request and (2) to pay for all labor, material, and services previously rendered to the extent such amounts are due and payable to Subcontractor under the terms of this Subcontract Agreement. (b) Assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract between Mortenson and Owner. 25. MISCELLANEOUS. 25.1 Mortenson's waiver of a breach of the provisions of this Subcontract shall be made only in writing and shall not affect any other or future breaches. Mortenson's remedies herein are cumulative and in addition to other remedies in law or equity. 25.2 Subcontractor shall perform the provisions of this Subcontract as an independent contractor and shall not be an agent or employee of Mortenson. 31B Subcontractor's License No. 25.3 In the event any term or provision of this Subcontract is deemed void or unenforceable, it shall not thereby invalidate or be construed to invalidate any other term or provision of this Subcontract, which shall remain in full force and effect. 25.4 This Subcontract constitutes the entire agreement between the parties hereto and is effective on the date set forth above. No oral representations or other agreements have been made byMortenson except as stated in this Subcontract. This Subcontract may not be changed in any way except as herein provided, and no provision hereof may be waived byMortenson except in writing signed by its duly authorized officers or agent. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Subcontractor and Mortenson have executed this Subcontract as set forth below. M.A. MORTENSON COMPANY Subcontractor By By Its Its ,. (Insert License No., if any, for State or locality in which the Work is to be performed) * * END OF STANDARD SUBCONTRACT * * S L [1. ICG Communications. Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 BID PACKAGE V. EXHIBIT A - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (L SHEET /SPEC. DESCRIPTION NO. Drawings A -1 A -2 A -3 A -4 M -1 Mechanical Cover Sheet, General Notes, & Symbols M -2 Demolition Plan - Mechanical M -3 Miami Plan - Mechanical M -4 Details and Schedule - Mechanical E1.1 Electrical Cover Sheet E2.1 Electrical Riser Diagram E2.2 Electrical Panels Schedules E2.3 Electrical Panel Schedule E -3.1 Electrical Lighting Plan E -4.1 Electrical Power Plan E4.2 Mechanical Equipment Power Plan E4.3 Fiber Conduit Routing Plan E -5.1 Fire Alarm and Security Plan E6.1 Power /Generator New Work Plan E7.1 Electrical Details E7.2 Electrical Details P -1.1 Cover Sheet Plumbing P -2.1 Plumbing Demolition P3.1 Plumbing Miami Plan S.1 S.2 Specifications: 15001 /16001 Mechanical & Electrical Coordination 15010 Basic Mechanical requirements 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15140 Pipe Supports and Anchors cxS4Mfincwu The Contract Documents consist of the following: Project Manual — Dated August 25, 1999 as prepared by M. A. Mortenson Company General Conditions — AIA A201 as amended and included in BID PACKAGE. Drawings & Specifications. DATE ISSUED REVISION NO. [ 1 Motors & starters Mechanical Insulation Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Piping Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Equipment Fire Protection Systems Refrigerant Piping Air - Cooled Condensing Units Packaged Air Conditioning Units Switch and Colocation Room Air Conditioning Unit 15870 Fans 15890 Ductwork 15910 Ductwork Accessories 15990 Test - Adjust - Balance 15995 Building Mechanical System Commissioning 15996 Commissioning Agent Requirements 16010 Electrical Requirements 16050 Electrical Identification 16080 Manufacturers 16100 Basic material & Methods 16110 Raceways 16120 Wires and Cables 16135 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 16140 Wiring Devices 16190 Supporting Devices 16195 Vibration Isolation Systems 16200 Service and Distribution 16210 Switchboards and Panelboards 16220 Transformers 16230 Service Entrance Switchgear 16260 Motor Disconnects and Fuses 16350 Grounding 16455 Lighting Fixtures 16520 Fire alarm System 16620 Diesel Generator Sets 16650 Transfer Switches 16710 Tele -Data Raceways Systems SHEET /SPEC. DESCRIPTION DATE ISSUED REVISION NO. 15170 15250 15400 15410 15440 15450 15500 15530 15670 15780 15785 vn.wa.n�..�ran.arv...n. a. .nv.•V mn....>... eu.. e.. a.. �.r.r..�,.......,..... ..._.. NO. ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 BID PACKAGE V. ICG Communications /MORTENSON CONTRACT L L t • ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 BID PACKAGE VI. BID PACKAGE INVITATION FOR PROPOSAL ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility PROJECT # 993540 :tA..MnYma. Proposals will be received at the office of M.A. Mortenson Company at 1112 OakRidge Dr., Suite 104- 227 Fort Collins, CO 80525, until 1:00 ESTPM CST, 9/3/99, for Interior Finishes & MEP Systemswork. Plans and specifications are available from the office of M.A. Mortenson Company at the following location: All proposals must be made on the proposal forms furnished. Faxed proposals are acceptable with overnight delivery of the original proposal required by 3:00 PM the next business day. Proposals not received by the next business day may be considered non - responsive. A pre -bid conference is scheduled for NA, 1999, at Not required at the following location: 12201 Pacific Highway South WA, TUKWILA 98168 It is mandatory that all bidders be in attendance. Lack of attendance may result in rejection of your proposal. Project address: Contact :Walter Benoit Address 1112 OakRidge Dr., Suite 104 -227 Fort Collins, CO 80525 Phone: (970)266 -7228 Fax: (970)223 -5418 12201 Pacific Highway South Tukwila, WA 98168 M.A. Mortenson Company is an equal opportunity employer M /F /H /V/ M.A. Mortenson Company encourages MBE /WBE participation 38B Date: PROPOSAL FORM ATTACHMENT "A" ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility Proposals shall be submitted in the following form on the Bidder's letterhead: Bid Proposal of (hereinafter called "Bidder ") a * organized and existing under the laws of the State of and doing business as Bidder License Number or Numbers are ( *Insert corporation, partnership, or individual as applicable.) Mailing Address To: M.A. Mortenson Company 1112 OakRidge Dr., Suite 104 -227 Fort Collins, CO 80525 Attention: Walter Benoit The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of the ICG COMMUNICATIONS, SEATTLE SWITCH FACILITY having examined the plans and specifications listed in the Project Manual, dated August 25, 1999, including the General and Supplemental Conditions, Subcontract, and Payment and Performance Bond forms which were received as part of the Invitation to Bid, and being familiar with the site of the proposed work, and with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, machinery, equipment rental, transportation, superintendents, perform all work, provide all services, and to construct all work in the category stated below, in accordance with the Contract Documents set forth therein, and at the bid amount stated below. The bid amount is to cover all costs incurred in performing the work required for the Scope of Work under the Bid Package Documents, of which this Bid Proposal is a part. After bid proposals are received, tabulated, and evaluated by M.A. Mortenson Company and Owner, and the successful Bidder from each category of work has been determined, said Bidder agrees to meet immediately with M.A. Mortenson Company in WA, Tukwila, for purposes of confuming scope and schedule commitment. f For the purposes of these meetings, the Bidder agrees to provide complete detailed cost breakdown; a list of all subcontractors proposed for use in the work, and a list of all items, materials, and their manufacturers proposed for use in the work. All applicable taxes are included. The Bidder agrees that these quotations shall not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days after submittal of this proposal. The undersigned understands that M.A. Mortenson Company and/or the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bid proposals and to waive any informalities or irregularities therein. The successful Bidder agrees to provide Performance and Payment Bonds on the forms provided in favor of M.A. Mortenson Company, if so requested. The bond premium is to be identified separately in the space provided. 39B BID IDENTIFICATION This proposal is in accordance with the plans and specifications for the following Bid Categories /Specification Sections: ADDENDA: The Bidder acknowledges the following addenda: BASE BID: The undersigned agrees to perform all work identified in the following Contract Specification Section(s) described in the Contract Documents and Project Manual for the total price listed below. Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern. Base Bid for all work associated with the ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility in Tukwila WA Project for the Lump Sum of: $ (written amount) ALTERNATE I: ALTERNATE 2: BONDS Alternate Bid for a 2 year extended Maintenance Agreement for work associated with the ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility in Tukwila WA Project for the Lump Sum of: $ $ Bond Rating is Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated (written amount) (written amount) 40B Alternate Bid for a yearly extended Maintenance Agreement after the third year for work associated with the ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility in Tukwila WA Project for the Lump Sum of: The Bidder can /cannot provide Performance and Payment Bonds on the forms provided made in favor of the Contractor, in the sum of 100% of the Contract Amount. The premium for any bonds will be paid by the Contractor separate from the base bid quoted herein. The cost to be added to the base bid quoted herein. The cost to be added to the base bid for the Performance and Payment Bond premium shall be: Lump Sum Bond Amount $ Li COMPLETION AFFIRMATIVE ACTION VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES Name of Firm Address Work Involved MBE (Y/N) SAmount The Bidder, if awarded a contract, agrees to commence work and to fully complete this contract package in accordance with a schedule to be established by and with the contractor based on the following milestone dates and duration's indicated in the schedule narrative: The Bidder is: a MBE firm ; is not a MBE firm ; certified with the following state or local agencies. The Bidder has included in its base bid price the following dollar amounts to be subcontracted with Minority Owned Business Enterprises: MBE $ We propose to perform all work with our forces except to award portions of the work to the following firms as Subcontractors. The portion of work to be accomplished by each is as indicated: Bidders are encouraged to submit proposals for alternates to the specified materials or systems which provide schedule and cost advantages while maintaining the design intent of the documents. Add/Deduct Alternate Description Price $ Add/Deduct $ Add/Deduct $ Add/Deduct $ Add/Deduct $ Add/Deduct $ Add/Deduct Attachments to Proposal: SIGNATURE: IF AN INDIVIDUAL: Doing business as: BUSINESS ADDRESS: Date: IF A PARTNERSHIP: BY: IF A CORPORATION: BY: • Attachment "A "- Bid Proposal • Attachment "B" - Scope of Work • Attachment "C" - Unit Prices • Attachment "D" - Schedule of Values • Standard Insurance Certificate. ❑ Yes, we have attached exceptions ❑ No, no exceptions taken We, the undersigned, have reviewed the bid package and the Mortenson standard subcontract and offer to execute the Agreement in substantially the form included with the Bid Documents, and agree that we will not withdraw this proposal for ninety (30) days without the consent of M.A. Mortenson Company. Any exceptions to the subcontract must be attached: Within seven (7) days after receipt of the Subcontract Agreement form, the undersigned will execute and deliver the said form, along with Performance and Payment Bonds (if required) and Certificate of Insurance to the General Contractor. Member of Firm Member of Firm END OF FORM OF PROPOSAL — ATTACHMENT "A" 42B SCOPE OF WORK Attachment `B" ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility Supply all labor, material, tools, transportation, handling, supervision and related services required for the installation of the Interior Finishes, & MEP and fire protection Systemsfor the ICG Communications, Seattle Switch Facility project in accordance with the Scope of Work including Plans and Specifications as outlined below. The Scope of Work includes specific and general instructions to subcontractor. The following is a description of the work to be provided for the ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facilitylocated Tukwila, WA.. The project will begin during the month of August, '99 and will be completed no later than November 19, 1999. Upon award, Mortenson will develop a detailed schedule for each subcontractors portion of work. The project includes tenant finishes along with MEP and fire protection systems for approximately 14,000 SF. The structure will require upgrades to accommodate the additional loads. The area is extremely congested, requiring well planned equipment and material deliveries. The building has existing tenants located on various floors. All work requiring utility shut downs and or creating allot of noise is scheduled through the building owner and is completed after hours. The scope of work outlined below describes the work in each bid category as designated by MA Mortenson. The categories have been set up to expedite the bidding process and to allow other subcontractors to clarify scope ownership. Subcontractors are encouraged to bid on only that work that they are prequalified to bid on. The scope of work is not to be construed as all inclusive, the scope is simply a guide to aid in the bidding process. All work is bid as a complete system per the bid documents and/or industry standards if information is missing. I. Specific Scope of Work : • Scope of work includes but is not necessarily limited to all material, detailing, fabrication, shipping, receiving, unloading, storing, inventory and labor for to complete the installation for work described below: • Unless specifically stated otherwise, incidental work required to accomplish the work shall be included in the bid. This would include, but not be limited to, temporary facilities, protection of the work, security of equipment, materials and work in progress, etc. unless noted otherwise. • Subcontractor is advised that a limited number of initial control points, exhibiting both horizontal and vertical control, have been established for the use and reference of the Subcontractor. Subcontractor shall lay out all of its Work from the initial control points and make provisions to preserve these control points. All secondary control points are the responsibility of the Subcontractor including field measurements. • Subcontractor to remove all dunnage, debris, waste, excess materials, etc. from site or as directed by M.A. Mortenson and /or Owner resulting from Subcontractor's Work. • Subcontractor shall provide all touch -up painting and fire proofing of his Work as required for the proper completion and acceptance of the Work. • This Subcontractor shall include all protection and repairs to his Work as required until the Work has been punch listed and accepted by the Owner and the architect. • The Subcontract Agreement shall supersede all other agreements, either verbal or written, relating to this Project. All other qualifications or clarifications will not be applicable unless noted herein. 4313 • Scope of work includes but is not necessarily limited to all material, detailing, fabrication, shipping, receiving, unloading, storing, inventory and labor for the installation of Scopes outlined below. • Subcontractors are responsible for ensuring all MEP systems are shut off prior to beginning work. All electrical systems will be locked out. • Subcontractors are required to protect all sensors from dust to eliminate any false alarms and is to take the proper precautions to protect sprinkler heads during the demolition. • All work to proceed per approved material specifications, typical to manufacturing space requirements. Architect to review and approve products list prior to purchase. • All work to be inspected prior to closing up. BID PACKAGE #1 — Structural Steel. • Fabricate and install structural upgrades as indicated in the plans and specifications. • All work to be completed per the schedule. • Scope includes all preparation work and reapplication of primer as necessary. • Third party inspections • Coordination with building owner on shut down and removal of sprinkler lines at DC battery area. • Fire watch • Cap, Cover & Protect existing sprinkler heads and smoke detectors during steel erection and welding operation. BID PACKAGE #2 — Interior Finishes (General Works Contractor) • Inspect existing conditions and accept as ready for paint and/or floor covering installation. • Construct interior walls as shown on the plans. • Frame all penetrations. • Supply and install hollow metal frames, doors and hardware. • Supply and install hollow metal window frames and glass and glazing. • Wood blocking, fire treated. • Perimeter wood band around all switch equipment located 7' -9" off floor and 2' wide' /," thick. • Rough Carpentry. • Finish Carpentry & Millwork (cabinetry and counter tops) • Prepare floor, supply reinforcing, and concrete for equipment pads. An equipment pad will be required for all the dry coolers, cooling units, pumps, motors, generator, etc. Supply pads for future equipment as shown on drawings. • Provide and install all fire extinguishers, code compliant. • Caulk/seal all hollow metal frames and tops of walls as necessary. • Supply and install all floor coverings and base. • Floor coatings. • Shelving • Control points Monuments (Mortenson to instruct at a later date) • Detailed Survey • Fire caulking for rated wall assemblies. • Fireproofing Touch -Up. • Painting (includes floor coatings walls, ceilings, hollow metal frames, doors, exposed utilities and ductwork, etc.) Fire sprinkler lines to be painted red. Note: Space does not have any drop ceilings, all utilities are exposed. • Refrigerator • Microwave • Temporary office space to include temporary wall and door. 44B I i 1 i .• ITEMS NOT TO BE INCLUDED: • Sink & Fixtures - By Mechanical ITEMS NOT IN SCOPE • Owner supplied equipment 45B BID PACKAGE #3— Mechanical Systems • Provide means to provide and install complete and operational system with all accessories as required. • Scope includes all work associated with the supply and installation of ductwork, dampers, grills registers, plumbing, piping, receiving and setting of equipment, tie -in to equipment, exhaust fans, pumps, to include the rough in for all future CRAC units and dry coolers, etc. ( See attached schedule for owner supplied equipment and potential delivery dates) • Prepare project coordination drawings (shop drawings). • Accept receipt of all owner furnished mechanical equipment and set into place. Includes hoisting. • Insure proper certification of all equipment and coordinate deliveries of mechanical equipment to ensure no delays occur due to local city or state requirements, landlord approval, etc. • Prefabricate as much material off site to expedite the installation process. • Tie into existing building systems as required. • Coordinate shut downs and tie -ins with building owner and other trades to minimize impacts. If required, work to be completed after normal hours. • Installation includes proper support connections for all equipment, piping, and ductwork. • Exhaust Systems. • Sealing of all pipe penetrations. • Air, water and equipment balancing by independent agency (to be approved by M.A. Mortenson). • Equipment start -up and around the clock support during the 72 hour start-up. • Provide owner training. • Includes all unistrut for fixture installation. • Insulation • Water Supply & Treatment • Waste water Disposal & Treatment • Flush & Clean per Specification. • Power or heat generation • Refrigeration system and piping. • Air Distribution and temporary exhaust fans as required during construction for ventilation. • 1 year warranty and Maintenance Agreement and training day for site personnel. • Insurance's, fee's, permits, coordination fees, etc. • Supply and install vibration isolators and inertia pads as necessary. • Instrumentation and controls • Sink & Fixtures • Provide all testing per specifications with an independent testing agency. (firm to be approved by M.A. Mortenson) • Call for all city inspections BID PACKAGE #4 — Electrical Systems • Provide means to provide and install complete and operational with all accessories as required. • Scope includes all work associated with the supply and installation of electrical conduit, wiring, Supply and install all electrical equipment (main switch gear supplied by owner), grounding, etc. ( See attached schedule for owner supplied equipment and potential delivery dates) • Prepare project coordination drawings with mechanical and fire sprinkler subcontractor • Complete installation of all panels and backboards (if necessary). • Temporary office space within the collocation. Provide a phone line, data line and fax line. Provide temporary power within space and include adequate Iighting and number of power outlets. • Pull and terminate all wiring. Provide wiring diagrams. • Accept receipt of all electrical equipment (including generator) and set into place. Includes hoisting. ITEMS NOT IN SCOPE • Security Wiring and Security Devices • Supply DC Equipment • Supply Dry coolers • Supply Data Air Units • Pre - actuated alarm System • Supply Generator • Specifications require all equipment be manufactured by same. The pre - purchased equipment is manufactured by Cutler - Hammer thus requiring all other electrical equipment be Cutler - Hammer. • Insure proper certification of all equipment and coordinate deliveries of electrical equipment to ensure no delays occur due to local or state requirements, landlord approval, etc. • Equipment start-up and around the clock support during the 72 hour start-up. • Owner training. • Tie into existing building systems as required. • Coordinate shut downs and tie -ins with building owner and other trades to minimize impacts. If required, work to be completed after normal hours. • Installation includes proper support connections for all equipment, conduits, etc. All connections to ceiling will be limited to the beams unless approved by Construction Manager. • Grounding systems • Sealing of all pipe penetrations. • All lighting and fixtures • Fire Sprinkler Alarm Tie In • Supply and power up Battery Exhaust, Purge Fans & Dampers (Controls by Others) • Back -Up power systems • Security, fire / life safety conduit & Fiber Rough -In conduit. • Includes all unistrut for fixture installation • Power Generation • Power Transmission • Service & Distribution • Lighting to include temporary lighting • Temporary power to include "spider" boxes for the use by others. • Communications • 1 Year Warranty & Maintenance Agreement • Insurance's, fee's, permits, coordination fees, etc. • Supply and install vibration isolators, if required. • All conduits not being utilized or installed, requires a pull string included. • Future Rough -In as shown on drawings • Instrumentation & Controls • Provide all testing per specifications with an independent testing agency. (firm to be approved by M.A. Mortenson) • Building Life safety Alarm System for the fourth floor and generator location. • Power local fire alarm system • Security Wirung and Security Device rough in only • Subcontractor By: By: Walter Benoit ITEMS NOT IN SCOPE: • Detection and Control for Sprinkler Systems M.A. MORTENSON COMPANY ALTERNATES: • A 2 Yr Maintenance Agreement following the rust year. • Extended Maintenance Plan after the 3r year. Cost per year for up to 7 additional years. BID PACKAGE #5 — Fire Sprinkler System • Design, fabricate, deliver and install preactuation sprinkler system per performace specification and code compliant. • Inspect existing sprinkler system and modify per above requirements. • Prepare project coordination drawings with mechanical and fire sprinkler subcontractor • Test and certify per the specifications. • Temporary shut down and sprinkler line removal within DC space for steel erection Subcontractor understands and agrees that there is no "general contractor" for this Project. This Subcontractor is responsible for all aspects of the performance of the Work, except for that Work shown specifically to be provided by another subcontractor. PRICING BASIS FOR CHANGE WORK * ** UNIT PRICES ATTACHMENT "C" ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility UNIT PRICES The labor units rates at the option of the Mortenson, may be used for alterations, additions, deletions, or deductions from the specified work. These unit rates will apply to all changes to the contract scope of work including force account work; or estimates for lump sum change proposals. The attached form entitled "Labor Rates" is required to be submitted for each trade intended to accomplish the scope of work inclusive to this RFP. Crew rate buildups for lump sum changes will be based upon these rates. Material* % OH & Profit Suhcontractors* * % OH & Profit Equipment Rental (leased or rented) * ** 75% of current AED + % OH & Profit Equipment Owned by Contractor * ** 75% of current AED rental rates Small Tool Mark -Up 2% of Labor Rate (Should be included in Unit price labor rates for tools less than $1,000) Invoice copies are required at time of billing for leased or rental equipment, and materials. Mark up on subcontractor's total proposal or T &M billing. Sub tier Subcontractors markups shall not exceed that of Contractor. Rates to include fuel, maintenance, tax, contractor's overhead and profit, and any supervision required The following UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE will form the basis for additions or deletions to the work as described by the unit of measure definition attached to the schedule. Unit prices are required to be all inclusive. Therefore unit prices will include cost of materials, cost of construction labor, consumable supplies, small tools, equipment required for installation, contractors home and field office costs, all overhead, and any other incidental costs and profit. State sales and use taxes are to be included in the Unit Prices. The unit price schedule is not intended to be all inclusive, hence, for those items and sizes not shown, those units which nearest approach those omitted shall be used as a guide for computing cost. Item Description Percent Material Unit Deduct Add • Subcontractors may expand the list as required to provide a complete listing of potential unit prices. CLASSIFICATION: % OF BASE RATE Laborer Foreman Operator STRAIGHT TIME 1 BASE RATE 22 FRINGE BENEFITS HEATH, WELFARE, INSURANCE 3 SAFETY & TRAINING 4 PT &I 5 FUI -1 6 SUI -1 7 FICA -1 8 WORKERS COMP 9 SMALL TOOLS ( <$1,000)* 10 CONSUMABLES* 11 COMP GEN. LIABILITY (CGL) 12 OTHER ( ) 13 STRAIGHT TIME RATE OVERTIME (I.5x) 14 PREMIUM COMPONENT 15 PI &I 16 FUI 17 SUI 18 FICA 19 WORKER'S COMP 20 SUBTOTAL ADDED TO STRAIGHT TIME BILLING 21 TOTAL OVERTIME RATE (Line 11 + 14) 22 Shift Premium (NOTE: Use additional conies of this sheet for other voluntary alternates.) LABOR RATES The following labor rates and premium rates shall be used for additional work. All costs including, but not necessarily limited to, labor burden, fringes, payroll taxes, worker's compensation and liability insurance, etc. shall be included. The rates shall also include a percentage for all overhead items such as home office administration, estimating, small tools, pick -up trucks, travel time, supervision, and all other direct job expenses. Rate The straight time rate should be complete and includes burden. However, all overtime rates should be adjusted to not include any mark -ups or burden. END OF ATTACHMENT "C" Category /Item Description Unit Quantity Labor Cost Material Cost Extended Total 1 Bid Package #1 — Structural Steel Structural Steel at 3r Floor 2 Bid Package #2 Interior Walls (complete) HM frames, doors and hardware Interior Window HM Frames Glass & Glazing Finish Carpentry & Millwork Mini Blinds Equipment Pads Fire Extinguishers VCT Tile Carpet Tile Paint Shelving Control Points Ea. 4 Detailed Survey Construction Fire Extinguishers Temporary Office Space 3 Mechanical Systems Accept, hoist, set and & Install owner supplied equipment & tanks. Air distribution & exhaust systems (Ductwork, exhaust,etc.) Water Supply & Treatment Waste Water Disposal & Treatment Refrigeration System & Piping Vibration Isolation Air, Water & Equipment Balancing Mechanical Equipment Equipment Start -Up Sink & Fixtures 3r party inspection & certification 1 .. i 1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES ATTACHMENT "D" ICG Communications Seattle Switch Facility 4 Electrical Systems Accept, hoist, set and & Install owner supplied equipment. Service & Distribution Grounding Power Generation Power Transmission Fiber Lighting Communication 3rd. party inspection & certification Electrical equipment Equipment start-up Temporary Construction Power Temporary Office 5 Fire Sprinkler System Fire Sprinkler System 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS a. Mobilization LS b. Demobilization LS c. Site Supervision WK d. Site Accommodation WK e. Storage WK f. Communications WK g. Travel, Meals, & Accommodation WK h. Transport WK i. As Built submittals LS j. Manuals LS k. Workman's Compensation Ins. LS 1. All other insurance's LS m. Cleanup WK n. Testing LS o. Protection of the Works LS p. Acceleration measures required to meet the Schedule LS 6 Any other items deemed necessary to form a Complete bid, (Please list): a . b. c . Sub -Total Bond Taxes TOTAL • The above schedule of values is to assist the subcontractor in preparing his proposal in the format in which Mortenson is preparing their estimate. A missing line item does not permit subcontractor to request a change at a later date. Subcontractor must provide a complete and operating system per plans and specifications. Please add any missing line items in section D. END OF ATTACHMENT "D" ATTACHMENT "E" SCHEDULE The attached preliminary project schedule is provided herein as part of the Contract Documents. A detailed schedule will be prepared with Subcontractor input after award of contracts. Mortenson shall revise the schedule for review by individual Subcontractors. Special requirements and questions should be brought to the attention of Mortenson. It is intended that the milestones shall remain in effect and all bidders shall be required to accept the dates. If it is apparent a Subcontractor is not going to complete its work in the time allotted, said Subcontractor must notify Mortenson with five (5) days after publication of the schedule. Adjustments may be made to accommodate a Subcontractor if the above notification is received and is within the stated milestone dates. Otherwise the schedule shall be deemed accepted by all parties and becomes the schedule for the Subcontractor. Mortenson shall periodically update the schedule and display same at the job site. Each Subcontractor shall be responsible to familiarize itself with the schedule and how it will affect of modify its operations, including its coordination with the activities of other Subcontractors. Subcontractors shall notify Mortenson with five (5) days of any inability to comply with schedule. Otherwise the revised schedule shall be deemed accepted by all parties and becomes the schedule for the Subcontractor. It is expressly agreed that time is of the essence for the completion of work under this Contract and the Subcontractor agrees to perform the work within the time and in the manner specified or within the time extensions the Owner may grant, provided however, that the Subcontractor shall be liable for any damages suffered by Owner due to failure of the Subcontractor to perform the specified work within the specified time. The Subcontractor, within five (5) calendar days after being notified to commence work, agrees to commence work in the field at such points as Mortenson may designate and to continue diligently to perform the work and to fully complete all of its work to the satisfaction of Mortenson and the Owner. The work shall be carried to completion with the utmost speed. If the Subcontractor delays progress for any reason, other than those allowed by the General Conditions, the Subcontractor shall take all necessary steps to expedite its contract work to maintain milestone target dates and shall be responsible for damages resulting from its delay. If, in the opinion of Mortenson, the Subcontractor is behind schedule and is so notified by Mortenson in writing, the Subcontractor shall employ such means as overtime work, multiple work shifts, additional equipment, and the like; all without additional compensation and shall continue to do so until the progress of the Work is, in the opinion of Mortenson, in conformance with the construction schedule. If, in the opinion of Mortenson, the Subcontractor fails to maintain the approved schedule, the Subcontractor may be required to furnish to Mortenson a weekly schedule of its work showing location, number of persons and crew required to accomplish the schedule. The attached schedules are in outline format only and represent key work items. Each subcontractor is responsible for submitting a CAM schedule within 5 days following receipt of the Notice To Proceed (NTP) to include enough detail to cover all work awarded. Each activity will be no longer than 10 days, coded according to the MAM schedule and will be man power loaded. Subcontractor is encouraged to meet with our site scheduler and develop an activity outline and coding format prior to submitting the schedule. Please Find Attached: Project Schedule (issued on 8/15/99) ICG Equipment Schedule END OF ATTACHMENT " E" ■1 ©Q1:3 - [ - 1 si 0 i I I I E� /e Mg1f 1t«(IN�Pa [1 Mf�M rarer � ©tIID©t112 s Es Y• 1 1 1 t , I a I [ 1 • ii p a 11 I sI si i lul1le[s !Q i 3�1 sJa111MI11n1sisIa111MIi( 1s, 7 1 I ■ I 1 i ©EIO ©U0© ©OtI© 1 • wPi 5 1 i i i 0 1 a 1 1 4-1 I I . ^ 1 1 le.44 I t I 1 11 111111 441444 1 1 I a i 1 5 i I .. a S i Will - i 1 , 4 1 1 i ;. 4 " S ii EN 1 1 was I 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 I. I 1 1 1 1 41 11 441 1 1 1 21 1 1 I " I 1 1 1 I 4 11111111 444 444 I 4 1 i 11 i i: I 11 4 4 44 IMP Q 111!1 g A •• 12 1111 g •• •• X g WW1 g .,..- w000 1111M1111111111111 8 o 2 2 " 2 2 te " 0 ' " " " o " till I 14 I= X N R�1 1 I 17 ii I 1 t - 1 ' I 11 !ill 1 I tt 1)1114ii I 3 i . i 1 ,t 11 I iii lillii. li.i10 ii H ,t1 1 1111 I i 1 I I »Ihillili illilia]lii )111104 1 1 I i 1 i i i I 11 5 1311 i l a I g 3 I I . Ifi m Q - ..* • • • • . • • ; ; :2 :.' ; V fl r. ; ; ;4 r., pl MA AK •■•1 K RR g A PR AR ;-. *RSV:VS: 1 • �I. +I'.L :•SM:' =Y..e vifl +.: f.'.:W��'+�ti1tA'.4V tia::Hra... w..r.,..•....» 1 1 i 1 O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s 4 1 1LL a 1 i 4 1 2 s s 4 1 1 a s 4 3 2 1 e 1 1 1 1 d 1 E F 1 1 1 1 1 0 S 1 1 1 1 1 0 11 1 1 4 • .? tj 1 1 I 1.. I. 8. N; LL v- ox 1C,," 1 a 1 S 1 h 1 1 A 1 1 1 A 1 1 s R 1 n 1 P1 S 1 0 Q Q [1 1 7 ; s i 1 1 1 1 a n a 1 v 1 a 1 0 1 1 0 I I J 1' ages 1 1 1 1 D w 1 1 1 1 S i n a ry 1 1 1 d 1 R 1 grit • W a 1 1.6 1 1 a • a A a II t 9 s ; r 1 Is F i ITEM DESCRIPTION DELIVERY DATE INSTALL & TEST DATE 1 Main Switch Board (Pre Purchased) 9/24/99 10/8/99 2 MDP — Emer. Distribution Panel (Pre Purchased) 9/24/99 10/8/99 3 SBS — Lighting & Power Panel (Pre Purchased) 9/24/99 10/8/99 4 SBC — Colocation Panel (Pre Purchased) 9/24/99 10/8/99 5 Transformer (Owner Supplied) 9/3/99 (if required) 10/8/99 6 Generator (Owner Supplied) 11/1/99 1 1/15/99 7 Condensers (Owner Supplied) TBD TBD 8 Air Condition Units (Owner Supplied) TBD TBD 9 DC Equipment (Owner Supplied) 9/17 (If space is available) 10/15/99 1_ t i 1CG — Seattle Long lead Equipment Schedule Modified 8/20 SECTION 15001/16001 SECTION 15010 SECTION 15050 SECTION 15055 SECTION 15060 SECTION 15140 SECTION 15170 SECTION 15190 SECTION 15250 SECTION 15410 SECTION 15440 SECTION 15500 SECTION 15530 SECTION 15670 SECTION 15780 SECTION 15785 SECTION 15870 SECTION 15890 SECTION 15910 SECTION 15990 SECTION 15995 SECTION 15996 MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ICG CENTRAL OFFICE DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS CORROSION PROTECTION FROM HUMID, SALT LADEN OUTDOOR AIR PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS PIPE SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS MOTORS AND STARTERS MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MECHANICAL INSULATION PLUMBING PIPING PLUMBING FIXTURES FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS REFRIGERANT PIPING AIR- COOLED CONDENSING UNITS PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCH ROOM ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM FANS DUCTWORK DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES TEST - ADJUST- BALANCE BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING COMMISSIONING AGENT REQUIREMENTS C PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RESPONSIBILITY 1.2 WORK INCLUDED ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE A. The Division 15 and 16 contractor(s) shall comply with the provisions of this section. The Division 15 contractor(s) shall verify electrical service provided by the electrical contractor before ordering any mechanical equipment requiring electrical connections. Provide submittals of all mechanical equipment to Division 16 contractor(s). B. The final responsibility for properly coordinating the electrical work of this section shall belong to the Division 15 system contractor performing the work which requires the electrical power. 1. Each Division 15 contractor shall be responsible for providing power wiring for certain devices as described in the specifications and on the drawings. This work shall be provided by a licensed electrician in accordance with all of the applicable provisions of the Division 16 specifications, NEC and local codes. A. Carefully coordinate the interface between Division 15 (Mechanical) and Division 16 (Electrical), and Division 15951 (Building Management and Automatic Temperature Control Systems) before submitting any equipment for review or commencing installation. B. This Division of the Specifications may also be referred to as 01042 by other Divisions of the Specifications, or on the Contract Drawings. 1.3 ATTACHMENTS A. ICG Internal Document #170 - 100 -008 — Generator Equipment Standard, 3/3/99. B. ICG Internal Document #170 - 100 -007 — Automatic Tranfer Switch Standard, 3/3/99. C. ICG Internal Document #170 - 100 -006 — Grounding Practice, 3/3/99. D. ICG Internal Document #030- 600 -001 — HVAC Equipment Standard, 3/8/99. E. ICG Internal Document #271- 100 -009 — Equipment Test List Air Conditioning Maintenance, 1/26/98. 15001 &16001 -1 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION F. ICG Internal Document #030-100-001 — Fire Protection System Standard, 3/8/99. G. Security Device Wiring Standards H. Where specification contradicts ICG Standards, ICG Standards shall take precedence over Division 15000 and 16000 specification. This is typical throughout the contract documents. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Automatic: Pertaining to a function, operation, process or device that, under specified conditions, functions without intervention by human operator. B. Disconnect Switch: A mechanical switching device used for changing the connections in a circuit, or for isolating a circuit or equipment from a power source. C. Motor Control Center: A floor mounted assembly of one or more enclosed vertical sections having a common horizontal power bus and primarily containing motor starting units. D. Control Circuit/Power: The circuit which carries the electrical signals of a control apparatus or system directing the performance of the controller but does not carry the main power circuit. E. Manual Operation: Operation by hand without the use of any other power. F. Thermal Overload Switch: A means to detect excessive heating of series capacitor bank components and to initiate an alarm signal, or the closing of the associated bypass device or both. G. MC: Mechanical Contractor = Division 15 Contractor who furnishes motor. H. TC: Temperature Controls = Division 15950 Contractor who furnishes control. I. EC: Electrical Contractor = Division 16 Contractor. J. FA: Fire Alarm Contractor = Division 16510 Contractor who furnishes Fire Alarm System. 1.5 RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE A. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls for Division 15 equipment shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15001 &16001 -2 • MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION ITEM - Furnished Under Set In Place Under Power Wiring Under Control Wiring Under MC: Mechanical Contractor TC: Temperature Contractor EC: Electncal Contractor FA: Fire Alarm Contractor AHU Interior Marine Lights MC MC EC MC Equipment Motors MC MC EC -- Automatically or Manually Controlled Starters /Contactors: (Note 4) - Separate - Factory Mounted and Wired MC MC EC MC EC EC TC TC In Motor Control Centers (Note 4) EC EC EC TC Motor Speed Controllers: (Note 4) - Separate - Factory Mounted and Wired MC MC EC MC EC EC TC TC Disconnect Switches (Note 1) EC EC EC -- Thermal Overload Switches (Note 1) EC EC EC -- Switches (Manual or Automatic other than disconnect) (Note 2) MC or TC MC or TC EC or TC TC or MC Control Relays (Note 2) MC or TC MC or TC -- TC Control Transformers MC or TC MC or TC EC or TC TC Push Button Stations, Pilot Lights MC EC EC EC Thermostat and Controls: Integral with Equipment or Directly Attached to Ducts, Pipes, etc. (Note 2) MC or TC EC or TC EC or TC TC Equipment in Temperature Control Panels TC TC TC TC Standalone Control Panels (BAS) (Note 6) TC TC TC TC Valve Motors, Damper Motors, Solenoid Valves, etc. TC TC TC TC EP Valves or Switches, P.E. Switches, etc. TC TC -- TC Fire Alarm System (Note 3) FA FA EC FA Fire Sprinkler Alarm (Note 3) MC MC EC FA Duct System Smoke Detectors (Note 5) FA MC -- TC/FA Relays for Fan Control via duct detectors (Note 5) MC MC EC TC Room Smoke Detectors Including Relays for Fan Control (Note 3) FA FA -- FA Smoke Management Controls (Note 7) FA FA EC FA ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15001 &16001=3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION ITEM - Furnished Under Set In Place Under Power Wiring Under Control Wiring Under MC: Mechanical Contractor TC: Temperature Contractor EC: Electrical Contractor FA: Fire Alarm Contractor CO Sensors TC TC TC TC Control Air Compressor TC TC TC TC Refrigerated Air Dryer TC TC TC TC Equipment Interlocks TC TC -- TC Notes: (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE If furnished as part of factory wired equipment furnished and set in place by MC, wiring and connections by EC. If float switches, line thermostats, P.E. switches, time switches, or other controls carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished by MC, but they shall be set in place and connected by EC, except that where such items are an integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, or other mechanical equipment, they shall be furnished and set in place by MC and connected by EC. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor, they shall be furnished, set in place and wired by TC contractor. Pre - action system initiation signals (such as smoke detectors, or general alarm conditions in a pre- action zone) shall be provided under Division 16510. Electrical contractor is responsible for wiring from starter to motor, unless factory wired. Temperature control contractor shall provide conduit and wire from auxilary contact in motor starter to the detector so that the unit shuts down in all operating modes. Fire Alarm Contractor to wire from detector to fire alarm panel. Each division shall be fully responsible for any control panels as called for on the drawings or specifications. Division 15 and 16 shall provide all power and control wiring to fire /smoke or smoke dampers along with initiation signals to temperature control panels as described in the specifications. B. Power Wiring by Division 15: The electrical power for certain equipment provided under Division 15 has not been specifically indicated on the electrical drawings and must be provided by and field coordinated by the Division 15 trade requiring such power. Sufficient power for this purpose shall be furnished as "spare" dedicated circuit capacity in Division 16's panelboards. All wiring, conduit and electrical devices downstream of the panelboards is the responsibility of the Division 15 trade requiring the power. 15001 &16001 -4 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 5 1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: B. Starters: "ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE C. Remote Switches and Pushbutton Stations: 1. Such equipment is hereby defined as: a. Fire protection systems as defined by ICG Internal Document #030-100-001 — Fire Protection System Standard, 3/8/99, and will be shown by engineered system design drawings to be by Fenwal Representative Westfire (303) 273 -9800. (1) FM -200 initiation signals (such as smoke detectors, or general alarm conditions in a FM -200 zone) shall be provided under Division 16 fire alarm work. (2) Westfire shall provide design of pre- action control panel and interconnection between nearest suitable fire alarm panel and location of FM -200 tanks. 2. Temperature control panels, control air compressors and line voltage power for 24v control transformers. Required connections are included in Division 15951 and will be shown by that contractor's control submittal drawings. 1. Connections to all controls directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment shall be made with flexible connections. 1. Provide magnetic starters for all three phase motors and equipment complete with: a. Control transformers. b. 120V holding coils. c. Integral hand-off-auto switch. d. Auxiliary contacts required for system operation plus one (1) spare. e. Refer to Section 15170 Motors, Starters and Drives. 1. Provide remote switches and/or pushbutton stations required for manually operated equipment (if no automatic controls have been provided) complete with pilot lights of an approved type lighted by current from load side of starter. 15001 &16001 =3 - MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION D. Special Requirements: 1. Motors, starters and other electrical equipment installed in moist areas or areas of special conditions, such as explosion proof, shall be designed and approved for installation in such areas with appropriate enclosure. E. Identification: 1. Provide identification of purpose for each switch and/or pushbutton station furnished. Identification may be either engraved plastic sign permanently mounted to wall below switch, or stamping on switch cover proper. All such identification signs and/or switch covers in finished areas shall match other hardware in the immediate area. F. Control Voltage: G. DDC Control Interface: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Maximum allowable control voltage 120V. Fully protect control circuit conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code. 1. Fully coordinate the requirements of each division with regard to supplying a complete DDC Control System prior to submitting bid. 2. All control power shall be furnished via dedicated line voltage circuits. 3. Dedicated control circuits from electrical panelboards to DDC control panels and from electrical panelboards to dedicated DDC J -boxes (for distributed control components such as VAV boxes), J- boxes, and control transformer line voltage connections shall be provided under Division 15950 where required and as shown on the drawings. a. Exceptions: The following Division 15 equipment has been provided with electrical power feeders downstream of the panelboards by Division 16: (1) Division 16510, Fire Alarm System Panels. b. See the drawings for additional exceptions. 4. Low voltage wiring from J -boxes to distributed control components, all low voltage connections, all control panels and all control transformers (not part of unitary equipment) shall be provided under Division 15950. 5. Any additional power requirements shall be the responsibility of the Division 15950 Contractor requiring same, and provided at no additional cost to the owner. 15001 &16001 -6 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 1 1 1 L C C. 1.7 CEILING AND CHASE CAVITY PRECEDENCE A. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install mechanical and electric systems within the cavity space allocation in the following order of precedence. A system with higher precedence may direct that systems of lower precedence be relocated from space which is required for expedient routing of the precedent system. 1. Plumbing waste, cooling coil drain, piping and roof drain mains and leaders. 2. Hydronic main piping (12" or greater). 3. Plumbing vent piping. 4. Supply, return and exhaust ductwork. 5. Electrical conduits 4" or larger and electrical cable tray. 6. Hydronic branch mains (greater than 2 ", but less than 12 "). 7. Domestic hot and cold water. 8. Hydronic branch piping (2" or less). 9. Pneumatic control piping. 10. Fire sprinkler branch piping and sprinlder runouts. B. Light fixtures have precedence in a zone which is the same height above the ceiling as the depth of the fixture (plus 2 "). C. Examine the contract documents of all trades (e.g. all Division 15 and 16 drawings, the architectural floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations and sections, structural plans and sections, etc.). D. Coordinate necessary equipment, ductwork and piping locations so that the final installation is compatible with the materials and equipment of the other trades. E. Prepare shop drawings for installation of all new work before installation to verify coordination of work between trades. F. Provide access doors for all equipment, valves, clean-outs, actuators and controls which require access for adjustment or servicing and which are located in otherwise unaccessible locations. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. For equipment located in "accessible locations" such as lay -in ceilings: Locate equipment to provide adequate service clearance for normal maintenance without removing architectural, mechanical, electrical or structural elements such as the ceiling support system, electrical fixtures, etc. "Normal maintenance" includes, but is not limited to: filter changing; greasing of bearings; using p/t ports for pressure or temperature measurements; and replacement of ballasts, fuses, etc. 15001 &16001 -7 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTOR HORSEPOWER A. In general, all motors % HP and above shall be three phase, all motors 1/2 HP or less shall be single phase. B. Voltage and phase of motors as scheduled on the electrical drawings shall take precedence in the case of a conflict between the mechanical and electrical drawings or general condition 2.1., A., above. C. Work under Division 15 includes coordinating the electrical requirements of all mechanical equipment with the requirements of the work under Division 16, before ordering the equipment. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. If motor horsepowers are changed under the work of Division 15 without a change in duty of the motor's driven device, coordination of additional electrical work (if any) and additional payment for that work (if any) shall be provided under the section of Division 15 initiating the change. Increases or decreases in motor horsepower from that specified shall not be made without written approval from the Architect/Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION - (Not Used) END OF SECTION 15001 &16001 =8 : MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section supplements Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. Architect/Engineer shall decide which is most stringent. C. Provisions of this section shall also apply to all sections of Division 15. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The definitions of Division 1 and the General Conditions of this specification also apply to the Division 15 contract. B. "Contract Documents" constitute the drawings, specifications, general conditions, project manuals, etc., prepared by Engineer (or other design professional in association with Engineer) for contractor's bid or contractor's negotiations with the Owner. The Division 15 drawings and specifications prepared by the Engineer are not construction documents. C. "Construction Documents ", "construction drawings ", and similar terms for Division 15 work refer to installation diagrams, shop drawings and coordination drawings prepared by the contractor using the design intent indicated on the Engineer's contract documents. These specifications detail the contractor's responsibility for "Engineering by Contractor" and for preparation of construction documents, D. "(N)" indicates "new" equipment to be provided under this contract. E. "Install" means to "set in place, connect and place in full operational order ". F. "Provide" means to "furnish and install ". G. "Equal" or "Equivalent" means "meets the specifications of the reference product or item in all significant aspects." Significant aspects shall be as determined by the Architect/Engineer. H. "Work by other(s) divisions "; "re: Division ", and similar expressions means work to be performed under the contract documents, but not necessarily under the division or section of the work on which the note appears. It is the contractors sole responsibility to coordinate the work of the contract between his/her suppliers, subcontractors and employees. If clarification is required, consult ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15010 -1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.3 COORDINATION WITHIN DIVISION 15 A. Contract Documents: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15010 -2 Architect/Engineer before submitting bid. By inference, any reference to a "contractor" or "sub- contractor" means the entity which has contracted with the Owner for the work of the Contract Documents. I. By inference, any reference to a "contractor" or "sub- contractor" means the entity which has contracted with the owner for the work of the Contract Documents. J. "Engineer" means the design professional firm which has prepared these contract documents. All questions, submittals, etc. of this division shall be routed to the Engineer (through proper contractual channels). 1. General: The Contract Documents are diagrammatic showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the Division 15 work and its interface with other work. Such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Drawings shall not be scaled for the purpose of establishing material quantities. 2. Supplemental Instructions: The exact location for some items in this Specification may not be shown on the Drawings. The location of such items may be established by the Architect/Engineer during the progress of the work. 3. Discrepancies: a. Examine Drawings and Specifications of all Divisions of the work. b. Report any discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer and obtain written instructions before proceeding. c. Should there be a conflict within or between the Specifications or Drawings, the most stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. d. Items called for in either specifications or drawings shall be required as if called for in both. 4. Constructability: a. Examine Drawings and Specifications of all Divisions of the work. b. Report any issues to the Architect/Engineer which may prevent installation of Division 15 work in accordance with the Contract Documents and the original construction contract. c. Report all issues within 30 days after contract. B. Be responsible for providing proper documentation of equipment product data and shop drawings to all entities providing service. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to the following: BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS I E. CAD Drawings: F. Existing Conditions: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE • 15010 -3 1. FM -200 Fire Suppression Designer (Westfire) shall provide shop drawings to all other Division 15 contractors. 2. Division 15951 and 15990 - Contractors (Automatic Temperature Controls, Building Management and Test - Adjust - Balance Contractors) shall be provided with equipment product data and shop drawings as appropriate from other Division 15 and Division 16 contractors, and shall furnish the same information about control devices (such as valves, test wells, etc.) to the appropriate Division 15 Contractor. C. Coordination Drawings: For places where clearances are limited, and for places where several elements of mechanical work (or combinations of mechanical and other work) must be located with precision in order to fit into available space, prepare Coordination Drawings (Shop Drawings) at a suitable scale, showing the required dimensions, and submit for review and comment. At a minimum submit: 1. All mechanical systems (1/4" =1' -0" scale). 2. Indicate all major piping, electrical equipment and conduits and structural and architectural elements in these areas as well. 3. Provide all necessary sections and elevations for clarification. 4. Indicate all seismic restraint and support systems to be used for all mechanical equipment throughout the project. 5. Transitions from rooftop units to shafts or horizontal ducts. D. It is the contractor's responsibility to determine where clearances are limited, and where coordination drawings are required. Coordination drawings may be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for record and comment (at the contractor's option). For the purposes of a bid, the contractor is directed to assume that coordination drawings will be required where ever Division 15 work is installed. 1. Failure to produce or submit coordination drawings does not dismiss the contractor's responsibility for translating the design intent of the Contract Documents into Construction Drawings. 1. Electronic Auto Cad drawings may be made available for purchase by the Architect/Engineer of record. 1. Inspect existing conditions prior to bidding. 2. Provide proper coordination of mechanical work with existing conditions. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: G. Utility Connections: 1. Coordinate the connection of mechanical system with utilities and services. 2. Comply with regulations of utility suppliers. 3. The Contract Documents indicate the available information on existing utilities and services, and on new services (if any) to be provided to the project by utility companies and agencies. a. Notify Architect/Engineer immediately if discrepancies are found. 4. Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions one week in advance with the Owner and the Utility Company. a. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum. 1.4 COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS 1. Coordinate the Division 15 work to the progress of the work of other trades. 2. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. B. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install mechanical and electric systems within the cavity space allocation in the following order: 1. Plumbing waste, cooling coil drain, piping and roof drain mains and leaders. 2. Steam and condensate piping. 3. Plumbing vent piping. 4. Supply return and exhaust ductwork. 5. Electrical conduit greater than 4" diameter. 6. Domestic and hydronic main piping. 7. Fire Protection System mains and leaders. 8. Electrical conduit branch feeders. 9. Domestic hot and cold water branches. C. Coordination with Electrical Work. Refer to Section 15/16001. D. Cutting and Patching: Refer to Division 1 and Section 15050. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15010 -4 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 L E. Chases, Inserts and Openings: 1. Provide measurements, drawings, and layouts so that openings, inserts and chases in new construction can be built in as construction progresses. 2. Check sizes and locations of openings provided. 3. Any cutting and patching made necessary by failure to provide measurements, drawings, and layouts at the proper time shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Support Dimensions: Provide dimensions and drawings so that concrete bases and other equipment supports to be provided under other Sections of the Specifications can be built at the proper time. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH EXISTING OCCUPIED AREAS A. Coordinate any required disruptions with the Owner, one week in advance. 1.6 ENGINEERING BY CONTRACTOR A. The construction of this building requires the contractor to design several systems or subsystems. All such designs shall be the complete responsibility of the contractor. B. Systems or subsystems which require engineering responsibility by the contractor include, but are not limited to: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Any system not fully detailed on the drawings. 2. Fire protection. 3. Equipment supports, not fully detailed in the drawings. 4. Pipe hangers and anchors not specified in these documents, or catalogued by the manufacturer. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Codes: Comply with the following: 1. Uniform Building Code. 2. Uniform Mechanical Code. 3. Uniform Plumbing Code. 4. National Electric Code. 5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 6. Local Modifications to above Codes. 15010 -5 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS B. Applicable pamphlets of NFPA. C. Requirements of Local Utility Companies: G. Contract Documents Not in Compliance: H. Permits: 2. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE Post permits as required. 15010 -6 1. Comply with rules and regulations of local utility companies. Include in bid the cost of all valves, valve boxes, meter boxes, meters and such accessory equipment which will be required for the project. D. Other Regulations: Comply with the latest editions of the following: 1. Requirements of Fire Departments serving the project. 2. Regulations of the Health Department having jurisdiction. 3. Regulations of the Office of State Fire Marshal. 4. ASHRAE Energy Conservation Standard 90A. 5. ASHRAE Ventilation Standard 62. 6. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 7. Clean Air Act. 8. Clean Water Act. E. Additional Regulations: Follow additional regulations which appear in individual Sections of these Specifications. F. Contradictions: Where codes are contradictory, follow the most stringent, unless otherwise indicated in Plans or Specifications. Architect /Engineer shall determine which is most stringent. 1. Where the Drawings and Specifications do not comply with the minimum requirements of the Codes, either notify the Architect/Engineer in writing during the Bidding Period of the revisions required to meet Code requirements, or provide an installation which complies with the Code requirements. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner. 2. Follow Drawings and Specifications where they are superior to Code requirements. 1. Obtain all permits required by authorities and agencies having jurisdiction for the work of this Division. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 I. Tap and Connection Fees: 1. Pay fees charged by Utilities for making connections, bringing service to property line, or to meter and similar services. 2. Investment fees or plant development fees, which are charges levied by Utilities to cover the cost of the utility system to be born by this project, are not part of the work of this Division. J. Inspections and Tests: 1. Arrange for all required inspections and tests. 2. Pay all charges. 3. Notify Architect/Engineer 48 hours before tests. 4. Submit one copy for Owners records of permits, licenses, inspection reports and test reports. 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS A. General Recording Procedure: B. Corrected Drawings: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE . ." " 15010 -7 1. Maintain a blue -line set of Division 15 Contract Drawings in clean, undamaged condition, for mark -up of installations which vary substantially from the Contract Drawings. 2. Record changes drawn to scale and fully dimensioned, as specified in Division 1. a. Work concealed behind or within other work, in an inaccessible arrangement. b. Mains and branches of piping systems: (1) with valves and control devices located and numbered. (2) with concealed unions located. (3) with items requiring maintenance located (traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). c. Underground piping and ducts, both exterior and interior. d. Ductwork layouts, including locations of coils, dampers, filters, boxes and similar units. e. Concealed control system devices and sensors. 1. Transmit Autocadd version 14 drawing files and one corrected blue -line set as a submittal to the Engineer or Owner's use and record. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS C. Temperature Control Drawings: 1. Indicate as -built conditions of work under this contract including: a. One line system diagram. b. Wiring or tubing termination diagrams. c. List of materials. d. Floor plan indicating all device locations. e. Control sequences. 2. Reproducible temperature control drawings shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer prior to Owner's acceptance of project. 1.9 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Refer to Division 1 and/or ICG Standards attached for additional requirements. B. Submission: 1. Submit typed and bound copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals prior to scheduling systems demonstration for the Owner, as specified in Division 1. 2. Bind each Maintenance Manual in one or more vinyl covered, 3 -ring binders, with pockets for folded drawings. a. Mark the back spine of each binder with system identification and volume number. C. Required Contents: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Manuals shall have index with tab dividers for each major equipment section to facilitate locating information on specific piece of equipment. 2. Identify data within each section with drawing code numbers as they appear on Drawings and Specifications. Include as a minimum the following data: a. Alphabetical list of system components, with the name, address and 24 hour telephone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first year of operation. Include point of contact for company. b. Operating instructions for complete system including: (1) Emergency procedures for fire and failure of major equipment. (2) Major start, operation and shut -down procedures. c. Maintenance Instructions for each piece of equipment including: (1) Equipment lists. (2) Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment. 15010 -8 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 4- i L. t. 1 1.10 WARRANTIES B. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. 1.11 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall: (3) Necessary cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule. (4) Product Data. (5) Installation instructions. (6) Parts lists. (7) Complete wiring diagrams. d. Temperature control diagrams and O &M information as specified above (as- built). e. Marked or changed prints locating concealed parts and variations from the original system design (as -built drawings). f. Balancing Report. g. Copies of any extended equipment warranties which are greater than one year. A. The warranty period is one year after Date of Acceptance. 1. During this period, provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects in the mechanical system at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide certificate with O &M manual submittal which guarantees same -day service response to Owners call for all such warranty service. 2. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of one year. Insert copies in O &M manuals. Such equipment shall include: a. Refrigeration cycle compressors, five (5) years. 3. Provide extended manufacturers warranties to cover one full year from date of acceptance if standard warranty starts any time prior to that date. .4. Provide factory trained service personnel for all warranty work on the Control System and the following equipment: a. Packaged Rooftop Unit switch and collocation room air conditioning units. 1. Supply all labor, transportation, materials, apparatus, light, and tools necessary for the completion of the mechanical work. 2. Install, maintain, and remove all construction equipment. 3. Be responsible for safe, lawful, and proper construction maintenance. 4. Construct, in the best and most workmanlike manner, a complete project and everything properly incidental thereto, as shown on the Drawings, as ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15010 -9 BASIC MECHANICAL OFFICE • REQUIREMENTS stated in the Specifications, or reasonably implied therefrom, all in accordance with the Contract documents. 1.12 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND MATERIALS A. Provide protection against dust migration, rain, wind, storms, frost, or heat, so as to maintain all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage. B. At end of each day's work, cover all new work likely to be damaged. C. Do not interrupt the integrity of the building security overnight. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. 1.13 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. All equipment called out in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings as "Owner- Furnished Equipment" shall be installed and connected under this Contract. Provide rough -ins for all future connections indicated. 1.14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Light, Heat, Power, etc. 1. Responsibility for providing temporary electricity, heat and other facilities shall be as specified in Division 1. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the equipment in an as- new condition. Equipment will not be turned over to the Owner until it is brought up to as -new condition. 3. The contractor shall be responsible for maintaining acceptable indoor air quality in adjacent occupied spaces. B. Use of Permanent Building Equipment for Temporary Heating or Cooling. 1. Permanent building equipment shall not be used without written permission from the Owner. If this equipment is used for temporary heating or cooling, it shall be adequately maintained per manufacturer's instructions and protected with filters, strainers, controls, reliefs, etc. The contractor shall protect all equipment and systems as directed by the engineer. The warranty period shall not start until the equipment is turned over to the Owner for his use. The contractor shall provide extended warranties for parts and labor for all such equipment. Equipment shall not be turned over to the Owner until the temperature controls have been tested and accepted by the Owner and Engineer. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15010 -10 BASIC MECHANICAL OFFICE REQUIREMENTS 1.15 ROUGH -IN FOR FUTURE CONNECTION A. Provide rough -in services as shown for all systems which shall extend to future equipment or spaces as shown on the drawings. 1.16 INSTALLATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish, apply, install, connect, erect, clean, and condition manufactured materials and equipment as recommended in manufacturer's printed directions (maintained on job site during installation). B. Provide all attachment devices and materials necessary to secure materials together or to other materials. C. Make allowance for ample and normal expansion and contraction for all building components and piping systems that are subject to such. D. Install materials only when conditions of temperature, moisture, humidity, and conditions of adjacent building components are conducive to achieving the best installation results. E. Erect, install, and secure components in a structurally sound and appropriate manner. F. Where necessary, temporarily brace, shore, or otherwise support members until final connections are installed. G. Leave all temporary bracing, shoring, or other structural supports in place as long as practical for safety and to maintain proper alignment. H. Handle materials in a manner to prevent scratching, abrading, distortion, chipping, breaking, or other disfigurement. I. Conduct work in a manner to avoid injury or damage to previously placed work. J. Any work so impaired or damaged shall be replaced at no expense to Owner. K. Fabricate and install materials true to line, plumb, and level. L. Leave finished surfaces smooth and flat, free from wrinkles, warps, scratches, dents, and other imperfections. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15010 -11 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS M. Furnish materials in longest practical lengths and largest practical sizes to avoid all unnecessary jointing. N. Make all joints secure, tightly fitted, and as inconspicuous as possible by the best accepted practice in joinery and fabrication. O. Consult Engineer for mounting height or position of any unit not specifically indicated or located on Drawings or specified in Specifications. P. Job mixed multi - component materials used in the work shall be mixed in such regulated and properly sized batches that material can be used before it begins to "set ". Q. Mixing of a partially "set" batch with another batch of fresh materials will not be accepted and entire batch shall be discarded and removed from site. R. Clean all mixing tools and appliances that can be contaminated prior to mixing of fresh materials. S. In addition to the above refer to each Section of the Specifications for additional installation requirements for the proper completion of all work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Division 1 of the Specifications. B. The manufacturer of equipment or materials listed on the drawings or first named in the specification is the basis of design. If the drawings and specifications are in conflict, the drawings shall take precedence. Other manufacturers listed are considered general equivalents only. See below for coordination of substitutions. C. Products by manufacturers not listed in this Specification may be submitted to the Engineer, in writing, at least seven days before Bid Date. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Submittals will be reviewed for general equivalence only. 2. Approval for use in bidding will be issued by Engineer at least two days before Bid Date. 3. Products not considered to be general equivalents may not be bid. D. Any manufacturer not listed shall be considered a substitution. 15010 -12 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS I I ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 2.2 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1. B. Coordination and Sequencing: 15010 -13 E. Items submitted as a substitution to the basis of design or listed general equivalents shall be identified as such and shall include a written request for substitution indicating the following: 1. Contract price adjustment. 2. Contract time adjustment. 3. Item by item breakdown of differences between basis of design and substituted item. 4. Operation, maintenance, and energy cost difference. F. Coordination of general equivalents and substitutions: Where Contract Documents permit selection from several general equivalents, or where substitutions are authorized, coordinate clearance and other interface requirements with mechanical and other work. 1. Provide necessary additional items so that selected or substituted item operates equivalent to the basis of design and properly fits in the available space allocated for the basis of design. 2. Provide all features which are standard on the basis of design. 3. Contractor is responsible for assuring that piping, conduit, duct, flue, and other service locations for general equivalents or substitutions do not cause access, service, or operational difficulties any greater than would be encountered with the basis of design. G. All Hardware /Software associated with systems or equipment included in this Contractor's (Division 15) scope of work shall be Year 2000 (Y2K) compliant. This requirement applies to ALL specification sections listed under Division 15. 1. Coordinate submittals 2 weeks (min.) prior to expected order date so that work will not be delayed by submittals. 2. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to properly coordinate and sequence submittals. 3. Do not submit product data, or allow its use on the project until compliance with requirement of Contract Documents has been confirmed by Contractor. 4. Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise indicated, and is not a change order request. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS C. Preparation of Submittals: 5. Submitting contractor is responsible for routing reviewed submittals to all parties affected including but not limited to electrical, temperature control, and test and balance subcontractors. 1. Refer to Division 1 requirements. 2. Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals. 3. Indicate any portions of work which deviate from the Contract Documents. a) Explain the reasons for the deviations. b) Show how such deviations coordinate with interfacing portions of other work. 4. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking. 5. Provide space for Architect's/Engineer's "Action" marking. 6. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractor's office will be returned "Without Action ". 7. Submittals shall be presented in a neat and legible fashion and shall be returned "Without Action" if presented in any other fashion. D. Quantities: Unless otherwise indicated in Division 1, submit six copies. 1. Refer to Division 1 requirements. 2. Multiple System Items: Where a required submittal relates to an operation or item of equipment used in more than one system, increase the number of final copies as necessary to complete the Maintenance Manuals for each system. 3. Preliminary Submittal: Provide a preliminary, two -copy submittal for automatic temperature controls and when product data is required (or desired by Contractor) for selection of options by Architect/Engineer. 4. General Distribution: a) Provide additional distribution of submittals (not included in foregoing copy submittal requirements) to Subcontractors, Suppliers, Fabricators, Installers, Governing Authorities and others as necessary for proper performance of the work. b) Include such additional copies in transmittal to Architect/Engineer where required to receive "Action" marking before final distribution. (1) Show such distributions on transmittal forms. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15010 -14 BASIC MECHANICAL I OFFICE REQUIREMENTS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE E. Response to Submittals: Where standard product data have been submitted, it is recognized: 1. That the Submitter has determined that the products fulfill the specified requirements. 2. That the submittal is for the Architect's or Engineer's information only, but will be returned with appropriate action where observed to be not in compliance with the requirements. F. If more than two submissions (either for shop drawings, as -built drawings, or test and balance reports) are made by the contractor, the Owner reserves the right to charge the contractor for subsequent reviews by their consultants. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the contractor. 2.3 SPECIFIC CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer's Data: 1. Where pre - printed data covers more than one distinct product, size, type, material, trim, accessory group or other variation, mark submitted copy with black pen to indicate which of the variations is to be provided. 2. Delete or mark -out significant portions of pre - printed data which are not applicable. 3. Where operating ranges are shown, mark data to show portion of range required for project application. 4. For each product, include the following: a) Sizes b) Weights c) Speeds d) Capacities e) Piping and electrical connection sizes and locations. f) Statements of compliance with the required standards and regulations. g) Performance data. h) Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Prepare Mechanical Shop Drawings, except diagrams, to accurate scale. a) Show clearance dimensions at critical locations. b) Show dimensions of spaces required for operation and maintenance. c) Show interfaces with other work, including structural support. 15010 -15 BASIC MECHANICAL • REQUIREMENTS C. Test Reports: D. Required equipment and shop drawing submittals: 2.4 COMPATIBILITY C. Power Characteristics: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15010 -16 1. Submit test reports which have been signed and dated by the firm performing the test. 2. Prepare test reports in the manner specified in the standard or regulation governing the test procedure (if any) as indicated. 1. Provide a submittal schedule with bid. 2. Provide equipment submittals for each item of equipment specified or scheduled in the contract documents. 3. Submittal Schedule shall show each item of equipment, applicable Section of the specifications where it is described, applicable Drawing number and schedule name where it is scheduled, date of Contractor's proposed submittal to Architect, required date to receive submittal from Architect and schedule order date. 4. Provide a Mechanical Shop Drawing Schedule for submission to the Architect with the Submittal Schedule. Refer to paragraph 1.2 - Coordination Within Division 15 - above. A. General: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the mechanical work, and with other work requiring interface with the mechanical work. B. Altitude Ratings: Except where noted otherwise, all ratings and capacities stated in the Contract Documents are at the altitude of the project, not sea level. Project Altitude shall be considered to be 5400 feet. 1. For power characteristics of equipment supplied under Division 15 Sections, refer to the Sections of Division 16 and the Electrical Drawings for the power characteristics of each power driven item of mechanical equipment. 2. Coordinate available power with Electrical Contractor before ordering equipment. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for ordering equipment to meet the available power characteristics. 3. See also Division 15/16001 of these specifications. �r IT BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 2.5 SAFETY PROVISIONS 4. If there is a conflict between Division 15 documents and Division 16 documents, alert the engineer. Do not order equipment prior to determining the proper electrical service. No contract cost adjustment will be allowed for equipment ordered in conflict with the available power characteristics. A. Equipment Nameplates: Provide power - operated mechanical equipment with a permanent nameplate attached by the manufacturer, indicating: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. The manufacturer 2. Product name 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Speed 6. Capacity 7. Power characteristics 8. Labels of testing, listing, or inspecting agencies 9. Other similar data B. Where manufacturer affixed nameplate is not available, Mechanical Contractor shall fabricate and attach nameplate. C. Guards: 1. Unless equivalent guards are provided integral with the equipment, enclose each belt drive (including sheaves) on both side in a galvanized, one inch, mesh screen of No. 18 gauge steel wire or expanded metal, fastened to an approved, structural steel frame, securely fastened to the equipment or floor. 2. Provide tachometer holes at shaft centers. Unless equivalent guards are provided integral with the equipment, install a solid guard of No. 20 gauge galvanized steel over the coupling of each item of direct - driven equipment. 3. Sides are not required on these guards except to ensure rigidity. 2.6 SAFETY PROVISIONS A. Any refrigeration system containing HCFC -22 or any of the other refrigerants listed in the Clean Air Act as a Class I or Class II Ozone Depleting Compound shall comply with the Clean Air Act and the Colorado Air Quality Control Commission Regulation #15. 15010 -17 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS B. As a minimum all systems shall be equipped with refrigerant recovery service valves, relief valves capable of resetting after activation, and for system with more than 50 pounds of charge, and isolateable receiver and/or condenser capable of holding the complete charge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL INSTALLATION A. Inspection and Preparation: 1. Examine the work interfacing with mechanical work, and the conditions under which the work will be performed, and notify the Architect/Engineer of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work at original contract price. 2. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 13. Layout: 1. Layout the mechanical work in conformity with the Contract Drawings, Coordination Drawings and other Shop Drawings, product data and similar requirements so that the entire mechanical plant will perform as an integrated system, properly interfaced with other work, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. 2. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, comply with the Architect's or Engineer's decision on resolution of the conflict. 3. Take necessary field measurements to determine space and connection requirements. 4. Provide sizes and shapes of equipment so the final installation conforms to the intent of the Contract Documents. C. Integrate mechanical work in ceiling spaces with suspension system, light fixtures and other work so that required performances of each will be achieved. 3.2 PRODUCT INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1, Except where more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with the product manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15010 -18 BASIC MECHANICAL OFFICE REQUIREMENTS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE . • . . • • B. Movement of Equipment: 2. Consult with manufacturer's technical representatives, who are recognized as technical experts, for specific instructions on special project conditions. 3. If a conflict exists, notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and obtain his instruction before proceeding with the work in question. 1. Wherever possible, arrange for the movement and positioning of equipment so that enclosing partitions, walls and roofs will not be delayed or need to be removed. 2. Otherwise, advise Contractor of opening requirements to be maintained for the subsequent entry of equipment. C. Heavy Equipment: 1. Coordinate the movement of heavy items with shoring and bracing so that the building structure will not be overloaded during the movement and installation. 2. Where mechanical products to be installed on the existing roof are too heavy to be hand - carried, do not transport across the existing roof deck; position by crane or other device so as to avoid overloading the roof deck. D. Return Air Path: Coordinate mechanical work in return air plenum to avoid obstructing return air path. 1. Do not make changes in layout which will reduce return air patch cross - sectional areas. Minimum cross - sectional area will provide an average of 500 fpm and a maximum of 750 fpm velocity through return air plenum at specified supply air quantity unless otherwise noted. 2. Report any obstructions by work of other Divisions to Architect/Engineer. E. Clearances: 1. Install piping and ductwork: a. Straight and true. b. Aligned with other work. c. Close to walls and overhead structure (allowing for insulation). d. Concealed, where possible, in occupied spaces. e. Out -of- the -way with maximum passageway and headroom remaining in each space. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, arrange mechanical services and overhead equipment with a minimum of: a. 7'0" headroom in storage spaces. b. 8'6" headroom in other spaces. 3. Do not obstruct windows, doors or other openings. 15010 -19 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS F. Access: 3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK D. Initial fill of traps: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15010 -20 4. Give the right -of -way to piping systems required to slope for drainage (over other service lines and ductwork). 1. Provide for removal, without damage to other parts, of: a. Coils b. Humidifier manifolds c. Tubes d. Shafts e. Fan wheels f. Drives g. Filters h. Strainers i. Bearings j. Control components k. Other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance 2. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting with minimum of interference with other work. 3. Provide unions where required. 4. Locate operating and control equipment and devices for each access. 5. Provide access panels where units are concealed by non - accessible finishes and similar work. See Section 15050. 6. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. A. All pipe ends, valves, ducts, and equipment left unconnected shall be capped, plugged or otherwise properly protected to prevent damage or the intrusion of foreign matter. B. Do not allow any fans in the HVAC system to operate before the area served by the fan has been cleaned and vacuumed of all debris and dust which might enter the system. C. Any equipment, duct or piping systems found to have been damaged or contaminated above "MILL" or "SHOP" conditions shall be replaced or cleaned to the Engineer's satisfaction. 1. Provide initial water seal fill for all waste P -traps, condensate traps, or similar traps. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 3.4 PROTECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS A. All temporary water connections shall be made with an approved back flow preventer. B. All hose bibs shall have as a minimum, a vacuum breaker, to prevent back flow. Direct connections to hydronic systems shall only be made through a reduced pressure back flow preventer. 3.5 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS A. All techniques involved in the installation of refrigeration systems shall be certified and trained in accordance with the Colorado Air Quality Commission Regulation #15, and the applicable sections of the Clean Air Act. B. No refrigerant shall be intentionally vented to the atmosphere. All refrigerant shall be recovered before opening a closed system for charging, evacuation, service or installation. 3.6 START -UP A. Assign a full time Division 15 Start-Up Coordinator to this project. B. The Start -Up Coordinator shall develop detailed start -up procedures, equipment checkout procedures and data forms for recording compliance with contract document performance criteria, and will assist in developing schedules for checkout and Owner acceptance. C. The Division 15 Contractor shall include as part of the work of this contract, manpower, equipment, tools, ladders, instruments, etc. necessary to confirm start-up of Division 15 systems. D. The Division 15990, Test, Adjust and Balancing Contractor shall include as part of the work of his/her contract, labor and material to provide manpower, equipment, tools, ladders, instruments, etc. necessary to assist the Start -Up Coordinator in accomplishing his/her work. E. The Start-Up Coordinator shall be responsible for maintaining documentation of Start-Up activities until final acceptance of the project. F. The documentation shall be kept current by the Start -Up Coordinator and shall be available for inspection at all times. At the time of acceptance of the project, the Start-Up Coordinator shall surrender 3 completed copies of the documentation to the Owner's representative. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15010 -21 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS G. Before Testing, Adjusting, Calibration and Balancing (Division 15990), the Start- Up Coordinator shall confirm, in writing to the Owner, the following: 1. All equipment, components, and systems have been set, started -up, and adjusted. 2. Systems have been established at the appropriate temperatures and pressures for proper operation and performance. 3. All electric power connections, disconnects, fuses, circuit breakers, etc. are properly sized and installed. 4. The operation of all valves, dampers and sensors is positive (per the control sequences) and demonstrated. H. Provide dated matrices for each item of equipment showing the date each of the start-up activities was witnessed or performed by the Start-Up Coordinator. 1. Start-up and operating performance test documentation shall include all Division 15 equipment with scheduled capacities and all Division 15951 equipment. I. At the completion of the start-up; and test and balance, Division 15 shall conduct a 72 hour dynamic mode demonstration of the systems in the presence of the Owner and Architect/Engineer. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Division 1 sections of the specifications regarding requirements of Record Drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manual submittal and systems demonstration. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer that each system operates in accordance with the contract documents. 2. Explain the operation of each system to the Owner's Representative. Explain use of O &M manual in operating and maintaining systems. B. Date and time of demonstration will be determined by Owner. C. Demonstration Requirements -Data Aire/Liebert air conditioning unit operation - Packaged RTU operation 15010 -22 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 3.8 PROJECT CLOSEOUT ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE A. Refer to the individual sections of the specifications for individual closeout requirements. B. Provide a written schedule of when systems are to be started up, tested and demonstrated along with dates for completion of the temperature controls and balancing. This schedule shall be submitted no later than 30 days prior to starting up and testing equipment. C. The contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer no later than 2 weeks in advance of system testing or demonstration. D. A check list will be used by M -E Engineers during our punch list. The contractor shall meet the requirements of the contract documents, however, this list in no way limits the contractor from other requirements of the contract documents. END OF SECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section supplements Division 1, General Requirements. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. The Architect design team shall decide which is most stringent. C. Provisions of this Section shall also apply to all Sections of Division 15. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data - Submit manufacturer's data for: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Access panels. 2. Fire stopping materials. B. Application Data - Submit application data for firestopping materials showing UL required installation details for every combination of pipe material, penetrated structure, opening size and required fire rating within the scope of this project. Application data drawings shall include UL system number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS PANELS A. See Division 8 for access panel types and fmishes. 1. If panels are not specified in Division 8, comply with the following: a) Manufacturers: (1) Design Basis: Milcor Division, Inryco, Inc.\ (2) Other Acceptable Manufacturers: (a) Birmingham Ornamental Iron Co. (b) Karp Associates, Inc. (c) Wilkenson Co., Inc. (d) Zurn. B. Construction: 1. Doors: 14 gauge steel. 2. Frames: 16 gauge steel. 3. Fire Rating: Equivalent to construction in which installed. 15050 -1 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ICG CENTRAL OFFICE 4. Latches: Flush or concealed, '/4 turn. 5. Finish: Compatible with finish of construction in which installed. 2.2 FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: 3M. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers: a) GE b) Metalines c) Hilti B. General Requirements: 1. Products to be used shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 -88, and be listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory. C. Bare Piping: 1. Model: FD 150, or CP -25. D. Insulated Piping: 1. Model: CP -25 or FS -195, Intumescent. 2. "No -sag" or "self- leveling" as required. E. Accessories: 1. Provide fasteners, restricting collars, backing materials, and protective coatings as required to comply with the UL system listing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Refer to Division 1 of the Specifications. B. General: Provide measurements, drawings and layouts to installers of other work so that required openings may be provided as construction progresses. Any cutting and patching made necessary by failure to provide this information shall be done at no increase in the contract amount. 15050 -2 'BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS E. Cutting Concrete: F. Cutting: G. Patching: H. Perform cutting, and patching required to: 1CG Seattte CENTRAL OFFICE 15050 -3" C. General: Cutting and patching is not work of Division 15, except as provided in Article 3.2 A. of this Section. D. Where possible, mark openings to be cut on existing construction. Otherwise, provide measurements, drawings and layouts to the trade doing the cutting so that openings may be provided as construction progresses. 1. Where authorized, cut openings through concrete for pipe penetration and similar services by core drilling or sawing. 2. Do not cut by hammer - driven chisel or drill. 1. Cut openings in accordance with layouts, measurements or drawings of the Installer of work requiring openings. Cut openings in concrete by core drilling or sawing; not by hammer- driven chisel or drill. 2. Coordinate the location of all openings with structural drawings. Report any discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with work until discrepancies have been resolved. 3. Do not endanger or damage other work through the procedures and processes of cutting to accommodate mechanical work. 4. Review the proposed cutting with the Installer of the work to be cut, and comply with his recommendations to minimize damage. 5. Where necessary, engage the original Installer or other specialists to execute the cutting in the recommended manner. 1. Where patching is required to restore other work because of either cutting or other damage inflicted during the installation of mechanical work, engage experienced craftsmen to complete the patching of the other work. 2. Restore the other work in every respect, including the elimination of visual defects in exposed fmishes. 3. All openings in fire rated construction shall be patched and sealed with U.L. approved sealant to maintain the fire integrity of the structure. 1. Uncover work to provide installation of ill -timed work. 2. Remove and replace defective work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 'BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS I. Painting: J. Structural Limitations: 3.2 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish access panels where indicated. 3.3 SLEEVES ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15050 -4 • 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore work to provide for Architect/Engineers observation of concealed work. Paint all surfaces marred by cutting and/or patching to match existing. 1. Engage experienced painters. 2. Comply with requirements of Painting Sections of this Specification. 1. Do not cut or drill into structural framing, walls, floors, decks, and other members intended to withstand stress, except with Engineer's written authorization. a. Provide lintels, columns, braces and other temporary and permanent supports made by cutting. b. Submit shop drawings of permanent supports. c. Do not penetrate legs of structural "T's" or any other location where pre - stressed structural chords are likely to be encountered when cutting or drilling. B. Deliver access panels for installation by the trade responsible for surface in which installed. 1. Provide instructions for location. 2. The minimum size for access doors shall be as indicated on plans. A. Provide sleeves for piping passing through walls, floors and roofs. B. Set pipe sleeves and inserts in place before concrete is poured. Coordinate the placing of these items to avoid delaying concrete placing operations. C. Locate chases, shafts, and openings required for the installation of the mechanical work during framing of the structure. Do any additional cutting and boring required due to improperly located or omitted openings without cost to the Owner under the supervision of the Owner's representative. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS , 4 1 1 Sleeve Location Sleeve Material Interior Stud Partition Walls Adjustable galvanized sheet metal with wall flanges and plaster lip, 2" and smaller — 22 gauge, 3" through 6" — 20 gauge, 8" and larger —18 gauge. 1. F. Provide Sleeves as Follows: G. Length of Sleeves as Follows: D. Size sleeves for below grade pipe a minimum of 2" beyond outside of pipe. E. Coat surface of all sleeves in contact with concrete, masonry or soil with two coats of coal tar bitumastic paint. Location Walls Sleeve Length Equal to depth of construction. 3.4 FIRE STOPPING A. Install firestopping materials in accordance with their UL and ASTM tested methods. B. Coordinate required annular space with size of pipe and sleeve. Refer to Section 15120. C. Requirements for specific systems: 3.5 DRIP PANS ICG' Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Cold piping - includes chilled water, domestic water, storm water and refrigerant: Insulation and vapor barrier shall be continued through wall and firestopping for "insulated piping" shall be provided. A. Drip Pans: Where possible to run mechanical piping elsewhere, do not run mechanical piping directly above electrical (or electronic) work which is sensitive to moisture. Otherwise, provide drip pans under mechanical piping, sufficient to protect electrical work from dripping. 1. Locate pan immediately below piping, and extend a minimum of 6" on each side of piping and lengthwise 18" beyond equipment being protected. 15050 -5 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 4. ICG Seattle CENTRAL' OFFICE . END OF SECTION Fabricate pans 2" deep of reinforced sheet metal with rolled edges and soldered or welded seams; 22 gauge galvanized steel. Provide 3 /a" copper drainage piping from pan to nearest floor drain or similar suitable point of discharge, and terminate pipe as an open -sight drainage connection. Provide permanent support and anchorage to prevent displacement of drip pans. Insulate bottom of pan as directed by Engineer. `BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS,; is 1.1 SCOPE PART 1 - GENERAL A. This specification covers materials and application methods for maximum corrosion resistance for HVAC equipment located outdoors, including rooftops, or otherwise exposed to outdoor air. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. Work under this section shall be observed by an authorized representative of the coating materials manufacturer, who shall provide recommendations on execution of the work, and at the conclusion of the work shall state in writing that to the best of his knowledge and belief the work was performed in accordance with this specification and his recommendations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including: B. Applicator's Data: Submit a statement of material applicator's experience and qualifications. 1.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Proper surface preparation is mandatory. If evidence of rust or scaling exists on new ferrous steel surfaces removed it shall be in accordance with SSPC -SP -2 (Steel Structures Painting Council - Specification -2) Hand Tool Cleaning, SSPC- SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning, or SSPC -SP -6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. The choice of surface preparation shall be consistent with the degree of corrosion present, and surface preparation shall be in accordance with recommendations of the coating manufacturer's representative prior to start of work. B. Non - ferrous, extended surface heat exchangers (finned coils), shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC -SP -1 Solvent Cleaning. Solvent shall be as recommended by coating manufacturer and be compatible with subsequently applied coatings. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Conformance to SSPC and AWWA specifications. 2. Resistance qualities to humid salt -laden air. 3. Installation instructions. 15055 -1 'CORROSION PROTECTION FROM HUMID SALT -LADEN OUTDOOR AIR PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON- FERROUS HEAT EXCHANGER FINNED SURFACES (TYPE 1) A. Material shall be vinyl copolymer designed for protection of aluminum, copper, galvanized and steel surfaces. It shall be particularly resistant to salt spray and resistant to a wide range of chemicals. The coating shall provide a tough, flexible, highly abrasion - resistant surface that is easy to repair. 1. Vinyl copolymer shall conform to AWWA Specification D -102 and Steel Structures Painting Council Paint Specification PS- 4.02 -64T. 2. Vinyl copolymer shall have a volume of solids per ASTM D2697 of 23.46%. The low volume of solids is essential to proper fog spray application. Higher solids materials, even when thinned, may adversely affect performance of coating system. Color shall be gray. 3. Vinyl copolymer shall be applied fog coated in multiple passes to a maximum dry film thickness of 3 mils. No primer or material except recommended solvent shall be used in conjunction with the specified vinyl copolymer. 2.2 FERROUS, GALVANIZED AND ALUMINUM SURFACES (TYPE 2) A. Primer material shall be a polyamide cured epoxy primer. Volume of solids per ASTM D2697 shall be 47 ± 3%. Manufacturer's product data sheets shall indicate suitability for application on newly galvanized, weathered galvanized, aluminum or zinc - primed surfaces. Primer material shall be by the same manufacturer as vinyl copolymer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT TO BE PROTECTED A. Roof mounted cooling units: Provide type 1 application to all condenser and evaporator coils of all RTUs. This coating shall be as an add alternative to the base contract price and shall be addressed in the bid price of Section 15780. B. Roof mounted units (RTU and MUA): Provide type 2 application to all rooftop exterior casing exposed to outside air. This coating shall be as an add alternative to the base contract price and shall be addressed in the bid price of Section 15780. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15055 -2 CORROSION PROTECTION FROM HUMID SALT -LADEN OUTDOOR AIR 3.2 APPLICATORS 3.3 ACCESS FOR COATING WORK 3.4 COILS 3.5 SURFACES OTHER THAN COILS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE r...... .:5�' ..t ... ... � .v , ... � t :: .. . .. ' 4: {`• ..v v n .. .Wrn � t.x..rc, ern...f A. Since coatings specified herein are of a specialized nature it is essential that only qualified and experienced applicators perform this work. A clean area, specialized equipment, and experience in fog coating and spraying procedures are required to properly apply coating without defects. A. The entire apparatus (unit) being coated shall be disassembled to the maximum degree without disturbing wiring or piping. Upon completion of coating work, the apparatus (unit) shall be re- assembled with care being taken to not damage coatings. A. For non - ferrous, extended surface heat exchangers (fin coils), the coating shall be sprayed uniformly and completely over all surfaces on the fins and tubes. This will require several passes over each side of the coil in order to achieve effective penetration through the inner coil rows without excessive film build -up on the fin edges. Coating shall not be over - applied. Application rate as specified is designed to minimize impairment to heat exchange capability. Coating viscosity shall be properly adjusted to compensate for temperature and humidity conditions at the time of application. A. Epoxy primer shall be applied to a dry film thickness of 2 mils. Drying time before topcoating with vinyl copolymer shall be a minimum of 4 hours. Maximum interval before topcoat application shall be 24 hours. B. Application of vinyl copolymer topcoat shall be in two coats, to achieve a total dry film thickness of 3 mils. C. Total thickness of coating system on these surfaces shall be a minimum of 5 mils dry film thickness. 3.6 TOPCOATING OF FACTORY COATED FERROUS, GALVANIZED AND ALUMINUM SURFACES A. Primer coat shall be applied over existing factory coated surfaces only when existing surface conditions such as corrosion, flaking, and peeling would interfere with the proper adhesion and bonding of the vinyl copolymer topcoat. 15055 -3 •CORROSIONPROTECTION FROM " • HUMID SALT -LADEN OUTDOOR AIR A. After each item of equipment has been installed, exterior surfaces shall be inspected and all damage to coatings shall be repaired by priming if required followed by topcoating, applied by brush or roller. 3.7 REPAIR AND DAMAGED SURFACES - ICG Seattle' CENTRAL' OFFICE If primer is required, prepare surfaces according to appropriate SSPC Cleaning standard specified hereinbefore. Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer of vinyl copolymer for such conditions. END OF SECTION 15055 -4r;: 'CORROSION PROTECTIONFROM HUMID SALT -LADEN OUTDOOR AIR H i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.2 SCOPE: 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HVAC PIPING: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. The General Condition of the Contract for Construction, the applicable portion of Division One, Supplementary Conditions, and the applicable portions of Division 15, Mechanical General Provisions, shall apply to all work under this section of the specification. A. The work covered under this section of the specifications shall include the fur- nishing of the piping systems and perform all operations required for complete installation. A. Codes and Standards: Provide and install all piping and accessories in accordance with the provisions of the following: CISPI Cast Iron Pipe Institute ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ANSI American National Standards Institute AWWA American Water Works Association A. Cooling Condensate Drains: Shall be Type "M" copper tubing with sweat type fittings inside the building. Condensate drain lines on the roof shall be Type "M" copper or schedule 40 PVC. PVC piping will not be allowed inside the building. 15060 -1 PIPE AND. PIPE FITTINGS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Installation: Piping shall be installed complete. All piping shall be cut accurately from dimensions established at the project site and allowances shall be made for the clearance of windows, doors, and other openings. No part of the building structure may be cut to allow for the installation of piping. 2. All piping shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the building construction and shall be installed so as to allow for expansion and drainage. Due to the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to show all elbows and swing joints required to allow for expansion, however, the Contractor shall install swing joints at all runouts, and other connections to mains. 3. All piping shall be run inside of the building insulation envelope. That is, piping shall be run within the heated portion of the building and shall not be exposed to freezing temperatures. Any water piping exposed to outside ambient shall have electric heat tape applied between insulation and piping. B. Screwed joints shall be made with standard pipe thread with ends of pipe reamed to full diameter, no more than three threads shall be left exposed at each fitting, and an approved compound applied to the male thread only. 1. All screw joints shall be made with the best quality pipe joint compound, carefully placed on the threads of the pipe and not on the fittings. 2. All cut thread pipe shall have cutting burrs and sharp edges reamed out. 3. All connections between galvanized steel and C.I. pipe shall be caulked with oakum and lead. The end of the galvanized steel pipe shall be fitted with a ring or part of a coupling screwed on to form a spigot. 4. Provide dielectric fittings at any connection of dissimilar metals. 15060 -2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS C. All pipes which pass through sleeves in fire rated assemblies shall have the space between the pipes and sleeves firestopped and smokestopped with a fireproof material. D. The installation of all pipes must be such as to allow for expansion using offsets, swing joints, expansion joints, etc., as may be necessary to prevent undue strain on piping. Take -off from mains shall have not less than a three -elbow swing. E. Piping fittings and appurtenances in general, shall conform to the American Standard Code for Pressure Piping 125 psig class. F. Copper or tubing joints shall be made with 95/5 solder and approved flux, except refrigerant and below grade piping which shall be made with silver solder. Condensate drain piping joints shall be made with 95/5 solder and approved flux if copper piping is used. G. C.I. cleanout with straight body for caulking into pipe hub and fitted with a brass counter -sunk plug shall be provided and installed as shown on the contract drawings. 3.2 PIPING TESTS AND FILLING: A. The following tests will be conducted by the Contractor and all piping shall be proven tight in the presence of the Owner. These tests shall be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed prior to tests shall be removed. The Contractor shall provide all equipment required and tests shall be for at least 24 hours in duration as follows: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. All water systems shall be hydrostatically tested to 100 psi. All openings in the water piping shall be plugged; the system or portion thereof shall be filled with water and tested. 2. The entire storm, soil, waste and vent system shall be hydrostatically tested. The test shall comprise the plugging of all openings in the soil, waste and vent lines, filling the system or a portion thereof with water to the roof level until all joints are proven tight. END OF SECTION 15060 15060 -3 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 1.1 STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS A. General: A. Comply with MSS Standard Practice SP -69, published by Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry for type and size. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data on the following: 1. Hangers other than clevis type. 2. Anchors. B. Submit structural calculations on trapeze type supports. 1. Use adjustable pipe hangers on suspended pipe. Trapeze hangers may be used at the Contractor's option. Contractor shall be responsible for sizing supports. 2. Chain, wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. 3. Isolate hangers in contact with dissimilar materials with dielectric hanger liners. Tape is not acceptable. 4. Provide supports between piping and building structure where necessary to prevent swaying. B. Hanger Rods: 1CG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Exposed in public areas: Zinc electroplated steel. 2. Concealed or in service areas: Black threaded steel. 3. Outside, exposed to weather: Hot dipped galvanized. C. Sport Concrete Inserts: Steel case and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods and lugs for attaching to forms. 15140 -1 PIPE SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1. Size inserts to match size of threaded hanger rods. 2. Inserts to be UL and FM listed. 3. Minimum 10001b. Capacity with 1/2" rod. D. Channel Type Inserts: 1. Standard channel support with anchor tabs on 4" centers, and nail holes for attaching to forms. 2. Styrofoam inserts to prevent wet concrete seepage. 3. Minimum 2000 pounds /foot capacity. E. Expansion Anchors: 1. For use only where modifications to piping layouts to change from pre - installed insert locations. 2. Inserts shall be of the drill, insert, expand type. Power driven fasteners are not acceptable for piping. 3. Contractor shall select the appropriate type based on the following: Rod Size Maximum Working Load 3/8 600 pounds 1100 pounds 5/8 1800 pounds 3 /a 2700 pounds 7/8 3700 pounds F. Steel Structure Attachments: Rod Size Maximum Working Load 3/8 600 pounds 1100 pounds 5/8 1800 pounds s� 2700 pounds 7/8 3700 pounds 1. Contractor may select welded or mechanically attached. All mechanically attached supports shall have jam nuts or other means to prevent loosening. Maximum loading requirements are as follows: G. Single Hangers: 1. Piping 2" and smaller: MSS type 1, Clevis hanger or type 7 adjustable swivel ring hanger. Minimum 180 pounds design load. 2. Piping 21/2" and larger: MSS type 1 Clevis hanger. 3. Bare copper pipe: Above hangers, plastic or Neoprene coating, sized for copper pipe O.D. and copper coated for identification. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15140 -2 PIPE SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS OFFICE t H. Trapeze hangers and wall supports: 4. Insulated pipe: Hangers to be sized for O.D. of insulation. Hangers shall not penetrate any insulation. 1. Channel strut or structural steel shapes. Contractor shall follow channel strut manufacturers guidelines for loading or provide structural steel supports designed by a professional Engineer, licensed in the same state as where the project is located. 2. All piping shall be attached to the support by means of a channel strut clamp, U -bolt, or pipe rollers which will maintain lateral position of the pipe but allow longitudinal movement. Provide dielectric isolation between all dissimilar metals. 3. All insulation shall be continuous at supports. Do not notch or penetrate insulation. I. Vertical Supports: Steel riser clamp at each floor penetration or every 14 foot supported from wall bracket. Do not anchor riser clamps. J. Hangers: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. General: Adjustable wrought steel clevis with locking nut attachment. 2. Multiple or Trapeze: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 3. Hanger Sizes and Spacing: a) For domestic water and drain piping, conform to the BOCA for spacing, and the following table for hanger rod sizes K. Insulated Pipe Supports: 1. Size pipe supports for outside diameter of pipe insulation. L. Wall Supports: 1. 1/2" through 3 " : Unistrut type channel and steel clamp. a) Use Hydrosorb cushions on copper pipe. 2. 4" and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SUPPORTS A. Adequately support piping from the building structure with adjustable hangers to maintain uniform grading where required and to prevent sagging and pocketing. 15140 -3 PIPE SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Provide supports between piping and building structure where necessary to prevent swaying. 2. Do not support pipe from other pipe or equipment. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 'h" clear space between fmished covering and adjacent work. 1. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. 2. Space hangers generally as called for in Products. C. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2" minimum after piping is erected. D. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable. 1. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. 2. Where concrete slabs form fmished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface. 3. Do not penetrate concrete "TT" legs for piping inserts. Do not penetrate the stressed (i.e. lower) chords of any structural member. E. Provisions for Movement: Install hangers and supports: 1. To allow controlled movement of piping systems. 2. To permit proper movement between pipe anchors. 3. To facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, bends and offsets. 4. To isolate force due to weight or expansion from equipment connections. F. In general, attach hangers to upper chord of roof trusses and floor joists, using long rods to facilitate pipe movement. END OF SECTION 15140 -4 PIPE SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS t. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data. 1.2 SINGLE MANUFACTURER A. Provide all starters, except those factory supplied, by a single manufacturer. B. "Factory supplied" means "as part of a packaged unit" where the motor is not purchased separately from the driven equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS (FACTORY SUPPLIED) A. Provide highest efficiency motors available (as listed under "Motor Options" in standard product specifications). UL Listed with copper windings and minimum service factor of 1.15. The nominal capacity shall not exceed the brake HP requirements at duty schedules. 1 HP motors and smaller to be 120V/1 Ph - 3/4 HP and higher to be 480V/3 Ph. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Motors: Identify by unit served. Include: a. Voltage b. Phase c. Horsepower d. Frame e. Insulating class f. Efficiency g. Power factor h. Index number i. Speed j. Starting characteristics 2. Starters: Identify by motor served. Include: a. Enclosure, NEMA Type b. NEMA size c. Accessories, switches, transformers, etc. d. Wiring diagram e. Auxiliary contacts f. Thermal overload size 3. Submit as part of packaged unit submittals when purchased as part of item of equipment. 15170 -1 MOTORS AND STARTERS ' " 2.2 STARTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Allen Bradley 2. Cutler- Hanuner 3. General Electric 4. Square D B. General: 1. Starters shall be standard NEMA sizes and UL listed. C. Type: Across the line except where noted. D. Enclosure: NEMA Type as required for location. E. Overload Protection: 1. Type: Trip -free thermal overload relay. 2. Location: Each ungrounded conductor. 3. Reset: Manual. 4. Ambient Temperature Compensation: Provide where required. 5. Overload protection to be sized for nameplate running amps. F. Auxiliary Contacts: 1. Provisions to add three without removing starter from enclosure. 2. Number: Provide up to three per starter as required for control sequence, and one (1) auxiliary contact. 3. Switchable type, easily changed from N.O. to N.C. without removing from it's mounting. G. Switches in Cover: 1. Manually Controlled: Three wire start-stop. 2. Automatically Controlled: Hand - off - automatic. 3. Start and stop indicating lights. 4. Equipment not designed to run continuously: Off - Automatic. 1CG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15170 -2 rr , , '.f +• MOTORS AND STARTERS i t! H. Control Transformer: I. Provide starters for all motors as follows: I_ 3.2 STARTERS J. Housing coils to be 120V. PART 3 - EXECUTION � - 3.1 MOTORS A. Install motors on motor mounting systems so coupling or belt drive is properly A. Deliver to installer of electrical work. B. All safety devices shall be wired so that they will stop the motor with a hand - off- automatic switch in the hand as well as the automatic position. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Provide when line voltage exceeds 208 volts. 2. Secondary wiring shall have one leg fused and the other grounded. 3. Secondary voltage not to exceed 120 volts. 1. Single phase motors less than l hp. a) With internal overload protection: None. b) Without internal overload protection: (1) Manually Controlled: Manual starter. (2) Automatically Controlled: Magnetic starter. 2. Single phase motors V2 hp and larger: a) Manually Controlled: Manual starter. b) Automatically Controlled: Magnetic starter. 3. Three Phase Motors: Magnetic starter. aligned. Provide proper belt tension. Dowel direct coupled motors. END OF SECTION 15170 =3" MOTORS AND STARTERS . s PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data on the following: 1. Plastic Pipe Markers and method of application. 2. Engraved Plastic Laminate Sign. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products. B. Where more than a single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide a single selection for each application. 2.2 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS (TYPE A) A. Provide manufacturer's standard pre - printed, flexible or semi - rigid, permanent, color - coded, plastic -sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. B. For Pipes Less Than Six Inches (including insulation if any): Provide full -band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Snap -on application of pre - tensioned semi -rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3 4 " wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1- '12". C. Lettering: Manufacturer's pre - printed wording which conforms to contract document system descriptions. D. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering or as a separate unit of plastic (to accommodate both directions). 15190 -1" " MECHANICALIDENTIFICATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL C.. 2.3 STENCILING (TYPE B) A. Using a color contrasting to the surface to identify, spray or brush paint through neatly cut stencils. B. Lettering shall conform to wording on contract documents. Size shall be in accordance with ANSI A13.1. 2.4 BACKGROUND COLOR AND STENCILING (TYPE C) A. In addition to the requirements above, paint a background color band in accordance with ANSI A13.1. 2.5 ENGRAVED PLASTIC - LAMINATE SIGNS A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16" thick, black with white core (letter color). B. Fastening: 1. Screws 2. Rivets 3. Permanent Adhesive C. Lettering and Graphics: 1. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in the mechanical identification work, with the corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled in the construction documents. 2. In addition, for heating or cooling units and exhaust fans, identify area served. A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, install identification after completion of covering and painting. B. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. ICG Seattle OFFICE 15190 -2 " MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION Y .." [.: C. Type: 3.2 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE A. General: Install pipe markers on piping of the following systems and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. 1. Domestic water piping (hot, cold). 2. Plumbing vent and sanitary (above grade) piping. 3. Condensate piping. 4. Fire protection. See Section 15300 for required nomenclature and spacing of labels. B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces above accessible ceilings, in accessible maintenance spaces, including chases, and above ceiling: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where there could be a question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls, floors, or ceilings, or enter non - accessible enclosures. 4. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 5. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run. 6. Within 6' of access doors above otherwise non - accessible ceilings and chases. 1. Normally exposed to view - Type A or C. 2. Normally concealed from view - Type B. 3.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install an engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. 1. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices: a. Fans b. Air Handling Units c. Condensing Units d. Packaged Air conditioning Units (including Rooftop Units) 15190 -3 MECHANICAL "IDENTIFICATION B. Provide engraved plastic laminate nameplate on every new piece of equipment not already provided with one in accordance with Section 15010 of the specifications. C. Identify area served, if applicable. END OF SECTION 'ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE f 7 PART1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED 1. A. Locate, select, design, and install seismic restraints for all mechanical systems. 1.2 CODES, STANDARDS A. Comply with the requirements of the "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems", first edition, published jointly by: 1. The Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles, California. 2. The Plumbing and Piping Industry Council Inc., Los Angeles, California. B. Where applicable, also comply with the following: C. Design seismic restraint systems for seismic Zone 3. f.. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data for all manufactured restraints. 1 B. Submit shop drawings for all fabricated restraints. C. Show restraint type and location on the sheet metal and piping shop drawings. D. Provide an affidavit signed by a structural engineer registered in the state of Washington, certifying that all mechanical systems requiring such have been properly engineered and designed for seismic Zone 3. E. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1 ( A. Design Basis: Mason ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE Include restraints for ductwork, piping and equipment. 1. Title 24, California code of Regulations. 1. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a) California Dynamics Corporation b) M.W. Sausse and Company, Inc. 15241 -1 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS PART 3 - EXECUTION c) Vibration Mounting and Controls, Inc. d) By prior approval 3.1 GENERAL NOTES FOR BRACING OF DUCTS A. Details shown in the Guidelines provide a lateral bracing system. A typical vertical support system conforming to the standards must also be used. However, where bracing occurs, the required vertical angle may replace a typical vertical support. This includes a trapeze vertical supporting system. B. Brace all rectangular ducts 6 sq. ft. of area and larger. Brace all round ducts 38" in diameter and larger. C. Transverse bracing to occur 30' - 9" o.c. maximum. (Except rectangular ducts 61" and larger in either direction may be braced at 32' - 0" o.c.) Transverse bracing shall be installed at each duct turn and at each end of a duct run. D. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at 60' - 9" o.c. maximum. Transverse bracing for one duct section may also act as longitudinal bracing for a duct section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within four feet of the intersection of both ducts and bracing is sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standard. All joints in duct sections shall provide a positive fastening together of the section. E. No bracing is required if the top of duct is suspended 12" or less from the supporting structural member and attached to top of duct. F. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger size frame using the overall dimensions with maximum weight for selection of the members from the schedule on sheet 17. G. Walls (including gyp -board non - bearing partitions) which have ducts running throughout them may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide solid blockings around duct penetration at stud wall construction. H. Ducts and pipes not braced shall be installed with a 6" minimum clearance to vertical ceiling hanger wires. I. All sheet metal for bracing to be F(y) = 33 ksi. J. Minimum U.S. Standards gauge for sheet metal for bracing to be as follows: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15241 -2 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS L 1 ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16 gauge (0.0598 inch) 14 gauge (0.0747 inch) 12 gauge (0.1046 inch) 3.2 GENERAL NOTES FOR BRACING OF PIPES 15241 -3 K. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain that an appropriate size device be selected for each individual piece of equipment. A. These Guidelines are not intended for the seismic design of the piping. Piping shall be designed with consideration given to the dynamic properties of the piping and the structure. B. Bracing details, support details, schedules and notes listed in the Guidelines apply to all types of pipe and all types of joints. 1. Brace all pipes 21/2" diameter and larger: EXCEPTIONS a. Brace all piping 1 and larger located In boiler rooms, mechanical equipment rooms and refrigeration machinery rooms. Bracing requirements for pipes less than 21/2" in diameter shall be the same as for 21/2" pipes in all other locations. b. Brace all fuel gas and oil piping, 1" and larger. c. Seismic braces may be omitted: (1) When the top of the pipe is suspended 12" or less from the supporting structure member and the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger. (2) On all piping 44" and smaller. 2. Details shown in the Guidelines provide a lateral bracing system. A typical vertical support system conforming to the above standard must also be used. a. Vertical Piping (1) Attachment - Vertical piping shall be secured at sufficiently close intervals to keep the pipe in alignment and carry the weight of the pipe and contents. Stacks shall be supported at their bases and if over 2 stories in height at each floor by approved metal floor clamps. (2) Screwed pipe (I.P.S.) shall be supported at not less than every other story height. (3) Copper tubing - copper tubing shall be supported at each story for piping 11/2" and smaller in diameter. (4) pipes of other approved material shall be supported in accordance with their approved installation standards. SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15241 -4 b. Horizontal Piping (1) Supports - Horizontal piping shall be supported at sufficiently close intervals to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging. (2) Screwed pipe - Screwed pipe (I.P.S.) or flanged pipe shall be supported at approximately 10 foot intervals. (3) Copper tubing - Copper tubing shall be supported at approximately 6 foot intervals for tubing 11/2" and smaller in diameter and 10 foot intervals for tubing 2" and larger in diameter. (4) Pipes of other approved materials shall be supported in accordance with their approved installation standards. 3. Provide transverse bracings at 40' - 0" o.c. maximum unless otherwise noted in the Guidelines. 4. Provide longitudinal bracings at 80' - 0" o.c. maximum unless otherwise noted in the Guidelines. When thermal expansion or contraction is involved, provide longitudinal bracings at anchor points. The longitudinal braces and the connections must be capable of resisting the force induced by expansion and contraction. 5. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for the pipe section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 24" of the elbow or tee of similar size. 6. For threaded piping the flexibility may be provided by the installation of swing joints. In welded or solder joint piping the flexibility shall be provided by expansion loops or manufactured flexible connectors. For piping with manufactured ball joints select length of piping offset using "Seismic Drift" in place of "Expansion Per Joint Manufacturers" selection table. Seismic Drift = 0.015 ft. per foot of height. 7. Do not use branch lines to brace main lines. 8. Trapeze hangers may be used. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion joints, or where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion joints, or where rigidly supported pipes connect to equipment with vibration isolators. 9. A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and a roof; solid concrete wall and a metal deck with Lightweight concrete fill. 10. Provide large enough pipe sleeves through walls or floors to allow for anticipated differential movements. 11. A vertical pipe risers, wherever possible, support the weight of the riser at a point or points above the center of gravity of the riser. Provide lateral guides at the top and bottom of the riser, and at intermediate points not to exceed 30' - 0" on center. 12. Cast iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and nay other pipe joined with a shield and clamp assembly where the top of the pipe is 12" or more from SEISMIC RESTRAINTS supporting structure shall be braced on each side of a change in direction of 90 or more. Riser joints shall be braced or stabilized between floors. 13. For gas piping, the bracing details, schedules and notes may be used except that transverse bracing shall be at 20' - 0" o.c. maximum and longitudinal bracing at 40' - 0" o.c. maximum. Also 1 ", 1' /a ", 11/2", ", and 2" diameter pipes shall be braced the same as 21" diameter pipe in the schedule. (No bracing is required for pipes 3/ " diameter and smaller). 14. Proprietary bracing systems approved by OSA may be used in lieu of the braces shown in the details. C. The seismic bracing and support of fire protection piping is not part of the bluelines. Such piping shall be braced in accordance with NFPA 13 and 14 as applicable. D. It is the responsibility of the user of the contractor to ascertain that an appropriate size device be selected for each individual piece of equipment. - E. Essential facilities or life safety equipment. "Essential facilities" mentioned in the Guidelines are those structures or buildings which must be safe and useable for emergency purposes after an earthquake in order to preserve the health and safety of the general public. 3.3 GENERAL NOTES FOR EQUIPMENT RESTRAINTS A. Mechanical Equipment Anchorages such as bolts, expansion anchors, screws, etc., shall comply with the force level requirements of the above standards as well as the Uniform Building Code. If desired, California Title 24, C.A.C., Table No. 522 -23 -J -Part B may also be utilized. B. Restraining Devices shall be designed to conform with the force level requirements of A above. C. Restraining Devices must be placed on all sides of the equipment base. D. It is the entire responsibility of the Equipment Manufacturer to design his equipment so that the strength and anchorage of the internal components of the equipment exceeds the force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting structure. It is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to ascertain and assure that an appropriate size device be selected for each piece of equipment (including whole unit restraints for internally braced equipment). END OF SECTION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15241 -5 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS C_ 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1.2 FLAME AND SMOKE RATINGS 1. Insulation. 2. Jackets, coatings and protective finishes. 3. Sealers, mastics and adhesives. 4. Fitting covers. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or Less 2. Smoke Developed: 50 or Less 3. Method: ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data on the following: A. Provide insulation tested on a composite basis (insulation, jacket, covering, sealer, mastic and adhesive) complying with the following: A. Deliver insulation products in factory containers bearing manufacturer's label showing fire hazard rating, density and thickness. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Location: Located in mechanical rooms or other areas exposed to view. B. Concealed Location: Located in pipe chases, furred spaces, attics, crawl - spaces, above suspended ceilings, or other locations not exposed to view. 1.5 STANDARDS A. Comply with the latest edition of National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards. 15250 -1 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION A. Manufacturers: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE t 1. Design Basis: Johns- Manville 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Armstrong b) Foster c) Owens - Corning d) Knauf e) Nomaco f) Imcoa g) Pittsburgh Corning h) Cell -U -Foam B. Materials: 1. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: Johns - Manville Micro -Lok heavy density pipe insulation with AP -T jacket. 2. Fiberglass Pipe Fitting Insulation: Johns - Manville "Zeston" fitting covers with factory-cut fiberglass insulation insert. 3. Flexible Unicellular Pipe Insulation: Armstrong Armaflex, II or Therma -cel By Nomaco. C. Thickness: (Thickness listed below are minimum required. Provide thickness required by Local Building or Energy Codes). 1. Service (Domestic) Water Piping: a) Hot: (1) 2" and Smaller: 1" (2) Runouts up to 2" and 10 feet long: 1/2" b) Cold: '/" 2. Refrigerant Suction and Hot gas Bypass Lines: a) Size 2 -1/8" and smaller: '/i" b) Size 2 -5/8" and larger: 44 " 3. Refrigerant Liquid Lines: a) All Sizes: 1/2" 4. Condensate Drain Piping: a) All sizes: '/a" 15250 -2 MECHANICAL INSULATION E 13 E D. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. Inside, above ground: Fiberglass. 2. Inside exposed: Fiberglass with PVC jacket (jacket not required in mechanical rooms). 3. Outside, protected: Fiberglass. 4. Outside, exposed to weather: Rigid closed cell with aluminum jacket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Verify acceptability of all materials which are to be used in air plenums (above ceiling, etc.). Materials must meet all requirements of Local Building Code and Authority having jurisdiction. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulate the following: 1. Domestic hot water piping. 2. Domestic cold water piping. 3. Condensate drain piping. 4. Glycol water supply and return located in Colocation Switch Rooms. B. Installation: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Install insulation on pipe system subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. 2. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. a. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full length units of insulation, with a single cut piece to complete the run. b. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. 3. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. a. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. 4. Extend piping insulation without interruption through pipe clamps, hangers, walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 5. Install protective metal shields and saddles where needed to prevent compression of insulation. Refer to Section 15140. 6. Maintain integrity of vapor - barrier jackets on insulation of cold pipes and storm drainage piping, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. 15250 -3 MECHANICAL INSULATION' ' ' 7. Perform all work in a neat and workmanlike manner. Shoddy work will be cause for rejection. 3.3 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily. including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturation. B. Protection: The insulation installer shall advise the Contractor of required protection for the insulation work during the remainder of the construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION C PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, the applicable portion of Division One, Supplementary Conditions and the applicable portions of Division 15, Mechanical General Provisions, shall apply to all work under this section of the specifications. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK: A. The work covered under this section of the specifications shall include the furnishing of the piping systems and perform all operations required for complete installation and related work as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Provide and install all units and accessories in accordance with the provisions of the following: B. Guarantee: Parts and service shall be provided without charge during the first year after acceptance by the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURES: A. Best grade, free of cracks, craze or other imperfections; fittings, connections left in first class condition, properly adjusted, ready for operation. Fixtures described herein are based on Kohler cuts, catalog numbers to identify quality, style desired. Fixtures: All fixtures shall be of one manufacturer or as designated. Other acceptable manufacturers are American Standard and Crane. B. Plumbing fixtures and chromium- plated brass trim shall be of first quality and meet current requirements of applicable commercial standards published by the Department of Commerce. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Plumbing Fixtures - General Federal Specification: WW -P -541 2. Plumbing Fixtures - Enameled Cast Iron ANSI -A112 -19.1 3. Plumbing Fixtures - Vitreous China ANSI -A112 -19.2 4. Shock Absorbers - Plumbing and Drainage Institute WH2O1 C. All exposed water piping, traps, and waste piping shall be chromium - plated. All supplies and waste extended to wall and fitted with cast brass, chromium- plated escutcheons. 15400 -1 PLUMBING FIXTURES E. Fixtures: P -1 D. All fixtures to be complete with all details, including flexible supplies and stops. Provide aerators on all faucets. Sink and Disposer: Elkay Celebrity GECR- 2521 -R, 25" x 21 'A" x 5 3/8" deep, stainless steel, self rimming sink with 3 hole punch. Elkay LK- 232 -s- BH-5 two blade, concealed mount, 10" restricted swing spout and aerator. Provide chrome plated brass angle stop valves, supply pipes, 1 'A" x 1 'A" p- trap and escutcheon. In- Sink - Erator Badger 1 garbage disposer, 1/3 hp, 115 volt, single phase. 2.02 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT: A. Plumbing Contractor shall make a complete waste, vent, hot and cold water rough -in for all Owner or General Contractor furnished equipment as indicated on the drawing. Furnish and install, shut off valves, traps, tailpieces, sink strainers, supply pipes, air gaps, escutcheons, and make all final connections for a complete installation. B. Plumbing Contractor shall consult with Architectural drawings and other sections of the specifications for equipment requiring roughing in and final connections under this section of the contract. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15400 -2 PLUMBING FIXTURES is 9i PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Every supply to every fixture and piece of equipment requiring the various services, shall be separately valved. These valves shall be provided with fixture in addition to faucets. Furnish and install Josam 75000 Series shock absorbers at the ends of all cold water branches to fixtures. Sizes shall be in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard P.D.I. - WH2O1. Connections between earthenware of fixtures and soil pipe flanges shall be made water -tight with one -piece molded gasket. B. All exposed water and waste piping shall be chromium - plated brass. 11 E 1 ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 15400. C. Prior to final inspection, the Plumbing Contractor shall go over each system and clean fixtures, fittings, polished and plated work, and other equipment installed by him, leaving entire system in a clean and complete working order. All plumbing fixtures shall be sealed between fixture and walls or floors with a white sealing compound. PLUMBING FIXTURES 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 STANDARDS A. Materials shall comply with the following standards. 1. Cast iron: ASTM A -74 2. Cast iron pipe fittings ASTM A -888 3. Cast iron pipe couplings ASTM C -564 4. Copper pipe: a. Type K, L, M: ASTM B88 b. DWV: ASTM B306 1.2 RELATED WORK ._ A. Section 15140 Pipe Supports and Anchors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 1 A. Above Ground Inside Buildings, Size Three Inch and Under: 1. Pipe: Copper tube, hard temper, Type L. 2. Fittings: Wrought copper, or cast bronze. 3. Solder: 95 -5 tin - antimony (no lead). 1__ 2.2 SOIL AND VENT PIPING 1 _ A. Above Ground: 1. Cast iron hub and spigot, neoprene gasket. 2. Cast iron no hub, neoprene gasket and stainless steel sleeve joint. 3. DWV copper with DWV fittings, solder joint. B. Underground: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Cast iron hub and spigot, neoprene gasket. 2. Cast iron no hub, neoprene gasket and stainless steel sleeve joint. 15410 -1 PLUMBING PIPING 2.3 ABOVE GROUND VENT PIPING A. Schedule 40 galvanized steel with threaded drainage type fittings. B. Cast iron no hub, neoprene gasket and stainless steel sleeve joint. 2.4 SOIL AND VENT EXPOSED IN FINISHED SPACES A. DWV copper with DWV fittings. 2.5 SOIL AND VENT PIPING PRODUCTS A. Use approved fittings for connections between dissimilar pipe systems. B. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: JR Smith 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Josam b) Wade c) Zurn C. Cleanout Plugs: 1. Material: Cast bronze or brass. 2. Type: Countersunk. 3. Threads: ANSI B2.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Testing: Test in accordance with the applicable Plumbing Code. B. Connections to Equipment Furnished Under Other Sections: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Make final connections to all equipment shown on drawings as connected to supply and /or drain piping. 2. Furnish all devices necessary for final connection, including: a. Tail pieces b. Stops c. Supplies 15410 -2 PLUMBING PIPING 11 i 1 .: c 1 1: C. Corrosion Protection: 1. Provide isolation between concrete or mortar and any copper pipe. D. Comply with Section 15140 Pipe Supports and Anchors for pipe support requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SOIL AND VENT PIPING A. Couplings: B. Gaskets: Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. C. Joint Adapters: Make joints between cast iron pipe and other types of pipe with standard manufactured cast iron adapters and fittings. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Provide heavy duty couplings on the following: a. All no hub underground pipe. b. All no hub sanitary piping above and below grade. 2. Provide standard duty couplings on the following: a. Vent piping. END OF SECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for plumbing fixtures and accessories, in accordance with Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide factory fabricated fixtures. B. Provide trim and accessories as required for complete installation. 2.2 FLOOR DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: Josam 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a) JR Smith b) Wade c) Zurn B. Body: Duco cast iron, with flashing collar. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Floor Drains: 1. Refer to Architectural drawings for exact locations and additional installation requirements. 2. Install floor drains with P -traps and vent as required. 3. Install drains on the center line of sheet lead pan in waterproofed areas and in floors above lowest floor. 4. Clamp pan into drain flashing collar. 5. Install strainers immediately after completion of fmish floor installation. 6. Coordinate locations with mechanical equipment. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: 1. Clean strainers, traps, aerators, and valves of debris, sand and dirt. 2. At completion, thoroughly clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. B. Adjusting: After cleaning and flushing operations are accomplished, adjust faucets for proper flow. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect fixtures and related components from damage before, during, and after installation to date of Final Acceptance or Owner move -in. Provide protective coverings or other protection as required. B. Inspect each installed unit for damage to fmish. If feasible, restore and match finish to original at site; otherwise, remove fixture and replace with new unit. C. Feasibility and match to be judged by Architect or Engineer. D. Remove cracked or dented units and replace with new units. • ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 15440 -2 PLUMBING FIXTURES Et' k .i � c 1 PART1- GENERAL 1 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 1.2 WARRANTY { A. Water Heater and Storage Tank: B. Water Heater: Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty for 3 years. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Water heaters shall comply with the latest version of ASHRAE 90.1 for standby loss and efficiency, or with the latest version of the Local Energy Code requirements. B. Electric water heaters shall be U.L. listed. { PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER A. Manufacturers: 1 B. Construction: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Domestic water heaters. 2. Domestic hot water storage tanks. 1. Furnish a certificate of warranty outlining heater manufacturer's lining warranty. 2. The warranty shall cover a period of three years against tank failure. 3. The warranty shall not be on a pro -rated basis. 1. Design Basis: A.O. Smith 2. Other acceptable manufacturers: a) State b) Rheem c) Rudd 1. Tank: Steel with glass lining, with cathodic protection. 2. Jacket: Heavy gauge steel with baked enamel finish. 15450 -1 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 3. Controls: a) 120 volt control circuit transformer. b) Transformer fusing. c) Magnetic contractors. d) Immersion style operating thermostats. e) Element fusing per N.E.C. f) High limit switch. g) ASME temperature and pressure relief valve. 4. Heater shall be ASME rated and U.L. listed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER A. Installation: 1. Make connections between water heaters and domestic water piping system with dielectric unions. 2. Install isolation valves at both cold water and hot water connections to water heater. 3. Furnish and install copper drain piping from temperature and pressure relief valve for water heater. a. Furnish drain full size of relief valve opening and extend as indicated. B. Adjusting: 1. Provide start-up and adjustment by factory authorized personnel. 2. Upon completion of water heater installation, verify satisfactory control operation under maximum demand conditions as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Adjust discharge water temperature as required. Make control adjustments required. END OF SECTION 1.1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 SCOPE A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, the applicable portion of Division One, Supplementary Conditions and the applicable portions of Division 15, Mechanical General Provisions shall apply to all work under this section of the specifications. A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, drawings and calculations, services and perform all operations required for complete installation of the Fire Protection systems and related work specified herein, or as required by code. Submit detailed drawings and calculations to Fire Marshal for approval and Fire Marshal approved drawings to the Engineer. Prior to the start of any work submit shop drawing for all equipment and material to the Engineer for approval. Coordinate sprinkler head locations with architectural reflected ceiling plan and submit for approval by Architect and Engineer. Locate Inspector's Tests in sprinlder closet in tamperproof cabinet. B. Third Floor: Provide complete double- interlocked pre - action deluge valve sprinkler system in areas indicated on drawings. Provide a cross zoned detection system using photoelectric detectors. Use only compatible UL listed detectors. Provide all necessary electrical connections including wiring, conduits, and panelboard elements. Refer to electrical drawings for location and number of detectors. Detectors shall be installed by fire protection contractor. C. Provide required interlocks with electrical detection system for pre- action system under Division 16. When manual override switches are requested by Owner, provide clear, non - lockable, lexan cover box for switch protection. D. Relocate existing sprinklers and piping as required in areas that are currently provided with sprinlder protection and provide new piping and sprinklers as required in areas without existing sprinlder protection. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15500 -1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS OFFICE 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Provide and install all units and accessories in accordance with the provisions of the following: 1. National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 13 and 14. 2. All State and Local Codes. A. Subcontractor shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall furnish (in writing, with copies to the Architect) any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily with least possible interference or delay. B. Where the work of Subcontractor will be installed in close proximity to work of other trades, or where there is evidence that work will interfere with work of other trades, he shall assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. The Contractor shall prepare composite working drawings at a scale not less than 1 /8" equals 1' -0" clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to the work of all trades. Drawings shall show the work of all trades above the ceiling (ductwork, conduit, water piping, roof drains, lights, sprinklers, etc.). Drawings shall be submitted and approved before any materials are ordered or fabricated. C. The Subcontractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns setting plans and shop details for the proper installation of the work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work. D. Contractor shall submit to the Architect and the Structural Engineer for approval, a coordinated sleeve shop drawing which locates and sizes all sprinkler sleeve penetrations. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15500 -2 : FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS OFFICE B. Guarantee: Parts and service shall be provided without charge during the first year after start-up and acceptance by the Owner and the cost for the one year inspection test. 1.4 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES: 1 2.1 MATERIALS: PART 2 - PRODUCTS YK: i�.v�✓.:rt rYJV. ��\ A. Sprinkler heads shall be of a type listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and shall be of type as designated for the following areas: 1. All areas shall be provided with pendant heads. Hydraulics shall be designed according to NFPA 13 for applicable hazard classification. Acceptable manufacturers: Viking, Grinnell, Star Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Provide corrosion resistant sprinkler heads in battery and UPS rooms. B. Sprinkler heads shall be standard, automatic closed type with 2" nominal size orifice. Temperature ratings of fusible elements shall be in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13. C. Spare Sprinklers: The Contractor shall furnish spare automatic sprinters in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13. The sprinlders shall be placed in a suitable container and shall be representative of and in proportion to the number of each type and temperature rating of the sprinlders installed. In addition to the spare sprinklers, the Contractor shall furnish no fewer than two special sprinkler wrenches, or at least one sprinkler wrench for each container or sprinkler box, whichever is greater. D. Sprinkler Alarm System: Provide an approved Pre - Action type deluge sprinkler valve complete with all alarm indicators, valves, tees, air compressor and all associated piping, valves, gauges, etc., similar to that manufactured by Viking Corporation. Provide all required interlocks to allow the use of electrical detection system provided under division 16. 2.2 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES: A. Shall be furnished and installed on each OS &Y valve as required. Each OS &Y supervisory switch shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved, Model NGV as manufactured by Simplex, or approved equal. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15500 -3 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS OFFICE 2.3 OS &Y VALVES: 2.6 PIPE: A. Shall be furnished and installed as required. Each valve shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved Class 175 psi nonshock water working pressure with rising stem Fig. G -633 threaded or G -634 flanged similar to that manufactured by Stockham valves. 2.4 CHECK VALVES: A. Shall be furnished and installed as required, each valve shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved Class 175 psi nonshock water working pressure with standard ball drip tap Fig. G -937 threaded or G -939 flanged similar to that manufactured by Stockham valves. Provide approved ball drips for each check valve. 2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS: A. Shall be Watts, Braukmann or FEBCO of size and type as required and approved by State and Local Codes. Drains from backflow preventers shall be installed in any approved manner and discharge to the nearest outlet. A. Shall be Schedule 40 for 2" and less and Schedule 10 for 2 -1/2" and larger, black steel pipe to withstand a working pressure of at least 175 psi with welded or mechanical fittings. Mechanical fitting shall be rated for up to 175 psi and shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved for sprinkler systems and standpipe use similar to that manufactured by Victaulic. Verify and coordinate with existing sprinkler piping. 2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. Pipe hangers shall be B -Line, Fee and Mason, or Grinnell steel clevis hangers supported from round steel rod and selected within Manufacturer's published load ratings, accurately adjusted to maintain specified pipe grades and securely attached to the building structural members by means of concrete inserts, clamps, brackets, expansion shields, etc., as applicable. B. Group hangers or brackets constructed of channel iron or pipe may be installed. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15500 -4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS C. Rods for trapeze hangers supporting several pipes shall be sized for the equivalent load. D. Where the lines are subject to expansion, the supports shall be carefully worked out to allow the pipe to expand without restriction. Where necessary, roller or flexible hangers or base supports shall be installed. E. Hanger rods shall be attached to sufficiently rigid structural members of the building, not to bottom chord of joists. F. Provide additional hangers or anchoring devices necessary for proper support of piping at comers, top of risers, etc. G. Hanger spacing for horizontal pipe shall not exceed the requirement of NFPA 13. H. Hanger rods shall be of size as set forth in NFPA 13. 2.8 SLEEVES: A. All smoke walls, fire walls and masonry walls shall be sleeved with galvanized steel pipe, exposed pipe in mechanical and equipment room shall be galvanized steel pipe. Sleeves, in general, for bare pipe shall be two (2) pipe sizes larger than the pipe. Sleeves shall be galvanized steel pipe terminated 1" beyond each side of walls, partitions and ceilings. B. Sleeves passing through walls shall have spaces between bare pipe or pipe covering shall be adequately fire stopped with approved noncombustible non - melting material. 2.9 FLOOR AND WALL PLATES: A. All exposed pipes passing through floors, walls or ceiling shall be fitted with split ring plates covering the sleeves. Plates in finished rooms shall be chromium- plated. Plastic is not acceptable. 2.10 GAUGES: A. Shall be similar to that manufactured by Potter - Roemer 0 -300 psi. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15500 -5 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS . OFFICE 2.11 DRAINS: 2.12 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION: 2.13 IDENTIFICATION: A. The entire fire protection system shall be provided with drainage facilities, at low points in the system. A. Shall be provided as required, with sight glass. Inspector's test connection location to be approved by Architect in writing. Pipe drain line to nearest building drain. A. Provide and install identification signs as required by NFPA 13. 2.14 Fire Protection System drains and inspector's test drains to be chrome finished and installed with chrome escutcheon plate, and splash block. PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Installation: The piping shall be installed complete. All piping shall be cut accurately from dimensions established at the project site and allowances shall be made for the clearance of windows, doors, and other openings. No part of the building structure may be cut to allow for the installation of piping unless specifically noted on the drawings or approved in writing. 1. All piping shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the building construction and shall be installed so as to allow for expansion and drainage. B. Screwed joints shall be made with standard pipe thread with ends of pipe reamed to full diameter, no more than three threads shall be left exposed at each fitting, and an approved compound applied to the male thread only. 1. All screw joints shall be made with the best quality pipe joint compound, carefully placed on the threads of the pipe and not on the fittings. 2. All cut thread pipe shall have cutting burrs and sharp edges reamed out. C. Welded joints shall be made in accordance with the procedure outlined in the ASA ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15500 -6 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS Piping Code and before assigning any welder to work covered, the Contractor shall provide for the approval of the name of pipe welders to be employed in the work, together with certification that each of these welders has passed qualification tests as prescribed by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau, or by other reputable testing laboratory or agency using procedures approved by the ASME or the AWG. The Contractor shall use only approved factory manufactured welding type fitting, for the intersection welding or branching to mains. Valves and specialties shall have screwed or flanged joints. 1. Welding tees, ells, reducers and caps shall be of wrought or forged construction similar to those manufactured by Tube Turns, Inc. In lieu of wrought or forged welding tees for branch outlets, weldolets or welding nipples may be used; provided, first that the nipples are accurately coped in the shop to fit the pipes and leveled for field welding; and provided, second that openings in the walls of pipes are cut to full inside diameter of the nipples; and third, that the outlet diameter shall be less than three- quarters the diameter of the main. 2. For connections on welded piping to valves 2 -1/2" and over and of other accessories required to be flanged, standard forged welding neck flanges shall be used. The flange face shall be in every case perpendicular to the axis of the pipe or valve. 3. No direct welded connections shall be made to valves, strainers apparatus and associated equipment. D. Eccentric reducing fittings or eccentric reducing coupling must be installed to bring bottoms of mains in line and prevent pockets. Eccentric fittings will not be required on water mains. Ends of pipes shall be reamed out before being made up. Necessary fittings or bands must be used as springing of pipes will not be permitted. Screw pipes and fittings are to be put together with red lead or an approved compound applied to the pipes and not to fittings. E. The installation of all pipes must be such as to allow for expansion using offsets, swing joints, expansion joints, etc., as shown or as may be necessary to prevent undue strain on piping. F. Piping fittings and appurtenances in general, shall conform to the American Standard Code for Pressure Piping ASA B31.1; 125 psig class. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15500 -7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS OFFICE G. Contractor shall install sprinlder heads at distances, as per NFPA, from surface mounted lights, speakers, etc. 3.2 PIPING TESTS: A. The following tests will be conducted by the Contractor and all piping shall be proven tight in the presence of the Fire Marshal. The Contractor shall provide all equipment required and tests shall be as required by the Fire Marshal. B. The fire protection system shall be hydrostatically tested to 200 psi for a period of two (2) hours. All openings in sprinlder piping shall be plugged; the system shall be filled with water and tested. 3.3 CLEANING AND FLUSHING: A. Extreme care shall be exercised by the Contractor to prevent dirt and other foreign matter from entering pipe or components of system during construction. Pipe stored on project shall have open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. B. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment installed under this section of the work, after the system has been complete or used for temporary service, but in any case, prior to final inspection by the Owner's representatives. C. Comply with the manufacturer's printed instruction, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified and except where manufacturer's technical representation directs otherwise. 3.4 GUARANTEE: A. The Contractor guarantees by his acceptance of the contract, that all work installed will be free from any and all defects in workmanship and/or materials, and that all apparatus will develop capacities and characteristics specified, and that if during the period of one year, from date of certificate of completion and acceptance of work, any such defects in workmanship, materials, or performance appear, he will without cost to the Owner, remedy such defects within a reasonable time. In default thereof, Owner may have such work done and charge the cost to the Contractor. Provide quarterly inspections for a period of one year after completion of the facility. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15500 -8 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 1 r ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 15500 15500 -9 FIRE PROTECTION. SYSTEMS C PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.2 REGULATORY/REQUIREMENTS 2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Design Basis: Mason 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Metraflex b) Flexonics 15530 -1 :tr A. Installer: A firm with at least five years of successful installation experience on projects with refrigerant piping similar to that required for this project. A. Comply with applicable requirements of the Clean Air Act, State of Colorado and City and County of Denver Regulations concerning handling of refrigerants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. ASTM Type B280, ACR copper tube with wrought copper fittings. B. End Caps: 1. Provide factory applied plastic end caps on each length of pipe and tube. 2. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. C. Fittings: ANSI /ASME B16.22 wrought copper with long radius elbows. D. Joints: ANSI /AWS A5.8 BCuP silver braze. E. Connection Material: 1. Copper to Copper Connections a) AWS Classification BCuP -4 Copper Phosphorus b) AWS Classification BCuP -5 Copper Phosphorus REFRIGERANT PIPING 1. Conform to ARI Standard 710. 2. Sizes ' /2" and larger - interchangeable core, full flow. 3. Sizes smaller than 1 /2" - sealed type. 4. Minimum burst pressure - 1500 psig. B. Sight Glass: C. Expansion Valve: D. Solenoid Valve: 1. Confirm to ARI Standard 760. 2. Provide solenoid valve for systems 25 tons and larger. 3. Compatible with refrigerant type for the project. 4. Valve shall fail in closed position (power open). E. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Alco 2. Sporlen 3. Mueller 4. Parker ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE �rtm�xrz B. Braided bronze with copper tube ends, compatible with refrigerant type for system C. Flexible connector shall be line size or connection size, whichever is Larger. D. Anchor pipe near each connector. 2.3 REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES A. Filter Drier: 1. Double port moisture indicating, reversible color indicator. 2. Removable sight glass and moisture indicating element. 3. Furnish with a protective cover. 4. Maximum working temperature of 200 °F, maximum working pressure 500psi. 1. Thermostatic type, diaphragm or bellows operated. 2. External superheat adjustment factory set for 10 °F superheat (adjustable). 3. compatible with refrigerant type for the project. 4. Pressure rated per project requirements. 5. Power elements and valve size shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, for the service intended. 15530 -2 • ' REFRIGERANT PIPING i YI 2.4 INSULATION C A. Fiberglass Pipe Insulation: Heavy density, molded fiberglass insulation having an ASJ /SSL jacket and a self - sealing transverse tab, conforming to ASTM C -547, equal to Owens - Corning "Fiberglas 25 ASJ ", Certainteed 500 "Snap -On ", Manville "MircoLok ", Knauf "ASJ /SSJ" or an approved equal. Jacket shall be a factory- applied reinforced, white draft and foil laminate which incorporates a self - sealing feature. Thickness shall be %2" for pipe sizes up to 1". Thickness shall be 1" for pipe sizes up to 3 ". Thickness shall be 1 -' /Z" for pipe sizes in excess of 3 ". B. Metal Jackets: 0.016 aluminum or stainless steel jackets with vapor barrier. C. Mechanical Insulation Fasteners: Duro -Dyne stick pin fasteners with plate and nylon stop clips, or equal product furnished by the insulation manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Run piping level or plumb, except slope gas piping to compressor with a minimum number of elbows. B. Provide oil traps at bottom of suction risers. Size risers for proper oil return. C. Size lines for total pressure drop not to exceed 2 °F saturation temperature. D. Provide necessary flexibility for vibration and expansion with offsets and loops, not expansion joints. E. Provide flexible connectors at all unit connections. F. Replace air in pipe with dry nitrogen to prevent corrosion during soldering. G. Install valves, sight glasses, filter - driers, and accessories, furnished by equipment supplier, but not factory installed. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15530 -3 " 'REFRIGERANT PIPING.- 1. Use un -slit covering. 2. Carefully cement all joints. H. Insulate all underground refrigerant lines with %" flexible foam. I. Insulate refrigerant suction piping in all locations, inside or outside the structure. J. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with refrigeration equipment manufacturer's instructions. K. All refrigeration piping installation and testing shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI specification B9.1 and B31.5. L. All joints shall be brazed, protect valves and accessories against excessive temperatures during brazing. M. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. N. Provide non - conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals. O. Locate traps at vertical rises against flow in suction lines. P. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Q. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. R. Prepare pipe, fittings, support, and accessories not pre - finished, ready for finish painting. S. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator. T. Open all isolating valves except those isolating equipment shipped from the factory with refrigerant holding or operating charge. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig and make soap bubble test at all joints. Repair all leaks. U. Evacuation, leak testing and charging. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. After system has been pressure- tested, connect a vacuum pump and evacuate piping system (except for compressor isolated from the system.) 2. Exhaust system to rough vacuum and refill to not less than 50 psig of refrigerant gas at an ambient temperature of not less than 60 °F. Test entire system with a halide leak detector and carefully repair all leaks. 15530 -4 • REFRIGERANT PIPING 4 3. Evacuate system with a two -stage vacuum pump in first class condition to an absolute pressure not higher than 0.02 mm of mercury. Valve off pump, and hold for 12 hours minimum. If there is any loss of vacuum readable on a vacumm gage, repeat pressurization test at 125 psig or 150 percent of operating pressure, whichever is greater. 4. Alternatively, a single stage vacuum pump in first class condition may be used, evacuating to 0.10 mrn of mercury minimum. Hold vacuum one hour, break vacuum with refrigerant gas to 1 -5 psig positive pressure, and °' "' - re- evacuate to 0.01 mm mercury minimum. Hold one hour, break, and evacuate a third time to 0.01 mm. 5. Open valves that isolate pre - charged equipment and charge the system. Make final check of all piping and equipment with a halide leak detector. 6. Operate the system for the equal of eight hours at full load, with refrigerant passing through the dryers. Check oil levels frequently during this period and add oil whenever required. Use only refrigerant oil in sealed cans furnished by the compressor manufacturer. 7. The Contractor shall certify the system as ready for normal use. 3.3 HANGERS For insulated piping, provide hangers of size to fit outside insulation. A. For non - insulated piping, provide hangers with elastomer insert to prevent damage to piping from vibration. 3.4 TESTING AND DEHYDRATION Use the following procedure to test and hydrate the systems: 1CG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 6. Isolate any elements which would be damaged by test pressures. 7. Test system with trace gas using an appropriate leak detector. 8. Repair or replace leaking elements of system and re-test, 9. After system has been proven to be free of leaks, evacuate it with a high efficiency vacuum pump to 2.5 mm of mercury absolute. 10. Allow the system to stand under vacuum for 24 hours. a. Then, if a vacuum of 2.5 mm can be drawn within 30 minutes, the system shall be considered dry. b. If not, the procedure shall be repeated. 11. Break the final vacuum by charging with the correct refrigerant. END OF SECTION 15530 -5' REFRIGERANT PIPING 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1CG Seattle CENTRAL' • OFFICE 1. Safety: a. ANSI /ASHRAE 15. b. UL 465. 2. Ratings: ARI210. 3. Energy Efficiency: ASHRAE 90. 4. Sound: ARI 270. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable portions of the following: A. Submit manufacturer's data. Include the following: 1. Drawings showing: a. Over -all dimensions. b. Operating weights. c. Support requirements. d. Sizes and locations of connections. e. Accessories. 2. Performance. 3. Wiring diagrams. 4. Installation instructions. 5. Operating instructions. 6. Service instructions. 7. Parts lists. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RATINGS A. Based on sea level catalog ratings at 90° ambient. B. Where ratings are not shown in schedule, refer to cooling unit schedule. 1. Allow two degree suction line drop. 2.2 ELECTRICAL A. Refer to electrical plans and/or specifications for electrical characteristics. 15670 -1 AIR - COOLED CONDENSING UNITS' B. Provide equipment with ampacities not exceeding those of electrical circuits provided. C. Provide unit(s) for single point electrical connections. D. The electrical disconnect shall be provided under the electrical division. 2.3 CIRCUITS A. If more than the specified number of refrigerant circuits are provided, coordinate evaporator circuits for equal number of circuits. 2.4 MANUFACTURERS A. Design Basis: Data Aire. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Liebert 2.5 CONSTRUCTION A. Casing: Welded, 18 gauge zinc- coated steel, with exterior phosphatized, primed with epoxy resin and finished with enamel. 1. Provide removable access panels. B. Condenser Fans: Vertical discharge, direct drive, with permanently lubricated resiliently mounted motors with built -in overload protection. 1. Provide fan guard. C. Condenser Coil: Copper tube, aluminum fins with sub - cooling circuit. 1. Provide grille or louvers to protect coil from hail. D. Controls: Factory - wired, including: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. High and low pressurestats. 2. Compressor overload devices. 3. Short cycle timer. 4. 24 volt transformer. 15670 -2 AIR=COOLED CONDENSING UNITS ' (4 E. Capacity Control: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate condensing unit in general position indicated in relation to other work. B. Charge with refrigerant in the quantity recommended by the manufacturer. 3.2 START -UP ICG'Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Provide head pressure control for operation at minimum load at minimum specified temperature. 2. Provide hot gas bypass for capacity between unloaded rating and minimum specified rating. 1. Position for sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, including clearance for cleaning and replacement of tubes, filters, motor, etc. 1. Bleedout non - condensable gases. 2. Test refrigerant system for leakage in manner recommended by manufacturer. C. Install pressure relief system in compliance with governing regulations, to vent refrigerant in manner indicated. D. Install refrigerant piping ( Type ACR copper tube) in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, and per the drawings. 1. Comply with the Clean Air Act. 2. Provide filter/dryer, site glass and service /isolation valves foi each circuit. 3. Run piping plumb. Slope as required for proper oil return and to protect compressor. a. Provide oil trap at bottom of suction risers. E. Provide for vibration and expansion of piping. A. Sustained Operation: Do not place unit in sustained operation prior to initial balancing of mechanical systems affected by unit operation. B. Cooperate with other trades and installers of other work during testing, adjusting, balancing and start -up of mechanical systems. 15670 -3 AIR- COOLED CONDENSING UNITS' C. Start up and first year parts and labor to be provided by equipment manufacturer. 1CG Seattle CENTRAL' OFFICE END OF SECTION 1 t 1 PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 FLAME -SMOKE RATINGS 1 1.2 CERTIFICATION 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1._ 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide air - handling unit thermal insulation with flame- spread rating of 25 or less, fuel- contributed of 50 or less, and smoke developed rating of 50 or less. A. Provide equipment rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210, and bearing ARI certification label. B. Provide equipment listed by Underwriters Laboratories. A. Comply with all applicable regulatory requirements regarding the design, manufacture, installation and service of refrigeration systems including: A. Submit manufacturer's data, including: B. Coordinate with Installer of temperature control work. 'ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. ASHRAE Standard #15. 2. EPA Clean Air Act. 3. Colorado Air Quality Control Commission Regulation #15. 1. Drawings showing overall dimensions of complete assembly, including curbs at specific location on roof for each unit. 2. Operating weights. 3. Equipment support requirements. 4. Sizes and locations of connections. 5. Accessories. 6. Auxiliary support requirements. 7. Unit installation shop drawings. See Section 15010. 1. Prepare wiring diagram showing connections to unit wiring to accomplish control sequence specified in Section 15951. 15780 -1 • PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 1.5 MOTORS A. Refer to Section 15170. Provide highest efficiency motors available to manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory shipping covers in place until installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. B. Provide one year parts warranty, five year replacement compressor warranty. C. Include one year service guarantee on the entire refrigeration cycle and its associated interlocks. This guarantee shall obligate the installer to service the equipment and attend to all legitimate service calls and make necessary repairs, alterations, additions, adding refrigerant charges, etc. for a period of one year without additional cost to the Owner. Compressors shall carry an additional four year parts warranty with the exclusion of replacement labor. Shop drawings submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a copy of the purchase agreement between the Contractor and an authorized service representative of the manufacturer for check, test and start up and first year service. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish complete parts and labor service and maintenance of packaged roof top units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion by manufacturers' authorized service agency. B. Provide maintenance service with a two month interval as maximum time period between calls. Provide 24 -hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions. C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. D. Manufacturer shall maintain a parts and service center in the city from which the units are purchased. ICG Seattle OFFICE 15780 -2 . • PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS i' f; PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFTOP UNIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Design Basis: Trane. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Carrier b) Lennox c) Aaon B. Enclosure: 1. Material: Steel, zinc coated. 2. Finish: a) Phosphatizing. b) Epoxy primer. c) Baked enamel. 3. Insulation: a) Material: Fiber glass. b) Thickness: One inch. c) Protection: Mat or foil faced. d) Access Panels: Gasketed. 4. Air Inlet and Outlet: Side of unit. C. Evaporator Fan: D. Evaporator Coil: 1. Material: a) Tubes: Copper. b) Fins: Aluminum. 2. Pressure Test: 225 psig. E. Drain Pan: 1. Type: Forward curve, centrifugal. 2. Drive: Direct. 3. Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. 4. Mounting: Rubber in shear isolators. 5. Balancing: Static and dynamic. 1. Location: Evaporator section. 2. Insulated and sealed. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 15780 =3 " "T ' PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING OFFICE UNITS F. Filters: 3. Threaded. I. Curb: 1. Type: Throw -away. 2. Manufacturer and Model: a) Farr, 30/30. b) AAF. Amair. 3. Thickness: One inch. 4. Provide antimicrobial coating. AFF Intersept or equivalent. G. Compressor: 1. Type: Hermetic. 2. Mounting: Spring or rubber. 3. Protection: a) Over temperature. b) Over current. c) High pressure. 4. Crankcase Heater: Required. H. Condenser: 1. Coil: Pressure tested at 425 psig. 2. Fan: a) Type: Propeller. b) Drive: Direct. c) Motor: (1) Permanently lubricated. (2) Weatherproof. d) Balancing: Static and Dynamic 1. Factory supplied. 2. Material: Zinc coated steel. 3. Weather - tight. 4. Shaped to match slope of roof. J. Dampers: 1. Type: Low - leakage, insulated. 2. Leakage Rate: 1.255 at 0.25" per AMCA 575. ICG Seattle CENTRAL "." OFFICE .......,„...-... on<+.+•. ry .+r vn, 15780=4 PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS . '. ti K. Controls: PART 3 - EXECUTION ICG Seattle'CENTRAL OFFICE 1. General: Provide all relays, terminals, contactors and other accessories necessary to interface with controls described in Section 15951. 2. Economizer: a) Operates through room thermostat to use outside air for cooling when possible. b) Modulating damper motors. c) Adjustable minimum position control. d) O.A. damper fails shut. e) Relief damper: Linked to outside air damper. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Provide necessary auxiliary supporting steel. C. Mount motors and drives so belts run true. 3.2 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust drive for speed shown in submittal. B. Check motor amps: 1. Do not overload motor. C. Check for unusual noise or vibration. D. Provide necessary lubrication. E. Coordinate with Test and Balance Technician for refrigerant pressure measurements. 3.3 CURB A. Provide necessary dimensions and details so roof opening and structural steel can be provided at the proper time. B. Coordinate delivery of curb with roofing division so project is not delayed. 15780 -5 '" PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING' UNITS 3.4 SEALING ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Unit and curb. 2. Unit and ducts. 3. Unit and panels. END OF SECTION l: +Y •a C. If factory -built curb will not be delivered in time, provide shop - fabricated curb. 1. Shape curb to match slope of roof. 2. Submit details to Architect/Engineer for approval before fabrication. A. To provide a weatherproof installation, seal all joints including, but not limited to those between: 15780 -6'.' ` PACKAGED AIR "CONDITIONING- UNIT PART 1 - GENERAL (UNITS UNDER THIS SECTION TO BE PROVIDED BY Owner) 1.1 FLAME -SMOKE RATINGS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide air - handling unit thermal insulation with flame - spread rating of 25 or less, fuel- contributed of 50 or less, and smoke - developed rating of 50 or less. i.. 1.2 ARI CERTIFICATION A. Provide equipment rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210, and bearing ARI certification label. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data, including: 1. Capacity. !_ 2. Drawings showing overall dimensions of complete assembly. 3. Operating weights. 4. Equipment support requirements. 5. Sizes and locations of connections. 6. Accessories. 7. Auxiliary support requirements. 1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. Manufacturers: B. General: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE. ....... . .. 1. Design Basis: Data Aire. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Liebert. 1. The equipment environmental control units shall be self - contained, factory assembled. 2. Units shall meet UL standards, and shall be in compliance with NEC and local building department authorities. 15785 -1 SWITCH AND COLOCATION " ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 2.2 INDOOR, AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. Enclosure: B. Filters: C. Evaporator Fan: ICG Seattle CENTRAL 'OFFICE 1. Type: Throw -away. 2. Manufacturer and Model: a) Farr, 30/30. b) AAF, Amair. 3. Thickness: Four inch. 3. Manufacturer to provide maintenance for entire system for a period of (1) year from date of acceptance. This should include bi- monthly visits of 3.5 hours minimum to perform all preventative maintenance items as recommended by the equipment manufacturer, including replacement of filters, cleaning of humidifier, and parts as required. Manufacturer to provide 4 hours of training for the Owner's Representative, followed by an additional 2 hours of follow -up training within the first year. 1. Material: ' Steel, zinc coated. 14 gauge heli -arc welded tubular steel. 2. Finish: a) Baked enamel. b) Color selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Insulation: a) Material: Fiberglass, 1 '/2 lb density. b) Thickness: One inch. c) Protection: Mat or foil faced. 4. Air Delivery: 9000 cfm each 5. Door and Access Panels: 18 gauge galvanized steel with Polyurethane gaskets, hinges to allow removal of panels and conceal fastening device. 1. Type: Forward curve double inlet, double width, centrifugal fan on steel shaft. 2. Drive: Adjustable V -belt with cast iron or steel sheaves, minimum of 2 matched belts. 3. Bearings: Self - aligning, 100,000 hour. 4. Balancing: Static and dynamic. 5. Meter: 1750 RPM ODP: Permanently lubricated ball bearings with built - in current and overload protection. 15785 -2 SWITCH AND COLOCATION ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT if D. Humidifier: E. Reheat: F. Compressors: G. Refrigeration System: I. Controls: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE _ _ .... 1. Type: Nortec Steam generated, infrared high intensity quartz, or Ultrasonic. 2. Water Container: Plastic. 3. Capacity Control: Self - regulating. 4. Water Supply: Tap water. 5. Safety Control: Audible and visual alarm. 1. Type: Electric. 2. Construction: Fin tubular. 3. Safety Controls: Thermal safety switches. 4. Stages: Three, equal. 1. Type: Semi - hermetic. 2. Quantity: Two, each one -half total capacity. 3. Mounting: Vibration isolators. 4. Protection: a) Over - temperature. b) Over - current. c) High pressure. 1. Each refrigeration circuit shall include hot gas mufflers, liquid line filter dryers, refrigerant sight glass with moisture indicator; adjustable, external equalized expansion valves, and liquid line solenoid valves. H. Condensers: 1. Type: Counter -flow. 2. Construction: Shell and tube, removable heads. 3. Certification: ASME, 400 psig at 300 °F maximum operating condition. 1. Manufacturer's standard, factory - wired. 15785 -3 SWITCH AND COLOCATION "'ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT J. Accessories: 1. Condensate Pump: a) Packaged unit. b) Automatic control. 2. Floor stand: a) Adjustable height. 3. Liqui- tect/Liqui- tector: a) Solid state water sensor and alarm. Two liqui -tect sensors. 4. Disconnect: a) Non - locking. 5. Four year extended compressor warranty. K. Control: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. The control system shall allow programming of the following room conditions: a) Temperature Setpoint (65- 85 °F). b) Temperature Sensitivity d °F in 0.1 °F increments). c) Humidity Setpoint (40 -60% RH). d) Humidity Sensitivity (± 1 - ± 10% RH in 0.1% increments). e) All setpoints shall be adjustable from the individual unit front monitor panel or a site monitoring device. fj Temperature and Humidity Sensors shall be capable of being calibrated using the front monitor panel controls to coordinate with other temperature and humidity sensors in the room. g) The control system shall also be capable of predictive control of temperature and humidity. h) Temperature Anticipation. The microprocessor shall have the capability of responding to varying rates of temperature change in the computer room. The control system shall delay heating or cooling in response to rapid temperature changes. i) Predictive Humidity Control. The microprocessor shall calculate the moisture content in the room and prevent unnecessary humidification cycle by responding to changes in dewpoint temperature. 2. In addition the system shall provide the following internal controls: a) Compressor Short Cycle Control. b) Automatic Compressor Sequencing. The microprocessor shall automatically change the lead/lag sequence of the compressors after each start to lengthen compressor -on cycles and even compressor wear. 15785 -4 SWITCH AND COLOCATION -- ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT c) System Auto - Restart. For start-up after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart with a programmable (up to 10 minutes) time delay. d) Sequential Load Activation during start-up, or after power failure, the microprocessor shall sequence operational load activation to minimize inrush current systems allowing multiple loads to start simultaneously are unacceptable. 3. Control Panels: a) The microprocessor shall provide a local monitor panel to display operation status alarms and permit calibration and programming of operation parameters. All indicators shall be in language form. No symbols or codes shall be acceptable. b) Provide a lead/lag control to provide the following sequence of operation: (1) Lead AC unit operates according to unit's integral control system. Lead AC unit is selected by switch on panel face, indicator lights on panel face indicate which unit is in operation. (2) If lead unit should not be able to keep up with system demand and space temperature rises above setpoint (72 °F adjustable), lag unit will start automatically, unit failure alarm can be silenced by pressing the alarm silence switch on panel face. Both units will remain in operation until reset by pressing the system reset switch on panel face. (3) If lead or lag unit should fail, both units will start automatically, unit failure light on panel face will illuminate, and alarm will sound. Alarm can be silenced by pressing the alarm silence switch on panel face. System can be reset by pressing the system reset switch on panel face. 4. Alarms: ICG Seattle CENTRAL 'OFFICE °' The microprocessor shall activate an audible and visual alarm in event of any of the following conditions: a) High Temperature b) Low Temperature c) High Humidity d) Low Humidity e) High Compressor Head Pressure f) Humidifier Problem g) Loss of Air Flow h) Audible Alarm. The audible alarm shall have adjustable volume to match the surrounding ambient sound level. 15785 -5 SWITCH AND COLOCATION ROOM AIR CONDITIONING • UNIT C. Fans: J) 2.3 OUTDOOR CONDENSER A. Housing: 1. Material: Aluminum. B. Coils: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE . ...... Common Alarm. A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface selected alarms with the DDC System provided under Division 15950. The microprocessor shall provide the capability of maintaining a log of system perfonnance and environmental conditions. The following information shall be included in the log, complete with time and date: (1) Temperature (present, minimum and maximum for last 24 hours). (2) Humidity (present, minimum and maximum for last 24 hours). (3) Compressor Operating Hours. (4) Alarm Occurrence. (5) Diagnostics. All electronic circuitry shall be provided with self- diagnostics in trouble shooting. Each printed circuit board shall be diagnosed reported as pass /not pass. (6) Communications. The microprocessor shall be compatible with all remote monitoring control devices. Provide the following equipment and accessories with the computer room environmental units. Accessories shall be factory installed and prewired for connection by the contractor. • Under floor water sensor - activates visual alarm. • 18" floorstand. 1. Material: a) Tubes: Copper. b) Fins: Aluminum. 1. Type: Propeller. 2. Drive; Direct. 3. Air flow: Up discharge. 15785 -6 SWITCH AND COLOCATION ' ' ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT L L PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Provide necessary auxiliary supporting steel. 3.2 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust drive for speed shown in submittal. B. Mount motors and drives so belts run true. C. Check motor amps. 1. Do not overload motor. D. Check for unusual noise or vibration and correct as necessary. E. Provide necessary lubrication. ICG Seattle CENTRAL " OFFICE END OF SECTION 15785 -7 SWITCH AND COLOCATION 'ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT.' C.. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide fans with AMCA performance certification and label. B. Grease exhaust fan shall comply with NFPA 96 and be UL listed. 1.2 MOTOR HORSEPOWER A. Do not increase or decrease motor horsepower from that specified without written approval from Architect/Engineer. See Section 15001 /16001. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including: 1. Performance 2. Size 3. Type 4. Options provided 5. Fan curves PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS, CENTRIFUGAL A. Manufacturers: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Design Basis: Cook 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Aerovent b) Ammerman c) Carnes d) Acme e) Greenheck f) Hurricane g) Jenn Air h) Penn i) Powerline j) Ilg ,. rtLrvY., nfst++ }... rnA �+ ser.+- fv�rirv; eaxf. rc.+ twbeMevcvinwv.✓ m:+•vwev +•.n ................... 15870 -1 B. Features: C. General: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 NOISE AND VIBRATION B. Insure that flexible duct connections are properly made. C. Check fan for improper balance. 1. Have fan re- balanced if necessary. D. Check for proper rotation. E. Check for unusual noise or vibration and correct as necessary. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Spun aluminum housing. 2. Internal rubber vibration isolators. 3. Ball bearings. 15870 -2 1. Provide: a) Bird screen. b) Gravity back -draft damper: (1) 0.2 inches WC max. pd. c) Motorized type backdraft damper where indicated. D. Roof Curb: 1. Provide factory fabricated roof curb of height required by local authorities. E. Sound Criteria: 1. Required sound levels may be attained by use of sound attenuating curbs. 2. Fan shall have specified capacity with curb in place. 3. Curb pressure drop is not included in specified ratings. A. Insure that fans are properly supported on vibration isolators. Reference Section 15240 for Vibration Isolation Requirements. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 3.2 ACCESS A. Provide for proper access to all parts of fan needing inspection or service with access doors in fan or ductwork. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Provide necessary auxiliary supporting steel. C. Mount motor and drives so belts run true. D. Provide necessary lubrication. E. Provide flexible duct connections on inlet and discharge. 3.4 CURBS A. Provide necessary dimensions and details so roof opening can be provided at the proper time. B. Coordinate delivery of curb with roofing contractor so project is not delayed. C. Provide a weatherproof installation: 1. Seal all joints including, but not limited to: a. Unit and curb. b. Unit and ducts. END OF SECTION L PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for: 1. Duct lining. 2. Duct lining adhesive. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS 1CG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE to ASTM A366 or A619. 1 2.2 RECTANGULAR DUCT 15890 -1 A. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association) recommendations for fabrication, construction and details, and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. B. Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), except as otherwise indicated. C. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" for testing of duct systems. 1. Transition elbows. 2. Seal and reinforcing schedule for all ductwork fabrication types. 3. Turning vane and turning vane installation. I .0 L B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data on the following: A. All interior ducts shall be constructed with 0-60 or better galvanized steel (ASTM 527) LFQ, chem treat. Exterior ductwork or duct exposed to high humidity conditions (i.e. kitchen exhausts) shall be G -90 or better galvanized steel LFP, chem treat. B. Ungalvanized carbon steel shall be lockforming grade, hot rolled steel conforming A. Construct rectangular ductwork to meet all functional criteria defined in Section VII, of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" DUCTWORK 1985 Edition. All ductwork must comply with all local, state and federal code requirements. B. Where the standard allows the choice of external reinforcing or internal tie rods, only the external reinforcing options shall be used. C. Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. All longitudinal seams will be sealed with mastic sealant. Snaplock is not acceptable. D. Ductmate or W.D.C.I. proprietary duct connection systems will be accepted. Duct constructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturers guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements. E. Formed on flanges (T.D.C./T.D.F./T- 25A/T -25B) will be accepted. Formed on flanges will be constructed as SMACNA T -25 flanges, whose limits are defined on Page 1.36 1995 SMACNA Manual, First Edition. No other construction pertaining to formed on flanges, will be accepted. Formed on flanges shall be accepted for use on ductwork 42" wide or less 2" static positive or less and must include the use of comers, bolts and cleat. (Over 42 ", the reinforcement/joint deflection criteria no longer conform with the UMC). F. Ductmate type systems that use a butyl Rubber Gasket which meets Mil -C 18969B, Type II Class B, TT -C -1796 A, Type II Class B, and TTS -S- 001657 must also pass UL -723. This material, in addition to the above, shall not contain vegetable oils, fish oils, or any other type vehicle that will support fungal and/or bacterial growth (as defined in 21CFR 177, 1210 closures with sealing gaskets for food containers). G. Fittings shall be constructed and reinforced as ductwork according to the longest span. 2.3 ROUND AND OVAL DUCT A. Round and oval duct shall be galvanized steel, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible ", except as noted. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Lighter gauge factory made duct with an Intermediate standing rod may be used. Submit product data sustaining the equivalency of such duct into SMACNA standard duct. B. Minimum duct gauge shall be 26 gauge. C. All round ducts shall be spiral lock seam. Longitudinal seam duct is not acceptable. 15890 -2 DUCTWORK 7• 2.4 ROUND AND OVAL DUCT A. Construction: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Galvanized steel spiral lock formed. 2. Elbows: a) 6" Diameter and Less: Die formed. b) Above 6" Diameter: 5 piece. 15890 -3 D. Round ductwork shall be spiral lock seam construction only. Gauges shall be in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standard and fittings in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standard, except as noted: 1. Joints 0 " -20" diameter, interior slip coupling beaded at center, fastened to duct with sealing compound applied continuously around joint before assembling and after fastening. Wrap joints with 3 inch wide duct tape. 2. Joints 21 " -72" diameter, use 3 piece, gasketed, flanged joints consisting of 2 internal flanges (with integral mastic sealant) split to accommodate minor differences in duct diameter, and one external closure band designed to compress gasketing between internal flanges. Example: Ductmate Spiralmate or equal. E. Fittings shall be continuously welded, standing seam, or spot welded and sealed. Metal thickness and reinforcing shall be equivalent to the requirements of the largest span. 1. All elbows greater than 45" shall be radius type, R =1.5 times duct diameter. 2. Elbows less than 12" shall be of die stamped construction. Elbows 12" or greater shall be 5 -gore construction. 3. Diverging and converging flow fittings shall be constructed with no excess material projecting from the body into the branch tap entrance. All such fittings shall be 45° "shoe" entrance, wye plus elbow, or 45° lateral branch. Special fittings such as heel tapped elbows and bullhead tees may be used only where shown on drawings. Adjustable elbows and straight saddle taps shall not be used. Low pressure adjustable elbows acceptable. 2.5 CONTRACTOR FABRICATED CASINGS AND PLENUMS A. Unless required otherwise by drawings, single wall casings and plenums may either be contractor or factory fabricated where shown on drawings. All double wall casings and plenums shall be factory fabricated. B. Casings and plenums shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" and as specified below. DUCTWORK C. All casings and plenums on the suction side of any fan, including return air outside air, or mixing plenum shall be constructed to 2" negative pressure class. D. Louver blank -off panels shall be constructed to 2" negative pressure class. E. All casings and plenums for relief and exhaust air shall be 2" positive or negative pressure class. F. All casings and plenums on the discharge side of supply fans shall be 4" positive pressure class. G. Single wall plenums shall be of the standing seam type construction. Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions, support details, corner & edge details, penetration details, equipment installation details, and pressure class. H. Seal all seams, edges, and corners with approved duct sealant. I. Casing materials shall be the same as that for the connected duct systems. J. Where automatic dampers may, completely shut off air flow and subject plenum of casing to fan close off pressure, install pressure relief panels, rated to open at 125 %. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of the types an sizes indicated, and where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. B. Double wall turning vanes shall be Harper double wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. Tab spacing shall be SMACNA standard. Rail systems with non - standard tab spacings shall not be accepted. All tabs shall be used, do not skip tabs. Mounting rails shall have friction insert table which align the vanes automatically. Vanes shall be subjected to tensile loading and be capable of supporting 250 lbs. when fastened per the manufacturers instructions. Approved Systems: Ductmate PRO -Rail. C. Single wall spliter and turning vanes shall be custom fabricated as specified below. 1. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15890 -4 DUCTWORK 1 (. E. Duct Liner Adhesive: 2.7 FABRICATION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Manufacturers: a) Design Basis: Childers b) Other Acceptable Manufacturers: (1) King (2) Hardcast 2. Model: a) Indoor /Outdoor: CP -127 Chil -Quik F. Duct Sealant: 15890 -5 1. Manufacturers: a) Design Basis: United McGill b) Other Acceptable Manufacturers: (1) Ductmate (2) 3M (3) Precision 2. Model: a) Indoor: United Duct Sealer 3. Description: Non - hardening, liquid or mastic elastic sealant. 4. Fire Rating: UL 289U listed and NFC 220(b). G. Fiberglass ductboard is not accepted without prior written approval from the specifier. H. Access doors shall be hinged or Ductmate Sandwich Type Access Doors manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Inc. Doors shall be sizes as shown. E. Construct rectangular ductwork to meet all functional criteria defined in Section VII, of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" 1985 Edition. This shall be subsequently referred to as the SMACNA Manual. All ductwork must comply with all local, state and federal code requirements. F. See air handler and fan schedules for external pressure requirements. All pressures above 2" esp. shall be medium pressure. G. All low pressure ductwork is to be constructed for 2" W.C. positive and 1" negative static pressure and 2000 FPM. H. All negative pressure ductwork shall be constructed for 2" W.C. negative and 2" W.C. positive static pressure and 2000 FPM velocity. DUCTWORK I. Make all changes in direction using 1.5 radius elbows where possible. Use splitter vanes or mitered rectangular elbows with turning vanes otherwise. 1. Use single thickness splitter vanes for all radius elbows less than 1.5 D =r. a) D = diameter of duct or width of duct (in plane of change -in- direction). b) r = radius of duct at duct center -line. c) Use "Curve Ratios" of 0.45 or greater (as defined by figure 3 -7 of the 1989 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook). 2. Use single thickness turning vanes with trailing edges in accordance with figure 3 -8 of the 1989 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook: a) All mitered, rectangular elbows in series. b) All mitered, rectangular elbows less than 25" in width (in plane of change -of- direction). 3. Use double width, airfoil type turning vanes at contractor's option for all, isolated, mitered, rectangular elbows greater than 24" in width (in plane of change -of- direction). a) Isolated elbows have a minimum of 3D straight duct upstream and downstream of the change -in- direction. J. Fabricate transition elbows with turning vanes at correct angle so entering and leaving edges are parallel or tangent to air flow. K. All branch duct take -offs shall use 45° laterals or 45° "pants -leg" type fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry.practices which will achieve air -tight and noiseless systems, capable of performing each indicated service. B. Install each run with a minimum of joints. C. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. D. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of the type which will hold ducts true -to -shape to prevent buckling. E. Seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA requirements for pressure class indicated. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15890 -6 DUCTWORK F. 1 .. 1 A. Cleaning: i ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Indoor Ducts: Use liquid or mastic sealant, or tape system. 2. Approved manufactured joining systems with gaskets may be used in lieu of transverse sealing. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. G. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent - enclosure elements of the building. 1. Limit clearance to 0.5" where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. 2. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1.0" clearance outside of insulation. H. Coordinate the layout with lighting layouts and similar finished work. I. Install access doors where necessary for inspection and maintenance. 1. Provide additional 12" x 12" access door at each low leakage damper. 2. Arrange access doors so that: a. They open against the system air pressure wherever feasible. b. Their latches are operable from either side, except where the duct is too small to be entered. 1 J. Where ducts pass through non -fire -rated interior partitions below ceiling and exterior walls: 1 1 K. Provide volume dampers at branch take -offs. 1. Conceal the space between the construction opening and the duct or duct - plus- insulation with sheet metal flanges of the same gauge as the duct. 2. Overlap the opening on all sides by at least 1-1%2". L. Where space permits, round or oval ductwork of equivalent diameter may be substituted for unlined rectangular ductwork. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 1. Clean ductwork internally, of dust or debris, unit -by -unit as it is installed. 2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosion of metal of deterioration of paint. 15890 -7 DUCTWORK B. Protection: 1CG Seattle CENTRAL • OFFICE 1. Store duct a minimum of 4" above ground or floor to avoid damage from weather or spills. 2. Cover all stored ducts to protect from moisture or debris. 3. Cover all ends of installed ductwork at the end of each workday or when dust and debris producing construction (such as fire proofing, drywall, sanding, or core drilling) is occurring. C. Ductwork contaminated or damaged above "shop" or "mill" conditions shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced to the Engineer's satisfaction. 1. Ductliner pre - installed in stored duct which has become wet may be installed if first allowed to completely dry out. 2. Ductliner in installed ductwork which has become wet must be completely removed and replaced. 3. Torn ductliner may be repaired by coating with adhesive if damage is minor and isolated. Extensively damaged liner shall be replaced back to a straight cut joint. 3.3 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTING A. All transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall conform to SMACNA's Class A sealing requirements as defined on page 1 -6 of the 1985 SMACNA Manual, First Edition. B. Constant Volume Systems /Supply Ductwork Allowable Leakage C. Constant Volume Systems/Return Ductwork Allowable Leakage 3.4 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTING 1% of design cfm 2% of design cfm A. Installed ductwork shall be tested prior to installation of access doors, take -offs, etc. B. All leak testing shall be witnessed by the General Contractor or representative of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer 72 hours notice prior to testing. Any testing not witnessed by the Engineer or his/her representative, shall be considered invalid and will be redone. 15890-8 .: DUCTWORK: 71 if 1 C. The testing shall be performed as follows: NOTE: It is recommended that the first 100' -300' of ductwork installed be tested to insure the quality of the workmanship at an early stage. 3.5 DUCTWORK STORAGE AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: B. Protection: C. Ductwork contaminated or damaged above "shop" or "mill" conditions shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced to the Engineer's satisfaction. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Perform testing in accordance with HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 2. Use a certified orifice tube for measuring the leakage. 3. Define section of system to be tested and blank off. 4. Determine the percentage of the system being tested. 5. Using the percentage, determine the allowable leakage (cfin) for that section being tested. 6. Pressurize to operating pressure and repair any significant or audible leaks. 7. Repressurize and measure leakage. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the leakage measured is less than the allowable defined in step 5. 1. Clean ductwork internally, unit -by -unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. 2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of paint. 1. Store duct a minimum of 4" above ground or floor to avoid damage from weather or spills. 2. Cover all stored ducts to protect from moisture or debris. 3. Cover all ends of installed ductwork at the end of each workday or when dust and debris producing construction (such as fire proofing, drywall, sanding, or core drilling) is occurring. END OF SECTION 15890 -9 DUCTWORK 1 r r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1. Flexible duct 2. Ceiling dampers B. Construction: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE GUIDELINES 1. Design Basis: Flexmaster Type 5 2. Other acceptable manufacturers: a) Wiremold WCK b) Genlex SFR -25A c) American/Elgin PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE DUCT, LOW PRESSURE, COMMERCIAL A. Manufacturers: A. Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association) recommendations for fabrication, construction and details, and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data on the following: 1. Solid inner liner formed by reinforced aluminum laminate material mechanically locked or bonded together by.a corrosive resistant galvanized steel helix. 2. Insulation: Minimum 1 -Y2" thick fiberglass blanket with a polyethylene vapor barrier. Map 0.23 `c' factor, factory installed. C. Pressure rating: 6" w.g. positive, 1" w.g. negative at maximum 180 °F operating temperature. D. Standards: NFPA90A UL -181, Class I, ASTM E -96 - Procedure A. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES A. Duct Access Doors: Provide duct access doors with gaskets, and with insulation where ductwork is indicated to be insulated. 15910 -1 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE GUIDELINES 1. Manufacturer: a) Design Basis: Cesco b) Model: HAD hinged 2. Other acceptable manufacturers: a) Flexmaster b) Milcor c) Elmdor B. Flexible Connectors: Fireproof glass cloth, Vent -Fab or approved equal. 1. Manufacturers: a) Design Basis: Vent -Fab b) Other Acceptable Manufacturers: (1) Duro -Dyne 2. Material: Fireproof glass cloth 2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Construction: 1. Frame: Extruded aluminum. 2. Blades: Formed aluminum with extruded vinyl edge seals. 3. Bearings: Synthetic B. Performance: 12 cfin per square foot at 1 /2" W.G. 2.4 BALANCING DAMPERS A. Construction: 1. Frame: 16 gauge galvanized steel. 2. Blades: 16 gauge galvanized steel with vinyl edge seals. 3. Bearings: Heavy duty nylon. 4. Performance: a) Maximum pressure drop in full open position ( @3000 fpm): 0.55 b) Maximum leakage: 32 cfin/sp at 4" W.C. B. Type: Rectangular balancing dampers are to be opposed blade type with locking handle, unless otherwise noted. " "15910 -2" DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES" 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Install ceiling dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install access doors where necessary for inspection i ary and maintenance. { . 1. Provide additional 12" x 12" access door at each low leakage damper. 2. Arrange access doors so that: I . a. They open against the system air pressure, wherever feasible. b. Their latches are operable from either side, except where the duct is too small to be entered. I_ c. Install flexible connectors at all duct connections to rotating or reciprocating machinery or equipment. C. Notify fire alarm provider of smoke damper control requirements and fire alarm interlocks. 1 D. Install flexible ductwork without tight bends and free of kinks. 1. Flexible ductwork shall not be less than 6', nor exceed 16' in length. 2. Flexible ductwork shall be installed with a "minimum length of straight duct" upstream of the diffuser neck inlet. "A minimum length" shall mean I. a length equal to three (3) duct diameters. "Straight duct" shall mean the center -line of the duct shall be aligned with a line perpendicular to the plane of the diffuser neck opening at the center point of the opening. r 3. Conform to the detail on the drawings. E. Install all dampers, including those furnished by Section 15950 Contractor. 1CG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE GUIDELINES 1. Caulk damper frames to ductwork. 2. Make sure dampers are free to operate properly. 3. Install parallel blade mixing dampers to two streams impinge on each other to facilitate mixing. END OF SECTION 15910 -3 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RESPONSIBILITY A. The Balancing Contractor shall be a sub - contractor, directly working for the General Contractor. B. The Balancing Contractor shall not be a sub - contractor of any other Division 15 Contractor. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification: B. Industry Standards: Comply with the following: C. Registration: Work shall be done under the supervision of a professional engineer registered. Engineer shall be available for all meetings and interpretation of all materials in the report. D. Pre - qualification of TAB Contractor. TCG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Work shall be done by a firm certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), or the firm shall have technicians certified by the "National Training Fund Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Industry". 2. The firm shall be an independent testing and balancing form specializing in testing and balancing of environmental systems. 3. The firm shall have an experience record of not less than five (5) years experience in the TAB industry. 1. HVAC Systems- Testing, Adjusting, Balancing published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). 2. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems published by National Environmental Balancing Bureau. (NEBB). 3. ASHRAE Systems Handbook. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. 1. The firm must have experience and qualifications satisfactory to the consulting mechanical engineer and must be accepted by him prior to bidding. 2. Firms desiring approval to provide work under this section shall submit a booklet indicating procedures and data forms that they would use in the performance of the work. 3. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 15010. 15990 -1 TEST ADJUST BALANCE " . " . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Sequence work to commence after completion of system and start-up procedures and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. B. Examine the installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. C. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the test - adjust - balance work. D. Adjust flows to within 10% of values shown. If design flows cannot be obtained within specified limits the Balancing Contractor will perform the following (at the minimum): E. Optimization. F. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in a manner recommended by the original Installer. ICG Seattle CENTRAL • OFFICE 4. Only firms which have been approved by the mechanical engineer prior to bid date may provide work under this section. 1. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Provide Engineer /Architect with a copy of the notification. 1. Measure and record major pressure drops in the system. 2. Consult with the Engineer and Installer as required. 3. Upon receiving written directions to proceed and after any corrections are performed, re- balance affected portion of system. 1. Establish the minimum air static pressure or water differential pressure for variable or bypass flow system. 2. Establish the position of minimum outside air dampers, damper /valve and sequencing relays. 15990-2' • TEST - ADJUST - BALANCE 1 G. Make all final readings for each system at the same time, and after all adjustments have been made. 1 H. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of test - adjust- balance work. 1 1. Mark with paint or other suitable permanent identification material. I. Check all new thermal overloads. 3.2 AIR SYSTEMS 1 A. Scope: All air systems are to be balanced. 1 . B. Before any adjustments are made, check for: 1. Dirty filters, coils, or air intakes 2. Duct leakage 3. Filter leakage 4. Damper leakage, or blockage ' 5. Equipment vibrations 6. Correct damper operation 1 C. Simulate a pressure drop across filters equal to that when 50% loaded with dust. 1 D. Procedure: 1 ICG'Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Identify improperly protected equipment in report. 1. Check fan motor amps with clean filters and simulated loaded filters, and report. 1. Measure and report all supply, return, exhaust, and outside air systems by means of (4) four methods: a. Individual air inlets and outlets. b. Pitot traverses of main supply, return, exhaust and outside air ducts. c. Rotating valve or velocity grid traverse of coils or filters. d. Plot operating point on fan curve. Include compensation for effects of altitude and inlet vanes. 2. Above measurements shall be made with system in normal, full load condition. 3. Make main duct traverses or coil /filter traverses and report operation at all other operating conditions (as applicable). 4. Set fan speed such that under no condition will the motor exceed the service factor rating when operating in any of the above possible modes. 15990 -3 TEST-ADJUST-BALANCE H. Set minimum outside air quantities. I. 3.3 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 5. Measure fan motor amps in each of the above possible operating modes (clean filters). E. Adjust Air Systems to provided proper air pressure relationships as shown by relative air quantities or as indicated on the drawings. F. Adjust distribution system for uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise within the capabilities of the system. G. Exchange sheaves and belts as required to adjust the rpm of all fans so they handle specified air quantity. A. Measure, adjust and report the following: 1. Fans: a. Inlet and outlet pressure b. Air flow c. Fan speed d. Motor amps and KW 2. Ductwork Systems: a. Air flow at each inlet and outlet. b. Filter pressure drop. c. Outside air percentage at minimum and maximum setting. d. Air flow at supply, return, outside air and exhaust mains to determine total air flow. 3. Coils: a. Air flow. b. Inlet and outlet air static pressure. c. Inlet and outlet air temperature. d. Inlet and outlet wet bulb temperature on cooling and evaporative dry bulb readings must be simultaneously measured coils. e. Kw draw on electric coils. 4. Domestic Hot Water System: Check at full fire. a. Inlet and outlet water temperatures b. Water flow 5. Air- Cooled Condensing Units: a. Ambient temperature b. Suction and discharge pressure c. Oil pressure 15990 -4 TEST- ADJUST - BALANCE" : o 3.4 REPORT d. Compressor amps and KW e. Fan amps and KW 6. Packaged Air Conditioning Units: a. Perform tests for individual components present in units in accordance with specific requirements above. b. At full heat: (Check at minimum outside air): (1) EAT (2) LAT c. At full cooling: (Check at minimum outside air): (1) EAT (DB/WB) (2) LAT (DB /WB) (3) Ambient temperature (4) Suction and discharge pressures (5) Oil pressure (6) Compressor amps and KW A. Provide a general information sheet listing: 1. Instruments used: a. Most recent calibration date. 2. Method of balancing. 3. Altitude correction. 4. Manufacturer's performance data for all air devices used. B. Provide data sheets for all equipment, including motors and drives, listing: 1. Make 2. Size 3. Serial number 4. Capacity Rating 5. Amperage 6. Voltage input 7. Thermal heater size for each motor 8. Operating speed of driver and driven devices 9. Any additional pertinent performance data C. Include design and final values for all items listed in Detailed Requirements, and totals for each system. D. Provide data sheets showing: 1. Air flow at each inlet and outlet 2. Instrument used ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15990 -5 TEST- ADJUST-BALANCE 3. Velocity reading 4. Manufacturer's free area factors 3.5 COMMISSIONING A. Reference Section 15995 for commissioning scope. ". ICG"Seattle CENTRAL , • OFFICE END OF SECTION E. Provide recap sheet with explanation for each device not meeting specified performance. F. Provide a set of prints with equipment, inlets and outlets marked to correspond to . data sheets. B. Provide all necessary personnel, tools and equipment to comply with the commissioning scope. 1 t. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions and j Section 15010 apply to all work specified in this section. B. Refer to Specification Section 15990, title "Test and Balance" for interface requirements with test and balance contractor. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This specification covers the start -up, operating performance test and 1 . commissioning of the HVAC systems. The purpose of this effort is to bring the project mechanical systems to a state of dynamic operation in accordance with the contract documents by verifying the operation of individual components, subsystems and systems. B. The Owner will retain the services of an independent commissioning agent (CA) separate from the work of this Contract. As herein specified the Owner and CA shall develop detailed commissioning procedures, equipment checkout procedures and data forms for recording compliance with contract documents, performance �._ and punchlist deficiencies, and will assist in developing schedules for checkout and Owner acceptance, at a future date during the construction phase. C. The Division 15 Mechanical Contractor and the General Contractor shall include as part of the work of this contract, labor and material to provide manpower, equipment, tools, ladders, instruments, etc. necessary to accomplish the work and labor and material for execution, monitoring and printing data forms necessary to verify and record system observations. D. The Test and Balance Contractors shall include as part of the work of this contract, labor and material to provide manpower, equipment, tools, ladders, instruments, etc. necessary to execute and accomplish the work. E. At the completion of the start-up, operations performance test and test and balance, the Contractor shall conduct a 72 hour dynamic mode demonstration of the systems in the presence of the Owner /Architect/Engineer and CA. 1.3 COMMISSIONED EQUIPMENT A. Air Conditioning Units B. Condenser Units ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15995 -1 BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 1.4 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS A. Air Conditioning Units B. Condenser Units PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, LABOR, INSTRUMENTS, TOOLS, LADDERS AND APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, instruments, tools, ladders and apparatus necessary to start -up, perform operating performance test and systems conditioning. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the commissioning documentation until final acceptance of the project. The checklists in appendix one are samples for bidding purposes. Final checklists will be produced by the CA and provided prior to beginning commissioning. The commissioning documentation shall be kept current by the Contractor and shall be available for inspection at all times. At the time of acceptance of the project, the Contractor shall surrender 3 completed copies of the commissioning documentation to the Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 START -UP AND OPERATING PERFORMANCE TEST A. Before request for contract compliance inspection and system commissioning all equipment, components, and systems shall be started -up, adjusted, calibrated; set, test and check all electric disconnect, fuses, circuit breakers, valves, dampers, temperatures and pressures of all systems for proper operation and performance. After completion of the start -up and operating performance test, the Contractor will notify the Owner in writing that the system is ready for commissioning. B. Information, date, etc. from start -up and operating performance test may be utilized, as appropriate, to execute preliminary commissioning documentation, however, certification of equipment and systems for the preliminary commissioning phase shall be completed in accordance with paragraph 3.2 of this section of the specifications. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 15995 -2 BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING C. Start-up and operating performance test documentation shall include the following: 3.2 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING A. All systems, components, equipment, etc. furnished as part of this Contract shall be subject# d to system commissioning as hereinafter specified. All system::, components, equipment, etc. commissioned in this section of the Specifications shall be evaluated based on the sequences of control/operation, performance characteristics, and equipment schedules, etc. as specified in other sections of the Specifications and as shown on the contract drawings. Systems, components, equipment, etc. that does not have specified operating sequence, etc. shall be operated and evaluated based on its use and function for this project. B. Commissioning Documentation: The Contractor shall maintain the commissioning documentation in 3 -ring binders. The commissioning documentation shall be organized by system when practicable. All pages shall be numbered and a table of contents page shall be provided. The commissioning documentation shall include, but not be limited to, the following: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Air Conditioning Unit Systems: a. Coil entering and leaving air temperature. b. Space temperatures at thermostats or sensors. c. Total fan air CFM. d. Selected air flow readings at major branch ducts and grilles. e. Fan speed. f. Fan total static pressure. 2. Exhaust Fans: a. Total fan CFM. b. Fan speed. c. Fan total static pressure. 3. Electric Motors: a. Full load amperes and voltage. b. Starter heater size and rated amperage range for heater installed. c. Measure running current, after adjustment of system to deliver rated performance. 4. Controls: a. Operational setting of controllers and instruments. b. Positioning and function of valves and dampers. c. Interlock and operation of systems (HVAC and Fire) 5. Refrigeration System: a. Compressor safety and operating controls. b. Capacity reduction controls. 15995 -3 BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE' 1. Design Criteria provided by the A/E. 2. Approved Test and Balance Report for the system or component being commissioned, provided by Test and Balance Contractor. 3. Approved submittals for all equipment to be commissioned, provided by Mechanical Contractor. 4. All approved shop drawings of equipment to be commissioned. Shop drawings shall be full size sheets folded as required to fit in binders. Provided by Mechanical Contractor. 5. All pre - commissioning checklists initialized by indicated personnel organized by system and subsystem. 6. All functional performance test checklist initialized by indicated personnel organized by systems and subsystems. 7. Three copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals specified in other sections of these specifications shall be reviewed by the CA for completeness and for applicability. The manuals shall be incorporated in the Commissioning Documentation prior to the commencement of the training required in other sections of the specifications. Preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be as specified in other sections of these specifications. C. Shop Drawings and As -Built Drawings and Specifications shall be assembled by the Contractor after completion of the pre - commissioning phase and turned over to the Owner's representative. Changes as a result of subsequent Commissioning procedures will be incorporated (as required) at the conclusion of final Commissioning. D. Commissioning Schedule: 1. Phase 1 - Preliminary Commissioning: All shop drawings, including but not limited to, equipment, controls, test and balance reports, and operation and maintenance manuals, shall be submitted and approved by the CA. In addition, all pre - commissioning checklists shall be completed (initialed by all parties). 2. Phase 2 - Functional Performance Testing shall be performed as indicated on the Functional Performance Test Checklists. Functional Performance Testing shall not begin until Phase 1 of the commissioning process is complete. Owner's operation and maintenance personnel shall observe the function performance testing. The Contractor may perform initial system familiarization and training of Owner's operating and maintenance personnel required under other sections of the Specification during the functional performance testing. 3. Functional Performance Test Notification: The Contractor shall notify the CA 2 weeks before functional performance testing is to begin. 4. Phase 3 - System training and operating instructions shall be conducted by the Contractor as indicated in the specifications of each item of equipment. 15995 -4 BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 1' 1. w 1 i i 1 i (,. The Contractor shall be responsible for specified training and operating instructions being observed by the CA. E. Pre - Commissioning Checklists: 1. Pre - Commissioning Checklists shall be developed by the CA and shall be executed and certified prior to the commencement of functional performance testing. The indicated initial is required in each location for all items, except where an "X" is shown indicating an initial is not required. See initials legend below for required initials. The pre - commissioning checklist will not be accepted as complete until all items have been initialed signifying this portion of the project is ready for Functional Performance Testing. The Contractor shall provide the Ca with the completed Pre - Commissioning Checklists for his review an d initials. The CA shall be the last person to initial each checklist item. The Contractor shall submit for approval a list of all contractor and subcontractor representatives responsible for the completion of the pre - commissioning checklist phase of the project. This list of representatives shall be submitted 2 weeks prior to commencement of any pre - commissioning activities of any systems or equipment. Representatives may be replaced only after written approval from the CA. 2. Initials Legend: a. Construction Manager. b. Mechanical Contractor's representative. c. Electrical Contractor's representative. d. Commissioning Agent. e. Balancing Contractor's representative. f. Controls Contractor's representative. 3. Blank Example Pre - Commissioning Checklists are in Appendix, located at the end of this section of the specifications. A separate Pre - Commissioning checklist shall be provided for each system and piece of HVAC equipment to be Commissioned. F. Functional Performance Test Checklist: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Functional performance testing shall be performed by the Contractor as directed by the CA and observed by an commissioning team consisting of the individuals indicated on the Functional Performance Test Checklists. The Contractor shall submit in writing a list of all contractor and subcontractor representatives responsible for the functional performance testing phase of the project. This list of representatives shall be submitted 2 weeks prior to the commencement of functional performance testing of systems and equipment. All representatives shall remain on the commissioning team throughout functional performance testing. Substitutions will not be permitted. Functional performance test checklists 15995 -5 BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING shall be completed in the presence of all commissioning team personnel at the time of the functional performance test. 2. Upon failure of completion of a functional performance test checklist, the Contractor shall provide a written report to the CA listing the deficiencies causing the failure and remedies to correct all deficiencies. After the Contractor has corrected all deficiencies, the entire functional performance test checklist for the item of equipment shall be repeated. If possible, corrections can be accomplished during the functional performance testing of equipment in other non - related systems. In ant case, no system will be accepted until all equipment items in the system have complete functional performance test checklists thereby demonstrating satisfactory performance. 3. Failure to complete 2 functional performance test checklists constitutes failure of Phase 2 of the HVAC Commissioning process. The Contractor shall provide a written report to the CA listing the deficiencies causing all failures and remedies to correct all deficiencies. After correction of all deficiencies, Phase 2 of the HVAC Commissioning process shall be repeated in its entirety. The Contractor shall give the CA 2 weeks notice before repeat functional performance testing is scheduled. Should the first or one subsequent functional performance test fail, the Owner reserves the right to obtain compensation from the Contractor for fees and expenses incurred in conjunction with having to perform more than two (2) functional performance tests. 4. Blank examples functional performance test checklists are in the Appendix 2 located at the end of this section of the specifications. A separate Functional Performance Checklist shall be provided for each system and piece of equipment to be Commissioned. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION TEST A. After completion of system start -up, operating performance test and commissioning, but before Owner acceptance, the Contractor shall conduct a 72 hour dynamic mode demonstration of the systems provided under this Contract. The intent of the 72 hour dynamic test is to verify that the mechanical and electrical equipment will respond as designed to meet the changes that may occur under varying indoor /outdoor conditions including seasonal variations and occupancy loads. B. A detailed procedure and sequence of events shall be developed by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner and CA for review and approval. Procedures and sequence of events should contain as a minimum the following activities: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Hours 1 -4: Bring all systems on line for standard operations and parameters. 15995 -6 BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING i .J a t. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Air Conditioning Systems 2. Glycol Water System 3. Pumping Systems el . :... J�...- itY✓.. rt..:'^.- n* Y• �..:y'A!:t.4:rr /.n.o.r.�•::14�•. 2. Hours 5 -28: Operate all systems under normal parameters and verify proper operation. 3. Hours 29 -52: Validation of systems operation through indoor /outdoor changes to include heating, cooling, ventilation, humidity control, domestic and control systems. 4. Hours 69 -72: Return of systems to normal operation. C. Systems and their associated equipment which are to be included in the dynamic test are all systems and components furnished under this Contract and as a minimum will include, but are not limited to the following: D. Contractor shall notify the Owner and Ca in writing that the project is completed and ready for the demonstration test. Schedule for test will then be established and documented. Initiation of the 72 hours dynamic test will not occur until all systems are balanced, operational and incorporated into the building management and control system. Should the demonstration test fail for any reason, the problems shall be corrected and another demonstration test conducted. Should the first or one subsequent demonstration test fail, the Owner reserves the right to obtain compensation from the Contractor for fees and expenses incurred in conjunction with having to witness more than two (2) 72 hour demonstration tests. E. The attendees of each 72 hour demonstration test shall include representative from the following organizations: 1. General Contractor 2. Mechanical Contractor 3. Electrical Contractor 4. Test and Balance Contractor 5. Building Management and Control System Contractor 6. Architect of Record 7. Mechanical Engineer 8. Electrical Engineer 9. Commissioning Agent 15995 -7 BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING F. During the demonstration test all systems shall operate in the "hands -off' automatic mode in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Changes in operating modes required to simulate load shifting, seasonal changeover, emergency modes, etc. will be accomplished by changing set points and equipment operating status at the BMS central control console as required to observe capacity control and monitoring. Provide a readout of space temperature at each thermostat building relative humidity, building pressurization, chilled water supply and return temperatures and chiller capacity. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION Minor problems are anticipated and the necessary personnel required to correct problems and adjust systems need to be available to insure continuation of the dynamic testing process. Is major problems are encountered, at the discretion of the Owner and CA, the testing will be terminated and rescheduled. The Contractor shall notify any external organizations, which would include but not be limited to, Reedy Creek Energy Services, Reedy Creek Improvement District, AMCS and Fire Department which are nor directly involved in the testing, but might be affected due to interface to insure that alarms do not occur. ;15995 -8 ?: BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM;, COMMISSIONING: PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.4 COMMISSIONING FORMS 1.5 COMMISSIONED EQUIPMENT A. All air conditioning units as scheduled. B. All fans as scheduled. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE A. Refer to section 15995 for commissioning requirements and Division 1 for 1 additional information. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. This Section covers the Scope of Work for the Commissioning Agent (CA) who 1,1 will be hired by the Owner. B. The Commissioning Agent shall oversee the commissioning of the HVAC ( systems as described in Section 15995. The CA shall prepare precommissioning and functional performance test checklists to be used by the Contractor. Prepare and publish a commissioning plan. Witness startup and operational tests of ( equipment and systems. Perform observations of the mechanical systems throughout construction and prepare the final commissioning document. C. The CA shall have authority to direct and schedule test. The CA shall have no authority to direct changes to the systems. I . 1.3 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. The CA shall prepare a plan listing the parties involved with their responsibility, scope, definitions, safety concerns, design criteria, attendance schedules, commissioning schedules, and commissioning manual requirements. A. Review 100% CD's. Provide written summary of how each commissioned item of equipment, should operate include calculations verifying scheduled capacity. B. The CA shall develop forms similar to that in Section 15995 for the Contractors use during the commissioning process. The forms shall become part of the final commissioning manual. Forms shall be provided for each piece of commissioned equipment and system. Any deviations from the design shall be noted and proved by the Owner prior to acceptance. Each form shall be signed by the Contractor, CA and Owner prior to acceptance of a system or piece of equipment. 15996 -1 COMMISSIONING AGENT REQUIREMENTS 1.6 COMMISSIONED SYSTEMS A. All HVAC systems. 1.7 PROJECT OBSERVATIONS A. The CA shall perform observations of the commissioned equipment and systems twice a month at a minimum and more as required to keep pace with construction. The CA shall note progress and any deviations of the construction documents shall be brought to attention of the Contractor and Owner for resolution. The CA will have no authority to direct changes or corrections to the system. Observation reports shall be published to the Owner, Architect and Contractor and shall be part of the final commissioning manual. 1.8 OPERATIONAL AND START - UP TESTS A. The CA shall witness start -up tests and collect documentation of the tests. The CA shall notify the Architect and Contractor of any deviations from the contract documents. Any deviations shall be corrected or accepted by the Owner prior to acceptance. B. After the Contractor has submitted in writing that the systems are completed, the CA shall schedule and direct operational tests of the systems. These tests shall be as described in Section 15950 & 15995. The results shall be documented and made part of the commissioning manual. Any deviations from the design shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Contractor. Any deviations shall be corrected or accepted by the Owner prior to acceptance. 1.9 COMMISSIONING MANUAL A. The CA shall prepare the final commissioning manual.. The manual shall provide a complete history of the commissioning process and shall include: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Design and Energy Codes. 2. Commissioning Plan. 3. Completed Commissioning Forms. 4. Completed Observation Reports. 5. Completed Start -up Reports. 6. System Operational Tests. 7. Final sequence of operation to be achieved. 8. Summary of building operation as commissioned, noting deviations from design. 9. Design Criteria (extended from Design Documents by CA). 15996 -2 COMMISSIONING AGENT REQUIREMENTS $, t. i • ICG 'Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 10, Written summary of normal startup and operating procedures for each commissioned item of equipment. The manual shall be a three ring binder with tabs for each section. Provide 5 copies. ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ICG SEATTLE CENTRAL OFFICE DIVISION 16 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16050 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16080 MANUFACTURERS SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16195 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS SECTION 16200 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SECTION 16210 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS SECTION 16220 TRANSFORMERS SECTION 16230 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR SECTION 16260 MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND FUSES SECTION 16350 GROUNDING SECTION 16455 LIGHTING FIXTURES SECTION 16520 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SECTION 16620 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS SECTION 16650 TRANSFER SWITCHES SECTION 16710 TELE -DATA RACEWAYS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section supplements Division 1, General Requirements. B. Where contradictions occur between this Section and Division 1, the most stringent of the two shall apply. Architect shall decide which is most stringent. C. Provisions of Division 15 shall also apply to the work of this section as if fully repeated here. D. Provision indicate Section 15001 "Mechanical and Electrical Coordination" shall also apply to the work of this section as if fully repeated here. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All materials shall conform with the current applicable industry standards. Workmanship and neat appearance shall be as important as electrical and mechanical operation. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired prior to final acceptance in a manner meeting approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. The latest editions of the following standards are minimum requirements. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Assoc. (NEMA) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 5. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 6. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA) C. All work and materials shall comply with latest rules, codes and regulations as required by local authority having jurisdiction, including, but not limited to the following: 1. OSHA. 2. National Fire Codes of National Fire Protection Assoc. (NFPA) 3. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC, ANSI C2) 4. 1997 Uniform Building Code 5. 1997 Washington State Building Code 6. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). 7. All applicable Federal, state and local laws, code amendments and regulations. 16010 -1 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS D. Code compliance is mandatory. Nothing in these drawings and specifications permits work not conforming to these codes. E. No work shall be concealed until after inspection and approval by proper authorities. If work is concealed without inspection and approval, Contractor shall be responsible for all work required to open and restore the concealed area including all required modifications. F. Contradictions: Where Codes are contradictory, follow the most stringent. Architect/Engineer shall determine which is most stringent. 1.3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of circuits and locations of outlets, conduit, and other work. Information shown on drawings is as accurate as planning can determine, but not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all architectural, structural and mechanical drawings, and adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings. Discrepancies between different drawings or between drawings and specifications or regulations and codes governing installation shall be brought to attention of the Architect. B. Where the Drawings and Specifications do not comply with the minimum requirements of the Codes, either notify the Architect/Engineer in writing during the Bidding Period of the revisions required to meet Code requirements, or provide an installation which complies with the Code requirements. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner. C. Follow Drawings and Specifications where they are superior to Code requirements. The more stringent of plans and drawing shall apply. 1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section "Submittals" to a scale of = 1' -0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment (i.e, all switchgear rooms, and electrical rooms) and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are important to the efficient flow of the work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, and materials. Include the following: a. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16010 -2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS L . b. Fire -rated wall and floor penetrations. c. Support details. d. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installation. 4. Electrical Rooms and generator indicating conduit stub -up locations. 1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. Maintain a blue -line set of Electrical Contract Drawings in clean, undamaged condition, for mark -up of installations which vary from the Contract Drawings. These drawings shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses. This set shall be made available for inspection by the Engineer or Architect at all times. Upon completion of the contract a set of computerized "as builts" capable of interfacing with autocad software, shall be delivered to the Architect. C. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for: 1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior and locations of handholes and conduit stub -up locations. 2. Panelboard circuit directories reflecting all field changes. 3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 4. Results of all testing performed as specified in the specification. 5. Certification of inspection from authorities having jurisdiction. D. Record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. 1.6 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. Submission: 1. Submit three typed and bound copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals prior to scheduling systems demonstration for the Owner. 2. Bind each Maintenance Manual in one or more vinyl covered, 3 -ring binders, with pockets for folded drawings. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 16010 -3 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OFFICE a. Mark the back spine of each binder with system identification and volume number. C. Requirement Contents: 1. Manuals shall have index with tab dividers for each submittal section identifying all equipment and materials installed on the project including a local supplier for replacing a specific piece of equipment. 2. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of one year. 3. Provide test results for each specification section identified herein. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Protection of Equipment: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. All electrical equipment to be used in the construction shall be properly stored and protected against the elements. All equipment shall be stored under cover, and shall not be stored at the construction site on the ground, in mud, water, rain, sleet, or dust. Large diameter cables may be stored on reels outside; however, all cable ends shall be waterproofed and the reels covered with weatherproof materials. Such weatherproof materials shall be heavy -duty, securely fastened, and made impervious to the elements. 2. Conventional electrical construction materials such as building wire, outlet and junction boxes, wiring devices, conduit, lighting fixtures, fittings, etc., shall be stored in construction buildings, covered trailers, or portable covered warehouses. Any equipment subject to damage or corrosion from excessive moisture shall be stored in dry, heated areas. Any equipment containing plastic or material subject to damage caused by excessive heat or sunlight shall be stored to prevent such damage. This includes plastic ducts and lenses. 3. Equipment damaged as a result of the above conditions shall be properly repaired at the contractor's expense or shall be replaced at the contractor's expense, if in the opinion of the Engineer, the equipment has been damaged to such an extent that it cannot operate properly after repairs are made. 4. All electrical enclosures exposed to construction damaged such as paint spots, spackling or plaster spatter, grout splashes, waterproofing compound, tar spots or runs, and pipe covering compound splashes, shall be completely covered and protected against damage. 5. In the event leakage into the building of any foreign material or fluid occurs or may occur, the contractor shall take all steps as described above to protect any and all equipment. 16010 -4 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS • 1.8 SAFETY AND INDEMNITY ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 6. After connections to electrical equipment are complete and the equipment is ready for operation, all construction debris shall be removed from all enclosures. Such debris includes dust, dirt, wire clippings, tape, and insulation removed in order to make the connection. A. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. See also General Conditions. B. No act, service, drawings review or construction review by the Architect or Engineer, is intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. The warranty period is generally one year after Date of Acceptance. 1. During this period, provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace defects in the electrical systems at no cost to the Owner. Provide certificate with 0 & M manual submittal which guarantees same day service response to the Owner's call for such warranty service. 2. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of one year. Insert copies of 0 & M manual. Such equipment shall include: a. Emergency generator b. Major electrical switchgear and switchboard c. Lighting fixtures d. Lightning protection (if required) e. Fire alarm system 3. Provide extended manufacturers warranties to cover one full year from Date of Acceptance if standard manufacturers' warranty ends any time prior to that date. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. All equipment and materials installed shall be new, unless otherwise specified. 16010 -5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS C. All equipment shall be UL listed and bear the UL label. 2.2 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination and Sequencing: B. Preparation of Submittals: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE B. All major equipment components shall have manufacturers' name, address, model number and serial number permanently attached in a conspicuous location. D. All Hardware /Software associated with systems or equipment included in this Contractor's (Division 16) scope of work shall be Year 2000 (Y2K) compliant. This requirement applies to ALL specification sections listed under Division 16. 1. After receipt of notice to proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a typed list of submittals and the scheduled date of submission. List shall include submittal number, section number and scheduled date of submission. Submittals shall be grouped and submitted in no more than ten complete packages. 2. The contractor shall not submit any shop drawings or product data that does not comply with the contract documents. Prior to submitting shop drawings, review submittal for compliance with Contract Documents and place a stamp or other confirmation thereon which states that submittals have been reviewed. Submittals without such verification will be returned disapproved without review. 3. Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise indicated, and is not a change order request. 1. Refer to Division 1 requirements. 2. The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Architect data of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work. Submittals shall be supported by descriptive material, catalogs, cuts, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the manufacturer to show conformance to specification and drawing requirements; model numbers alone will not be acceptable. Provide complete electrical characteristics for all equipment. Submit product submittals on items as outlined in sections hereinafter. 3. Product submittals shall be made by specification section. All items of a section, requiring submission, shall be submitted together at one time in a tabbed binder. If two or more sections require inter - coordination (e.g., emergency generator and transfer switch; short circuit study, electrical room layouts and electrical switchboards), they shall be submitted at the same time. 4. Each individual submittal items within a binder shall be marked to show section number which pertains to the item. 16010 -6 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS C. Substitutions D. Review Process ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 5. Provide permanent marking on each binder identifying project name, Contractor, Subcontractor, submittal name, date of submission, specification section, and information to distinguish it from other submittals. 6. Section binders shall be report cover type with solid cover and 3 metal fasteners. Binders shall also have a tab indicating submittal number and specification section number. If product submittals for section exceed the capacity of one binder, two or more binders shall be used. In addition, a notation cover shall indicate the number of binders for the section and number of that binder (i.e., 2 or 3). Binders shall be Duo -Tang Series L2- 53558 or approved equal. 7. Submittals not presented in a bound, neat and legible fashion will returned "Without Action." 8. Submittals shall show Contractor's executed review and approval marking. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractor's office will be returned "Without Action." 9. Provide space for Architect's "Action" marking. 1. Refer to the General Conditions, which governs "Substitution" of specified equipment or materials. 2. Indicate any portions of work which deviate from the Contract Documents. a. Explain the reasons for the deviations. b. Show how such deviations coordinate with interfacing portions of other work. 3. Where substitution of materials alters space requirements indicated on the drawings, submit shop drawings indicating proposed layout of space, all equipment to be installed therein and clearances between equipment (i.e., electrical rooms). All clearances required by the National Electrical Code and applicable state and local regulations must be maintained. 1. The Architect reserves the right to require a sample of any equipment to be submitted for approval and to retain its possession. 2. Refer to the individual sections for identified equipment and material for which submittals are required. In addition, provide shop drawings and product data on the following equipment: 16010 -7 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Motor Starters Diesel Generator Sets Automatic Transfer Switches Lighting Fixtures Switchboards & Panelboards Lightning Protection (if required) Wiring Devices Raceways Wire and Cables Transformers Do not submit on equipment or materials not requested in the specifications. 3. Review of shop drawings and product data by the Architect/Engineer, including any review annotations or stamp notations, does not relieve the contractor from the required compliance with the contract documents. 4. The shop drawing and product data review stamp notation requirements are defined as follows: a. "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN :" The reviewer did not observe any items which were not in compliance with the contract documents. All dimensions, details, and coordination with other trades is the responsibility of the contractor. b. "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED:" The reviewer indicated items observed that were not in compliance with the contract documents. The contractor shall not resubmit, but shall make corrections and provide corrected documents with the "Record Drawings." c. "REJECTED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT:" The reviewer indicated items observed which were not in compliance with the contract documents. The contractor shall resubmit showing corrections of all noted items. Delays for resubmittal does not relieve the contractor from meeting project schedules. d. "REJECTED:" The submission does not comply with the contract requirements. The entire submittal must be corrected and submitted for review. Delays for resubmittal does not relieve the contractor from meeting project schedules. 5. If shop drawings are submitted and returned as "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" and meet contract requirements, the contractor shall not resubmit any other shop drawings for these items. 6. If resubmittals are necessary, they shall be made as specified above for submittals. Resubmittals shall highlight all revisions made and cover shall include the phrase "RESUBMITTAL NO. Resubmittal requirements do not entitle the Contractor to additional time and are not a cause for delay of the project. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 16010 -8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OFFICE a.: PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITIONS AT SITE A. Visit to site is required of all bidders prior to submission of bid. All bidders will be held to have familiarized themselves with all discernible conditions, and no extra payment will be allowed for work required because of these conditions, whether specifically mentioned or not. B. Lines of other services and/or equipment that are damaged as a result of this work shall promptly be repaired at no expense to the Owner. 3.2 LICENSES, FEES AND PERMITS A. Arrange for required inspections and pay all license, permit and inspection fees. Furnish a certificate of final inspections and approvals from local authority having jurisdiction over electrical installation. 3.3 WORKMANSHIP AND CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. Only professional quality workmanship will be accepted. Haphazard or poor installation practice will be cause for rejection of work. B. Provide foreman in charge of this work at all times. Foremen for this work shall have had experience in installing not less than 5 such electrical systems of equal or greater complexity. C. Where specifications call for an installation to be made in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, a copy of such recommendations shall at all times be kept in job superintendent's office. 3.4 RELATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Contractor shall coordinate work of this Division with other trades to avoid conflict and to provide rough -ins and other connections for equipment furnished under other divisions that require electrical connections. Inform other trades of required clearances of accesses for or around electrical equipment to maintain serviceability and code compliance. B. Verify equipment dimensions and rough -in requirements for Divisions 2 through 16 with provisions specified under this Section of work, and report discrepancies to the Architect in ample time to prevent delays or unwarranted changes of work. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16010 -9 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 3.5 TESTING A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to make required tests. Tests shall be complete and results approved before final inspection is begun. 3.6 PROGRESS OF WORK A. Order progress of electrical work so as to conform to progress of work of other trades, and complete entire installation as soon as condition of building will permit. Assume any cost resulting from defective or ill -timed work performed under this Division. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." In addition to the requirement specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply: 3.8 SLEEVES 1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to: a. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill -timed work. b. Remove and replace defective work. c. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract documents. d. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. e. Install equipment and materials in newly installed structures. f. Upon written instructions from the architect, uncover and restore work to provide for Architect observation of concealed work. A. Place sleeve in forms of walls, floor slabs and partitions for passage of all conduits, pipes, and ducts installed under this Division. Sleeves shall be set in place a sufficient time ahead of concrete work so as not to delay that work. Install sleeves and raceways through exterior walls so as to provide a waterproof installation. All floor penetrations shall be made watertight. Conduits passing through walls shall be installed to preserve integrity of the wall rating (i.e., fire rating, sound rating, air, etc.). 3.9 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16010 -10 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform all excavation to install conduit and duct banks indicated on the drawings or specified herein. During excavation, pile material for backfilling back from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides and cave -ins. Remove and dispose of all excavated materials not to be used for backfill. Grade to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches and excavation. Remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. Do all excavation by open cut. No tunneling shall be done unless indicated on the drawings or unless written permission is received from the Architect. B. Grade the bottom of trenches to provide uniform bearing and support for conduits or duct bank on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Tamp over depths with loose, granular, moist earth. Remove unstable soil that is not capable of supporting equipment or installation and replace with specified material for a minimum of 12" below invert of equipment or installation. C. Backfill the trenches with excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel or soft shale. These materials should be free from large clods of earth and stones, deposited in 6" layers and rammed until the installation has cover of not less than the adjacent ground but not greater than 2" above existing ground. Backfilling shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the trench so that injurious pressures do not occur. Compaction of the filled trench shall be at least equal to that of the surrounding undisturbed material. Do not settle backfill with water. Reopen any trenches not meeting compaction requirements or where settlement occurs, refill, compact, and restore surface to grade and compaction indicated on the drawings, mounded over and smoothed off. D. In addition, all excavation and backfilling shall comply with Division 2. The most stringent requirement shall apply. 3.10 CLEANUP A. Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to electrical installations and leave premises in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for cleanup of site will be charged to the Contractor. At completion, all equipment, raceways, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue removed from the inside and outside surfaces. Defaced finish shall be refinished. 3.11 TEMPORARY POWER A. Provide temporary power as requested by the general contractor and in accordance with OSHA and local code requirements. Lighting and power outlets shall be provided throughout the project. Check with general contractor prior to bid for special lighting and power outlets and provide as needed. 3.12 MINOR CHANGES A. The Owner reserves the right to make minor changes in the locations of outlets and equipment up to the time of electrical rough -in without any cost to the Owner, ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16010 -11 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Testing B. Manufacturers' Certifications C. Design Authority Assistance ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 3.13 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL TESTS, CERTIFICATION, AND DESIGN AUTHORITY ASSISTANCE 1. Refer to the individual specification sections for test requirements. 2. Prior to the final inspection, the systems or equipment shall be tested and reported as herein specified. Six (6) typewritten copies of the tests shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. 3. All electrical systems shall be tested for compliance with the specifications. 1. The electrical systems specified herein shall be reviewed for compliance with these specifications, installation in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and system operation by a representative of the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall submit certification that the system has been installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and is operating as specified in the contract documents. 2. Provide manufacturers' certification for the emergency generator set/automatic transfer system, fire alarm system and lightning protection. 1. The Contractor shall provide personnel to assist the Architect/Engineer or his representative during all construction review visits. The Contractor shall provide all necessary tools and equipment to demonstrate the system operation and provide access to equipment, including screwdrivers, wrenches, ladders, flashlights, circuit testing devices, meters, keys, etc. 2. Remove equipment covers (i.e., panelboard trims, motor controls, device plates, and junction box covers) as directed for inspection of internal wiring. Accessible ceiling shall be removed as directed for inspection of equipment installed above ceilings. Reinstall all covers or ceilings after inspection. 3. Energize and de- energize circuits and equipment as directed. Demonstrate operation of equipment as directed by Architect/Engineer. 4. The Contractor shall provide authorized representatives of the manufacturers to demonstrate to the Architect/Engineer compliance with the specifications of their respective system during or prior to the final inspection at a time designated by the Architect. Refer to the appropriate specification section for additional testing requirements. Representatives of the emergency generator /automatic transfer and fire alarm systems are required for demonstrations. 16010 -12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 3.14 COMMISSIONING A. The Division 16 Contractor shall include, as part of the work of his contract, costs to cover manpower, equipment, tools, ladders, instruments, etc., necessary to expedite the system performance observations. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 -13 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions an Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section: 1. "Electrical Requirements." 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following: 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section; ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Buried electrical line warnings. 2. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. 3. Operational instruction signs. 4. Warning and caution signs. 5. Equipment labels and signs. 1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for related identification requirements. 2. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for requirements for color coding of conductors for phase identification. C. Refer to other Division 16 Sections for additional specific electrical identification associated with specific items. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and labels. 16050 -1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS D. Samples of engraved, plastic laminate to be used on switchgear, disconnect switches and panelboards. A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." B. ANSI Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1, "Scheme for the identification of Piping Systems," with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable labels. A. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self - adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mil thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width. B. Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright - colored, continuous - printed, plastic tape with magnetic tracer strip not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick. Printed legend indicative of general type of underground line below. C. Wire /Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl - cloth, self - adhesive, wrap around, cable /conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letters. D. Engraved, Plastic- Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16 -inch minimum thick for sign up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8 -inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black face for normal power and white letters on red face for emergency power. Plastic laminate shall be punched for mechanical fasteners. E. Baked - Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. F. Exterior Metal- Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather - resistant, non - fading, preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20 -gage, galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide '/a -inch grommets in corners for mounting. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16050 -2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION G. Fasteners for Plastic - Laminated and Metal Signs: Self- tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. H. Cable Ties: Fungus -inert, self - extinguishing, one - piece, self - locking nylon cable ties, 0.18 -inch minimum width, 50 -1b minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 °F to 350 °F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code. B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC. C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. 3.2 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code - required caution sign for boxes shall be pressure- sensitive, self - adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. Install on outside of box cover. Also label box covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure- sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations and similar labels at concealed boxes. B. Underground Electrical Line Identification: During trench backfilling, for underground power, signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker, located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches; install a single line marker. C. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct - buried and in raceway. D. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or accessible raceways of the following systems for identification. Bands shall be painted with colors indicated below. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two -color markings in ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16050 -3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green 208/120 Volts Phase 480/277 Volts contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 40 -foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors: 16050 -4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION l 1. Fire Alarm Systems: Red. 2. Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and Yellow. 3. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and Blue. 4. Telephone System: Green and Yellow. 5. Tag or label conductors as follows: a. Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another contract with identification indicating source and intent. b. Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications /signal conductors are present in the same box or enclosure label each conductor or cable. Provide label on each box indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by mean of coded color of conductor insulation. For control and communications /signal wiring, use color coding or wire /cable marking tape at terminations and at intermediate locations where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter /number conductor designations throughout on wire /cable marking tapes. c. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facilities' electrical installations. E. Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. F. Conductor Color Coding: Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows: ti G. Use conductors with color factory- applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows: 1. The following field-applied color-coding methods may be used in lieu of g Pp g Y factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG: a. Apply colored, pressure- sensitive plastic tap in half - lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1- inch -wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such 1 obliteration. b. In lieu of pressure- sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply three ties of specified color to each l wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length. H. Power Circuit Identification: 1. Securely fasten wrap - around marker bands to cables, feeders, and power circuits in pull boxes, junction boxes, and switchgear rooms. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows: 1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic - laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. 2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white [_ legend on red background with minimum 3/8 -inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations. J. Install equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows: 1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic - laminate on . each major unit for electrical equipment including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal /alarm system, unless unit is specified with its own self - explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 3/8 -inch- high lettering on 1 -1/2- inch -high label (2- inch -high where two lines are required), white lettering in black field for normal power and white lettering on red field for emergency power. Text shall match terminology ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16050 -5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ;,. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchboards. d.. Pushbutton stations. e. Power transfer equipment. f. Contactors. g. Dimmers. h. Control devices. i. Transformers. j. Power generating units. k. Fire alarm master station or control panel. K. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification (including room numbers) of items controlled by each individual breaker. END OF SECTION t' 16050-6. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION TITLE SPECIFICATION SECTION MANUFACTURER Electrical Identification 16050 Ideal Industries, Inc. National Band and Tag Co. Panduit Corp. Seton Name Plate Co. W.H. Brady, Co. Raceways - Conduit & Tubing 16110 Al Flex Corp. Allied Liquatite Triangle PWC, Inc. - Conduit Bodies 16110 Appleton Electric Co. Crouse -Hinds Div. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. OZ /Gedney Co. Steel City i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The following lists of manufacturers are for the specifications as identified. B. All submittals and documentation shall be in accordance with the project General Requirements, Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work are listed herein. All manufacturers not listed shall be pre- approved prior to bid in order to be considered. Refer to Division for pre- approval format. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16080 -1 MANUFACTURERS TITLE SPECIFICATION SECTION MANUFACTURER - Wireway & Enclosures — 16110 Circle AW Products Hoffman Engineering Co. Hammond Mfg. Square D. Co. - Surface Raceways 16110 Hubbell Isoduct Square D Co. Walker The Wiremold Co. Wire and Cables 16120 American Insulated Wire Corp. Electrical Boxes & Fittings - Raintight outlet boxes 16135 Appleton Electric Co. RACO Div.; Hubbell, Inc. OZ /Gedney Co. Steel City - Bushings, knockout 16135 Appleton Electric Co. closures and locknuts Midland -Ross Corp. Midwest Electric OZ /Gedney Co. RACO Div.; Hubbell, Inc. Thomas & Betts Co., Inc. Wiring Devices - Receptacles & Switches 16140 Arrow Hart Hubbell, Inc. Pass and Seymour, Inc. - Dimmers 16140 Lutron Lightolier Supporting Devices - Slotted metal Angle & 16190 American Electric U- channel Systems B -Line Systems, Inc. Unistrut Diversified Products - Conduit Sealing Bushings 16190 OZ /Gedney Co. RACO, Inc. 4 ❑[11 III 11111 m® 11111 TM 11111 ❑ 11111 11111 11111 11111 111 ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16080 -2 MANUFACTURERS TITLE SPECIFICATION SECTION MANUFACTURER Switchboards & Panelboards 16210 Cutler - Hammer General Electric Company Siemens (I -T -E -) Square D Company Transformers 16220 Cutler- Hammer General Electric Company Siemens (I -T -E -) Square D Company Motor, Disconnects and Fuses - Circuit and Motor Disconnects - Fuses (See Note) Connections 16260 16260 16260 Cutler - Hammer General Electric Company Siemens (I -T -E -) Square D Company Bussman (Basis of Design) Gould Shawmut Appleton Electric Co. Burndy Corp. Ideal Industries, Inc. Thomas and Betts Corp. NOTE: Contractor shall submit fuse coordination for the entire electrical distribution if alternate manufacturer is used. Lightning Protection (as required) 16310 National Lightning Protection Corp. Robbins Lightning, Inc. Triple C Grounding 16350 Cadweld Div.; Cooper Industries Ideal Industries Okonite Burndy Electrical Lighting Fixtures 16450 Refer to Drawings Addressable Fire Alarm System 16510 Fenwall Diesel Generator Sets 16620 Caterpillar Tractor Co. Kohler Co. Onan Corp. Transfer Switches 16650 Automatic Switch Company Caterpillar Tractor Co. Kohler Co. Onan Corp. Russ Electric, Inc. 1 ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16080 -3 MANUFACTURERS PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section supplements Division 1, General Requirements. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work included in this section consists of conduits, wires and other miscellaneous materials not specifically mentioned in other sections of Division 16, but necessary or required for equipment or system operation or function, and the labor to install them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Materials list with manufacturer, style, series or model identified. B. Manufacturer's descriptive literature and/or sample if requested by the Architect/Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Refer to Section 16080. 2.2 CONDUIT RACEWAYS: Refer to Section 16110. 2.3 WIRES AND CABLES: Refer to Section 16120 and Section 16130. 2.4 WIRING DEVICES: Refer to Section 16140. 2.5 OUTLET BOXES, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Outlet Boxes: Hot - dipped galvanized or sherardized of required size, 4" square minimum, for flush mounted devices and lighting fixtures. Cast -type FD with gasketed covers for surface - mounted devices. B. Junction and Pull Boxes: Use outlet boxes as junction boxes wherever possible. Larger junction and pull boxes shall be fabricated from sheet steel, sized according to code, with screw -on covers, galvanized where required for outdoor exposure. C. All exterior boxes shall be cast, gasketed, weatherproof type with cast covers. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16100 -1 BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS D. Refer to Section 16135 for additional requirements. 2.6 WIRE CONNECTORS A. For wires that are #8 AWG and smaller: Insulated pressure type with live spring, rated 105 °C, 600 volt, for building wiring and 1000 volt in signs or fixtures. B. For wires that are #6 AWG and larger: Compression type with 3M #33 or equal tape insulation. 2.7 CONDUIT HANGERS A. Galvanized steel with special accessories for purpose and adequate to support load imposed. Support individual conduit 1 -1/2 -inch and larger and all multiple conduit runs with hangers. Clamp conduits individually to each support. B. Refer to Section 16190 for additional requirements. 2.8 FUSES: Refer to Section 16260. 2.9 ACCESS PANELS A. Electrical Contractor to provide access panels for electrical equipment which are required for accessibility by code. 2.10 TERMINAL CABINETS AND BACKBOARDS A. Fabricate from code gauge steel, size as indicated on drawings, with flush latch and concealed hinge. Where size is not indicated, minimum size shall be 20" wide x 24" high x 4" deep. Finish shall be ANSI 61 light gray baked enamel. B. Provide inside terminal cabinet, 3 /4" thick plywood backboard and terminal strips, one terminal point for each wire within the terminal cabinet. C. Provide 3 /4" thick plywood backboards, size as indicated on drawings, for telephone where indicated on drawings. See Section 16700 for additional requirements. 2.11 CONDUIT SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Conduit Penetration: Pipe Shields, Inc., model WFB at walls and QDFB at floors. Refer to Division 7 "Firestopping" for additional requirements. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16100 -2 BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS i 2.12 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING AND SUPPORT HARDWARE A. Steel channels, bolts and washers, used for mounting or support of electrical equipment shall be galvanized typed. Where installed in corrosive atmosphere, stainless steel type hardware shall be used. B. Refer to Section 16190 for additional requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide complete raceway systems for all conductors including control wiring and low voltage wiring unless otherwise noted. B. Electrical system layouts indicated on drawings are generally diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and work of other trades will permit. Govern exact routing of raceways and locations of outlets by structure and equipment served. Take all dimensions from architectural drawings. C. All home runs to panelboards are indicated as starting from the outlet nearest to the panel and continuing in the general direction of that panel. Continue such circuits to panel as though routes were completely indicated. D. Avoid cutting and boring holes through structure or structural members wherever possible. Obtain prior approval of the Architect, and conform to all structural requirements when cutting or boring structure. E. Furnish and install all necessary hardware, hangers, blocking, brackets, bracing, runners, etc., required for equipment specified under this Section. 3.2 RACEWAY: Refer to Section 16110. 3.3 OUTLETS A. Exact location of outlets and equipment shall be governed by structural conditions and obstructions or other equipment items. When necessary, relocate outlets so that when fixtures or equipment are installed, they will be symmetrically located according to room layout and will not interfere with other work or equipment. Verify final location of all outlets, panels, equipment, etc., with the Architect/Engineer. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16100 -3 BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE Wall Switches Convenience outlets Hallways Workroom wall outlet Panelboards wall- mounted Wall phone outlet Telephone outlets Fire alarm horns, speakers Fire alarm pull stations Fire alarm strobes B. Provide zinc - coated or cadmium - plated sheet steel outlet boxes not less than 4" octagonal or square, unless otherwise noted. Equip fixture outlet boxes with 3/8" no -bolt fixture studs. Where fixtures are mounted on or in an accessible type ceiling, provide a junction box and extend flexible conduit to each fixture. Outlet boxes in finished ceilings or walls shall be fitted with appropriate covers, set to come flush with the finished surface. Where more than one switch or device is located on one point, use gang boxes and covers unless otherwise indicated. Sectional switch boxes or utility boxes will not be permitted. Provide tile box or a 4" square box with tile ring in masonry walls which will not be plastered or furred, or where "dry- wall" type materials are applied. Through the wall type boxes are not permitted. Install minimum 12" lateral separation for back to back boxes. C. Surface- mounted devices are to be mounted in cast type boxes with gasketed covers: (Crouse -Hinds condulets or equal). D. Dimensions unless shown on drawings are given below and are from finished floor to center line of outlets unless noted otherwise. Adjust heights of outlets in masonry walls to correspond with consistent brick or block course. Outlets in block walls shall be installed in core of block. 4' - 0" (to top of switch) 1' - 6" (to bottom of outlet) 1' - 6" (to bottom of outlet) 4' - 4" (field verify height of backsplash) 6' - 6" (to top of trim) 4' - 0" 1' -6" ceiling or wall 4' - 0" (to top of device) 6' - 8" or 6" below ceiling (whichever is lower) Confirm final location and heights of all outlets, wall switches, and television outlets with architectural drawings and furniture plans prior to installation. E. Outlets except over counters, benches, special equipment, baseboards, fin tube radiators, etc., or at wainscotting, shall be at a height to prevent interference to service equipment, or as noted on drawings. F. Refer to Section 16135 for additional requirements. 16100 -4 BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS d.. 1 3.4 JUNCTION PULL BOXES A. Construct junction or pull boxes not over 150 cubic inches in size shall be standard outlet boxes, and those over 150 cubic inches shall be constructed the same as "Cabinets," with screw covers of same gauge metal. Removal covers must be accessible at all times. B. Provide a standard access panel having a hinged metal door neatly fitted into a flush metal trim, where a junction box or equipment is located above non- accessible ceilings or behind finished walls. Coordinate location and type with the Architect. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 1 �- PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and j .. Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1 B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section: 1. "Electrical Requirements." 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways for electrical wiring. Types of raceways in this section include the following: 1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 4. Liquid -tight flexible conduit. 5. Rigid metallic conduit (RMC). 6. Surface raceways. 7. Rigid non - metallic conduit. 8. Wireway. B. Related Sections: The following section contains requirements that relate to this section: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of contract and Division 1 Specification Section. B. Product Data for the following products: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Division 16 Section "Electrical Boxes and Fittings" for conduit connectors, fittings, and couplings. 2, ' Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for conduit penetrations through rated walls and slabs. 1, Raceways and fittings. 2, Wireways and fittings. 16110 -1 'RACEWAYS C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's written installation instructions for wireway, surface raceway, and nonmetallic raceway products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. C. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components listed and labeled by UL. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 B. Intermediate Steel Conduit: UL 1242. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, zinc - coated steel. E. Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: UL 360. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS A. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. B. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material. C. Conduit, Tubing and Duct Accessories: Types, sizes and materials complying with manufacturer's published product information. Mate and match accessories with raceway. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16110 -2 RACEWAYS 2.3 CONDUIT BODIES AND FITTINGS A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion - resistant screws. B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for threaded raceways. C. EMT Conduit Bodies 1 Inch and Smaller: Use bodies with steel compression gland connectors and couplings. D. EMT Conduit Bodies 1 Inch and Larger: Use bodies with steel compression gland connectors and couplings. E. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing: Use nonmetallic conduit bodies conforming to UL514B. F. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Either steel or malleable iron only with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without 0 -ring seal. Each connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected. G. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit and IMC, larger than 3 /4" size. H. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or secured to the buildings construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings for rigid steel conduit shall be hot - dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring. Expansion fittings for rigid non - metallic conduit shall be of the short type in runs 25' or less, and the long type in runs 26' to 80'. The long type shall be a two piece barrel and piston joint, providing 6" of the total movement range in 3/4" through 6" conduit sizes. The short type shall be a one piece, coupling with 0- ring, providing 2" of total movement range in 3 /4" to 2" conduit sizes. I. Seal Off Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16110 -3 RACEWAYS 2.4 WIREWAYS B. Wireway covers shall be hinged type. 2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS C. Accessories: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHOD ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE A. General: Electrical wireways shall be of types, sizes, and number of channels as indicated. Fittings and accessories including but not limited to couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold -down straps, and end caps shall match and mate with wireway as required for complete system. Where features are not indicated, select to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable provisions of NEC. A. General: Sizes and channels as indicated. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway. Provide internal barriers for areas with power and communications sections. 13. Surface Metal Raceway: Construct of two piece galvanized steel with snap -on covers, with 9/32 -inch mounting screw knockouts in base approximately 8 inches o.c. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating suitable for painting. Provide raceways of types suitable for each application required. Sizes 1 -3/4" H x 4 -3/4" W. 1. Couplings for joining raceway sections. 2. Wire clips for conductors. 3. Blank end fittings. 4. Circuit breaker housings for single pole breakers. 5. Device brackets for single or two gang devices. 6. Combination receptacle and telephone outlet covers. 7. Outlet boxes with hubs for conduit connectors. A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods: (Concourses, Seating Areas Included): 1. Exposed: Intermediate metal conduit, rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed: Intermediate metal conduit, rigid steel conduit. 16110 -4 RACEWA M �.i I 11 1'? i B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods: 3.2 INSTALLATION 3. Underground, Single Run: Rigid non - metallic conduit. 4. Underground, Grouped: Rigid non - metallic conduit. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment including transformers, pneumatic or electrical solenoid, and motor - operated equipment: Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 1. Exposed: Intermediate metal conduit, rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment including transformers, pneumatic or electric solenoid, and motor- operated equipment: Flexible metal conduit. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment in Moist/Humid or Corrosive Atmosphere including pneumatic or electric solenoid, and motor - operated equipment: Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. A. General: Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturers' written installation instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and as follows. B. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless indicated otherwise, within finished wall, ceilings, and floors. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. C. Elevation of Raceway: Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. D. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within raceways. E. Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Division 16 and in accordance with NEC and local authorities seismic requirements. F. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection. G. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab. H. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16110 -5 • RACEWAYS I. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings except as otherwise indicated. J. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions except as otherwise indicated. K. Raceways embedded in slabs shall not be permitted without the strict approval of the Structural Engineer. If approval is granted by the Structural Engineer, all raceway routing shall meet the following conditions: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. The slab over the joist is to be designed to allow for an embedded 1 '/" outside diameter plastic PVC conduit. The conduit is centered in the slab and must run perpendicular to the joist web. Conduits are not to be spaced closer than 18" on center. Embedded conduit that does not meet these criteria will not be permitted in the slab. 2. The joist is to be designed to allow for three 1 ' /z" diameter conduits running parallel to the web of the joist and spaced at 4" on center over the depth of the joist. Conduits are to be positioned at least 3" clear of joist horizontal reinforcing. 3. Raceways embedded in slabs will not be permitted within 50 feet of electrical rooms. L. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical. All exposed conduit runs shall be approved by the Architect prior to installing. M. All exposed conduits in public areas shall be painted to match surrounding walls. Verify exact color with the Architect. N. Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the run such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases, provide field bends for parallel raceways. All exposed conduit routing shall be approved by the Architect prior to installing. 0. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors. Use expansion fittings at building expansion joints. 16110-6 RACEWAYS 1 r P. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool. Q. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16110 -7 Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside of the box. All conduit connections to junction boxes shall have insulated bushings. R. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. S. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc - coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200 -1b tensile strength. Leave no less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. T. Telephone and Signal System Raceways: In addition to the above requirements, raceways 2- inches and smaller, shall have a maximum length of 150 feet with a maximum of two 90° bends or equivalent. Install pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. U. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL- listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated: 1. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces, air - conditioned spaces and walk -in coolers. 2. Where required by the NEC. V. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this contract, install screwdriver - operated threaded flush plugs flush with floor. RACEWAYS W. Flexible connection: Use length (maximum of 6 ft.) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi - recessed lighting fixtures, for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquid -tight flexible conduit in wet locations. Install separate equipment grounding conductor across flexible connections. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Y. PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit. Z. All underground conduits shall be installed 30 inches below finish grade unless noted otherwise. AA. Grounding: Install a separate green equipment grounding conductor in all raceways from the panelboard/junction box supplying the raceway to the receptacle or equipment ground terminals. Conduits will not be permitted as a ground conductor. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris. ICG Seattle CENTRAL. OFFICE END OF SECTION 16110 -8 [J if RACEWAYS 4 tl i r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. UL Std. 44 2. UL Std. 83 ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16120 -1 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirement of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this section: 1. Electrical Requirements 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for trenching and backfilling. 2. Division 16 Section `Electrical Boxes and Fittings" for connectors for terminating cables in boxes and other electrical enclosures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for electrical wires, cables and connectors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code: B. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." 1. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials. C. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL under the following standards. Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables Thermoplastic- Insulated Wires and Cables WIRES AND CABLES E. IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standard. 3. UL Std. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors 4. UL Std. 854 Service Entrance Cable D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1. WC -5: Thermoplastic - Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 2. WC -7: Cross Linked Thermosetting Polyethylene- Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 1. Std. 82: Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors. 2.1 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT) c A. General: Provide suitable wire and cable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed. All wires and cables shall be new and delivered to the site in unbroken packages and reels. B. All wires and cables shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the entire project. C. Conductors: Provide solid conductors for power and lighting circuits #10 AWG and smaller. Provide stranded conductors for #8 AWG and larger. D. Conductor Material: All wires and cables shall be copper, single conductor rated at 600 volts, which conform to or exceed ICEA specifications and the following: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. In sizes 1/0 AWG to 4/0: Cross - linked polyethylene insulation type XHHW (75 - 90 °C) or THWN. 2. In sizes 250 KCMIL and larger: Type XHHW (75 °C). 3. In sizes 1 AWG and smaller: All conductors shall have heat/moisture resistant thermoplastic insulation type THWN (75 °C) except as follows: a) Where conduit temperature will exceed 100 °F, use type THHN (90 °C). 16120 -2 WIRES AND CABLES li 4 G. Connectors for Conductors: H. Splices and Taps: PART 3 - EXECUTION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE c b) In 120 volt incandescent fixtures, type SF -2 or SFF -2 (150 - 200°C). c) In wireway of fluorescent lighting fixtures type THHN (90 °C). E. Grounding conductors: Shall be of the same type as its associated phase conductors. F. Color Coding for phase identification in accordance with Table 1 in Part 3 herein. 1. Provide UL- listed factory- fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used. 1. No. 10 AWG and smaller - Connectors for solid conductors shall be solderless, screw -on, spring pressure cable type, 600 volt, 105 °C with integral insulation and UL approved for aluminum and copper conductors. Connectors for stranded conductors shall be crimp -on type with integral insulating cover. 2. No. 8 AWG and larger - Hydraulically applied crimping sleeve or tap connector sized for the conductors. Insulate the hydraulically applied connector with 90 degree S., 600 volt insulating cover provided by the connector manufacturer. Insulator materials and installation shall be approved for the specific application, location, voltage, and temperature and shall not have an insulation value less than the conductors being joined. 3.1 WIRING METHOD A. Use the following wiring methods as indicated: 1. Install all wire in raceway. Power and control wiring shall be installed in separate raceways. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES A. General: Install electrical cables, wires, and connectors in compliance with NEC. 16120 -3 WIRES AND CABLES B. Coordinate cable and wire installation with other Work. C. Do not install more conductors in a raceway than indicated on the drawings. A maximum of three branch circuits are to be installed in any one conduit on a 3- phase, 4 -wire system, unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. No two branch circuits of the same phase are to be installed in the same conduit, unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. D. Minimum wire size shall be a No.12 AWG except for control or signal circuits which may be No. 14 AWG. E. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, all wiring for branch circuits shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG in 3 /4" conduit, protected by 20 amperes circuit breakers. If distance from panel to first outlet is 75 feet or greater for 120 volt circuits, and 125 feet or greater for 277 volt circuits, No. 10 AWG shall be installed throughout the circuit, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. F. Size of current carrying conductors, unless noted otherwise on drawings, shall be determined from Table 310 -16 of the latest National Electric Code for the load served. G. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary. H. Use pulling means including: fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire /cable grips which will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable. I. Size of conduits, unless specifically shown, shall be determined from Table 3B, Chapter 9 of the latest National Electrical Code. J. Keep conductor splice to minimum. All splices shall be made within junction boxes, wiring troughs and other enclosures as permitted by the National Electrical Code. Do not splice conductors in panelboards, safety switches, switchboard motor control centers or motor control enclosures. Splices in conductors installed below grade will not be permitted, unless approved in writing by the Architect. K. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation rather than conductors being spliced. L. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. M. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than No. 10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16120 -4 WIRES AND CABLES N. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturers' published torque tightening values. Where manufacturers' torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled. B. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits. C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook -ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning. Correct malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance. D. Prior to completion of project, an infrared scan of switchgear and panelboard feeder equipment connection shall be performed when all loads are energized. E. TABLE I: Color Coding for Phase Identification: 3.4 FEEDER TESTING A. Products ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16120 -5 1. Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors with factory applied color as follows: 208V/120 Volts Phase 480V/277 Volts Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green 1. Material: Contractor shall provide all necessary testing equipment and devices required to perform the test described in this section. .WIRES AND CABLES B. Execution ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE Visual and Mechanical Inspection a. Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with one -line diagrams. Test cable mechanical connections to manufacturer's recommended values using a calibrated torque wrench. c. Check cable color coding with specification section 16050 and National Electrical Code standards. 2. Electrical Tests a. Perform insulation - resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts dc for 1 minute. b. Perform continuity test to insure proper cable connection. 3. Test Values a. Evaluate results by comparison with cables of same length and type. Investigate any values less than 50 megohms. b. Submit results to Engineer for approval in accordance with Section 16020. b. • END OF SECTION 1 i kJ ti PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Material and Methods section, and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein. A. Drawings are diagrammatic. All bends, boxes, fittings, couplings are not necessarily shown. Supply as necessary to comply with the National Electric Code. B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following: 1. Outlet boxes. 2. Junction boxes. 3. Pull boxes. 4. Bushings. 5. Locknuts. 6. Knockout closures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and fittings, of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years. Refer to Section 16080. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least five years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing electrical boxes and fittings similar to those required for this project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514- Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL- listed and labeled. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16135 -1 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds/Pub No.'s OS1, 0S2 and PUB 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers and box supports. F. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of FS W -C 586, "Electrical Cast Metal Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies, and Entrance Caps." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical boxes and fittings. B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of electrical floor, junction and pull boxes showing accurately scaled box layouts and their spatial relationship to associated equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS A. Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet -steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes (minimum 4 inch square, 1 %2 inch deep), including box depths as required, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes, and with cable and conduit -size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with corrosion- resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code - compliance option. B. Device Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet -steel non - gangable device boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes (minimum 4 inch square, 1 'Y2 inches deep), including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting holes, and with conduit -size knockout openings in bottom and ends, and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide conduit connectors and corrosion - resistant screws for equipment type grounding. 16135 -2 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 1. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster ears, and plasterboard expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code - compliance option. C. Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion - resistant cast -metal raintight outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast -metal face plates with spring - hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion - resistant plugs and fasteners. D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code -gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, and washers. Pull boxes installed in finished spaces must be flush mounted cabinets provided with trim, hinged door and flush latch and lock to match flush mounted panelboard trim. E. Exterior junction or pull boxes, flush with grade: PART 3 - EXECUTION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Junction or pull box to be mounted flush with grade shall be polymer composite raintight with screw cover lids. Box dimensions shall be 30 "W x 48 "L x 36 "D. Covers shall be polymer composite suitable for pedestrian traffic secured to box with stainless steel screws. Box to be furnished with continuous neoprene gasket to seal cover. Conduit entry shall be on side of box with bell ends. F. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion - resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications. 3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. 16135 -3 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 3.2 damage. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire /cable, wiring devices, and raceway installation work. C. Provide raintight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. E. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. F. Installing boxes back -to -back in walls shall not be permitted. Provide no less than 12 inches (150 mm) of separation. G. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. H. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces. I. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embedded electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. J. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. K. Exterior junction or pull boxes shall be mounted flush with grade, unless noted otherwise or indicated to be above ground on the drawings. Boxes shall be surrounded on all sides with 6 inches minimum of concrete. Top of concrete shall flush with grade. Seal all conduit entries into box with duct seal to prevent entrance of moisture, after conductors are installed. L. Tap and splices, where permitted by these specifications within exterior junction boxes, shall be performed with an encapsulating watertight splice or tap kit which insulates and moisture seals the connection. Kit shall consist of the appropriate size and type mold, encapsulating resin and end sealing tape. L. ■ M. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and t.. A. Upon completion of installation work, properly ground electrical boxes and demonstrate compliance with requirements. GROUNDING ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 16135 -4 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 1. Receptacles 1 3. 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles .. Plugs 4. Plug Connectors 5. Snap Switches . L 6. Lamp Dimmer- Switches 7. Wall Plates I B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. { 1.3 SUBMITTALS i . A. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Motor Disconnects and Fuses" for devices other than snap switches and plug/receptacle sets used as disconnects for motors. A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes. B. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code:" A. Schedule installation of finish plates after the surface upon which they are installed has received final finish. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable UL and NEMA standards. 16140 -1 WIRING DEVICES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. B. Color of Devices: Color of all devices shall be coordinated with the Architect, except special purpose devices shall be black, emergency power system devices which shall be red, corrosion- resistant devices which shall be yellow, or isolated ground devices which shall be orange. C. Receptacles: As scheduled in Table 1 in Part 3 indicated herein. Comply with UL 498 and NEMA WD 1 and WD 5. D. Receptacles, Industrial Heavy Duty: Provide pin and sleeve design receptacles conforming to UL 498. Comply with UL 1010 where installed in hazardous locations. Provide features indicated. E. Ground -Fault Interrupter (GFI) Receptacles: As scheduled in Table 1 in Part 3 indicated herein: Provide "terminal" or feed - through type ground -fault circuit interrupter, as indicated on drawings, with integral heavy -duty NEMA 5 -20R duplex receptacles. Provide unit designed for installation in a 2 -3/4 -inch deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group 1 per UL Standard 943. F. Snap Switches: As scheduled in Table 2 in Part 3 indicated herein. G. Wall Dimmer: As scheduled in Table 2 in Part 3 indicated herein. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Dimmers indicated to serve fluorescent lamps shall be 120v or 277v, as required for circuit served, solid state type for use with fluorescent dimming ballasts. Control shall be slide handle and dimmer shall be for semi -flush mounting. 2. All dimmers shall be of the same manufacturer. Faceplate shall be the same color as device plates specified. H. All exterior weatherproof receptacles located on the roof, receptacles located in elevator pits and machine rooms shall be GFI type or GFI protected. I. All devices shall be premium specification grade. 16140 -2 WIRING DEVICES • 2.2 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES A. Wall Plates: Single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Provide wall plates with engraved legend where indicated on drawings. Engraving shall be done by the device manufacturer. All lettering shall be 1/8 -inch high and shall be black for normal power systems and red for emergency power systems. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features: 1. Material and Finish: 0.04 inch thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel. Plate shall be Hubbell "S" Series or approved equal. B. For all devices installed which are exposed to the weather, moisture or where indicated on the drawings, device plates shall be weatherproof. Device plates shall be cast type with gasketing to prevent entrance of moisture when closed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. C. The mounting height of devices is indicated in the legend on the drawings. Where finished walls are exposed concrete block, brick or tile, the height shall be adjusted to allow outlet box for device to be mounted at a joint. D. Receptacles above countertops shall be installed with major axis horizontal above the backsplash. E. Mount all devices within outlet boxes to allow device plates to be in contact with wall on all sides. Align devices with major axis of device parallel to adjacent predominant building feature, i.e., door frames or countertops. F. Install wall switches on the strike side of doors. G. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from building materials, dirt, and debris, ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16140 -3 WIRING DEVICES H. Provide a current carrying conductor, neutral, equipment grounding conductor and an insulated grounding conductor to each isolated ground "IG" receptacle. I Install galvanized steel wall plates in unfinished spaces. J. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. K. Install wall plates after painting work is completed. 3.2 PROTECTION 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL L. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminal to comply with tightening torque requirements specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance. A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short- circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing test wiring devices and demonstrating compliance with requirements, operate each operable device at least six times. B. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16140 -4 WIRING DEVIC Designation (1) Current Rating Amps Voltage Rating Single/ Duplex NEMA Config. Hubbell Catalog #(3) Notes - 20 125 Duplex 5 -20R 5362 - - 20 125 Single 5 -20R 5361 - IG 20 125 Duplex 5 -20R IG5362 Isolated Ground WP 20 125 Duplex 5 -20R GF5362/WP FS26 Weather - proof GFI 20 125 Duplex 5 -20R GF5362 Integral GFI (2) - 20 125 Duplex 5 -20R 5362S Surge Suppression - 20 125 Duplex 5 -20R HBLSG63HI Tamperproof i 1 r L i 1 i r i i NOTES C. TABLE 1 RECEPTACLES ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE ,... �, „.;awn,... �. ��., ..,,a�...,.�..,,,,,...,.,...r.. �.�...,,.,....,.P.M,,,H •< 1. Letter designations are used where symbols alone do not clearly designate on plans locations where specific receptacle types are used. 2. Protecting downstream receptacles on same circuit is not acceptable. 3. Refer to Section 16080 for additional acceptable manufacturers. Color of device shall be verified with Architect (ivory, gray, white, etc.). All emergency receptacles shall be red. 16140 -5 WIRING DEVICES Designation (1) Typical Application Load Rating Voltage Rating (AC) Poles Hubbell Catalog #(4) Notes S Control Lights 20A 120/277 1 HBL1221 - S3 Control Lights 20A 120/277 3 -way HBL1223 - S4 Control Lights 20A 120/277 4 -way HBL1224 Sp Switch & Pilot Light 20A 120 1 HBL1221PL (2) Sp Switch & Pilot Light 20A 277 1 HBL1221PL7 (2) D Dimmer Switch 1000W 120 1 Nova T Series w /preset (3) Sk Key Switch 20A 120/277 1 HBL 1221 L Swp Wp Switch & Cover Plate 20A 120/277 1 1281/1750 D. TABLE 2 NOTES ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE SNAP SWITCHES/WALL DIMMERS END OF SECTION 16140 -6 1. For snap switches, designation is the same as the symbol used on plans for the device. Type of switch is determined from plan context including type of device or circuit being controlled. 2. Pilot light "on" when switch is "on." 3. Lutron dimmer (refer to 16080 for additional manufacturers). Provide dimmer wattage size to handle load served. Derate dimmer switch per manufacturer's recommendations where dimmers are ganged together. 4. Refer to Section 16080 for additional acceptable manufacturers. Color of device shall be verified with Architect (ivory, gray, white, etc.). WIRING DEVICES 1) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product data for each type of product specified. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16190 -1 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this section: 1. "Electrical Requirements." 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that related to this Section: 1. Division 3 Section "Mild Steel Concrete Reinforcement" for inserts, anchors, and sleeves to be installed in concrete for use with supporting devices. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for requirements for miscellaneous metal items involved in supports and fastenings. 3. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for requirements for firestopping at sleeves through walls and floors that are fire barriers. 4. Refer to Division 16 Sections for additional specific support requirements that may be applicable to specific items. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, spacing, features, and application for each required type of hanger, support, sleeve, seal, and fastener to be used. C. Shop drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials. SUPPORTING DEVICES D. Engineered Design consisting of details and engineering analysis for supports for the following items: 1. Cable Tray. 2. Conduit (racked) 3. Ceiling mounted boxes, transformers. 4. Conduit - Ceiling mounted, concrete encased. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." B. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL, ETL, CSA, or other approved, nationally recognized testing and listing agency that provides third - party certification follow -up services. C. Installation shall comply with local authorities seismic requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COATINGS A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot -dip galvanized. 2.2 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C- clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps. B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows: C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory- fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleableiron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. 2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. 16190 -2 SUPPORTING DEVICES 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements. B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation. C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. 2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs., provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support. 3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U- bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. 4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze -type hangers. 16190 -3 SUPPORTING DEVICES 5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1 -1/2 -inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use '/4 -inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. 6. Space supports for raceways in accordance with Table 1 of this Section. Space supports for raceway types not covered by the above in accordance with NEC. 7. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, supports at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples of threadless box connectors. 8. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors (i.e., strain reliefs). E. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices. F. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to the raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches from the box. G. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire -rated floors and wall for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire -rated wall or floor construction, apply UL- listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables in accordance with "Fire Stopping" requirement of Division 7. H. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16190 -4 SUPPORTING DEVICES J. TESTS: Test pull -out resistance of one of each type, size, and anchorage material for the following fastener types: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE ..�. a..rm�.ur.✓avr+»w.'rV01}.Mt.r" 1+ AN Nw YYNnYhh .keYr 1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw -type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring- tension clamps on steel. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions or light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. 2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1 -1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3 /4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used. 3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock - resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs. 1. Expansion anchors. 2. Toggle bolts. Provide all jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated indicating scales required for reliable testing. Obtain the structural Engineer's approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load for fastener. If fastening fails test, revise all similar fastener installations and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. END OF SECTION SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 -5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1.2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE A. Furnish and install vibration control devices, materials, and related items. Perform all work as shown on the drawings and as specified herein to provide complete vibration isolation systems in proper working order. A. All vibration isolation mounts shall be supplied by one of the approved manufacturers stated in the PRODUCTS Section of this specification. Substitutions of equal equipment beyond the alternatives listed will be permitted only with the written permission of the Architect. Accompany each request for acceptance of substitute equipment with manufacturer's certified data proving the equivalence of the proposed substitute in quality and performance. The Architect shall be the final judge of the validity of the data submitted. B. Unless otherwise specified, supply only new equipment, parts, and materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to related sections elsewhere for procedural instructions for submittals. B. The shop drawing submittal for isolated electrical equipment shall include submittal information for the isolation mounts. Information supplied shall be as follows: 1. A complete description of products to be supplied including product data, dimensions, specifications, and installation instructions. 2. Detailed selection data for each vibration isolator supporting equipment, including: a. The equipment identification mark. b. The isolator type. c. The actual load. C. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of vibration isolation device. After approval, samples will be returned for installation at the job. All costs associated with submission of samples shall be borne by the Contractor. A. Coordinate the size, location, and special requirements of vibration isolation equipment and systems with other trades. Coordinate plan dimensions with size of housekeeping pads. 16195 -1 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNT TYPES A. Type DNP (Double Neoprene Pad): ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE B. Provide vibration isolators of the appropriate sizes and proper loading to meet the specified requirements. C. Supply and install any incidental materials needed to meet the requirements stated herein, even if not expressly specified or shown on the drawings, without claim for additional payment. D. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specifications. E. Should any electrical equipment cause excessive noise or vibration, the Contractor shall be responsible for remedial work required to reduce noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding the manufacturer's specifications for the unit in question. F. Upon completion of the work, the Architect or Architect's representative shall inspect the installation and shall inform the installing contractor of any further work that must be completed. Make all adjustments as directed by the Architect that result from the final inspection. This work shall be done before vibration isolation systems are accepted. 1. Neoprene pad isolators shall be formed by two layers of 1/4" to 5/16" thick ribbed or waffled neoprene, separated by a stainless steel or aluminum plate. These layers shall be permanently adhered together. The pads shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended range. 2. Type DNP isolators shall be formed from one of the following products or approved equal: Type NR Amber/Booth Type Korpad Korfund Dynamics Type WSW Mason Industries Type NPS Kinetics Noise Control Series Shear Flex Vibration Mountings & Control 16195 -2 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE B. Type HN (Hanger Neoprene): 1. Vibration isolation hangers shall consist of a neoprene -in -shear or glass fiber element contained in a steel housing. A neoprene neck bushing (or other element) shall be provided where the hanger rod passes through the hanger housing to prevent the rod from contacting the hanger housing. The diameter of the hole in the housing shall be sufficient to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the hanger housing. 2. Type HN isolators shall be one of the following products or approved equal: A. Type A: Type BRDA Amber/Booth Type H Korfund Dynamics Type HD Mason Industries Type RH or FH Kinetics Noise Control Type RHD or RFD Vibration Mountings & Control 2.2 FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 1. Flexible Electrical Connection Type A shall be a prefabricated unit incorporating a flexible and watertight outer jacket, grounding strap, plastic inner sleeve to maintain smooth wireway, and end hubs with tapered electrical threads to fit standard threaded rigid metal conduit. 2. Flexible Electrical Connection Type A shall be Crouse -Hinds (Syracuse, NY) "XD Expansion/Deflection Coupling," Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. (Spring City, PA) "Type DF Expansion and Deflection Fitting „” or approved equal. B. Type B: 1. Flexible Electrical Connection Type B shall be field fabricated using a minimum 2 (two) foot length of flexible conduit or cable. C. Type O. 1. Flexible Electrical Connection Type C shall be field fabricated using a minimum 4 (four) foot length of flexible conduit or cable. 16195 -3 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Transformers, Unit Substations, and Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS): 1. Transformers, Unit Substations, and UPS devices within the building construction shall be mounted on Type DNP isolators. If the transformers are suspended, use Type HN isolators selected to achieve not less than 0.1" static deflection. 2. Electrical connections to isolated transformers and UPS devices shall be made using flexible electrical connections Type A or Type B. B. Dimmers: 1. Dimmer cabinets shall be mounted on Type DNP isolators. 2. Electrical connections to dimmers shall be made using flexible electrical connections Type A or Type B. C. Mechanical Equipment: 3.2 INSTALLATION 1. Electrical connections to vibration isolated mechanical equipment shall be made using flexible electrical connections Type A or Type C. A. General: 1. In all cases, isolated electrical equipment shall be positioned so that it is free standing and does not come in rigid contact with the building structure or other systems. B. Isolation Mounts: 1. All mounts shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points for the supported equipment. 2. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping pad and the isolator base plate shall rest entirely on the pad. 3. Hanger rods for vibration isolated supports shall be connected to structural beams or joists, not to the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide suitable intermediate support members as necessary. 4. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the hanger housing may rotate a full 360° about the rod axis without contacting any object. ICG Seattle CENTRAL 16195 -4 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS OFFICE 1_ ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE C. Flexible Electrical Connections: END OF SECTION 1. Type C connections shall be installed in a grossly slack "U" shape or a 360 loop. 2. Rigid conduit on the isolated-equipment side of the flexible connection, and the flexible connection itself, shall not be tied to the building construction or other rigid structures. 1619 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 — General Requirements. B. Related work included in other sections: All section of Division 16. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. This section describes those items related and required for the electrical service and distribution system. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to facilitate a complete electrical distribution system for the project covered by these documents. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Materials list with manufacturer, style, series or model identified. B. Manufacturer's descriptive literature and/or sample if requested by the Architect/Engineer. C. Plan view drawing at 1/4" scale of the main electrical room and revised emergency electrical room. 1.4 SECONDARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The services will be 277/480 volts, 3- phase, 4 -wire and will be available at the secondary terminals of the pad - mounted transformer. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate removal of existing service feeders, emergency switchboard, transfer switch, transformer and associate wiring with hospital personnel. B. All power outages, shall be scheduled two weeks in advance with the Owner and performed during non - working hours (6:00 p.m. — 6:00 a.m.). Power shall be cut only at Owner approved times. 1.6 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS A. Switchboards and panelboards shall be designed, tested and assembled in accordance with the applicable standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), and the Underwriters Laboratories (UL). ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16200 -1 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION B. Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, descriptive literature, and complete description of the frame size, trip setting, class, fuse size and interrupting rating of all breakers and fused switches. Available spaces shall be identified. 1.7 EMERGENCY AND EXIT SYSTEM A. The emergency distribution system shall be in conformance with Article 700 of the National Electrical Code. The emergency and egress lighting system shall comply with Washington State Building Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING A. Single point grounding system design shall be provided by Lyncole Xit Grounding, contact Stephanie Woodbury at 1- 800 - 962 -2610 or 310 - 314 -4000, connected to building system ground. 2.2 EMERGENCY AND EXIT EGRESS LIGHTING SYSTEMS A. The emergency and exit system shall consist of all of the luminaires indicated as emergency, all of the exit signs shown on the drawings and other electrical loads indicated on drawings. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Distribution Equipment: 1. Cutler Hammer 2. Siemens (I.T.E.) 3. Square D PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GROUNDING A. Service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets, equipment, transformers, fixtures, the grounded circuit conductor, etc., shall be properly grounded in accordance with the latest issue of the National Electrical Code. Provide all bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps, etc., as required for complete grounding. Route ground conductors to provide the shortest and most direct path to the single point ground system. Ground connections shall have ICG Seattle CENTRAL 16200 -2 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION OFFICE B. Single point grounding system shall provide 5 Ohms to ground. t clean contact surfaces, tinned and sweated while bolting. Install all ground conductors in conduit. Bond the service equipment to a separate grounding electrode per Code requirements. Service grounding electrode conductors are not to be spliced or have a joint. Service neutral shall be connected to main switchboard ground bus. B. Provide a separate grounding conductor, securely grounded on each side of all raceways. Size in accordance with the National Electrical Code and route inside raceway. C. Provide grounding type bushings for all secondary feeder conduits that originate from the secondary section of the main distribution switchboard panel, and individually bond this raceway to the ground bus in the secondary section of the distribution panel. 3.2 SWITCHBOARD INSTALLATION (RE: 16210) A. Install switchboards, straight and level on housekeeping pads. (Minimum of 4" pad.) B. All feeder terminations shall be bolted and accessible. Group cables paralleling one another and arranged so as to permit easy insertion of a clamp -on ammeter on each cable. Rope cables together as required by manufacturer to maintain short circuit rating. C. Bond each section of switchboard housing and conduits entering switchboard to ground bus. 3.3 PANELBOARD INSTALLATION (RE: 16210) A. Installation panelboards with the top of the trim 6' -3" from the finished floor. B. Field check all panel board loading and reconnect circuits as required to provide balanced phase and line loads. C. Cables installed in wire gutters of panelboards shall be neatly bundled, routed, and supported. Minimum bending radii as recommended by the wire and cable manufacturer shall not be reduced. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 16200 -3 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. specified in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 SUBMITTALS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. �.. B. Division 16 Basic Electrical Material and Methods sections apply to work 1 A. Provide all switchboards, panelboards, and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes, as indicated by drawings and schedules, and a specified herein. I . B. Types of switchboard, panelboards, and enclosures required for the project include the following: I .. 1. Distribution switchboards. 2. Power - distribution panelboards. 3. Lighting and appliance panelboards. C. All switchboards, panelboards, switchgears, transformers, disconnect switches, starters, etc., shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer throughout the entire project. D. Fuses required in connection with installation of switchboards, panelboards, and enclosures are specified in another Division 16 section. E. Wires /cables, busway, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways required in conjunction with the installation of switchboards, panelboards, and enclosures are specified in other Division 16 sections. A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on switchboards, panelboards, and enclosures. B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for switchboards and panelboards showing connections to electrical power feeders and distribution branches. 16210 -1 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBUARDS C. Submit electrical room plan view drawings at I A " scale showing all equipment, end and front elevation views of switchboards and distribution panelboards showing: disconnects and ratings, buss work, conduit areas, dimensions, recommended housekeeping pad sizes, mounting of equipment supplied. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of switchboards, panelboards and enclosures, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects utilizing switchboards and panelboards similar to those required for this project. C. Codes and Standards 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Article 384 as applicable to installation, and construction of electrical panelboards and enclosures. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, "Electric Panelboards," and UL's 50, 869, 486A, 486B, 891, and 1053 pertaining to switchboards, panelboards, accessories and enclosures. Provide switchboard and panelboard units which are UL- listed and labeled. 3. Special -Use Markings: Provide switchboards and panelboards, constructed for special -use, with appropriate UL markings which indicated that they are suitable for special type of use /application. 4. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds Pub/No. 250, "Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum), Pub/No. PB 2, "Switchboards," Pub/No. PB 1, "Panelboards," and Pub/No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less." D. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with FS W -P -115, "Power Distribution Panel," pertaining to panelboards and accessories. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store switchboards and panelboards in clean dry space. Protect units from dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and traffic; where necessary to store outdoors, store electrical components above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16210 -2 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS i i 11 B. Handle switchboards and panelboards carefully to prevent internal components damage, breakage, denting, and scoring enclosure finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged units to equipment manufacturer. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of switchboards, panelboards and enclosures with installation of wires /cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceway work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS (800 to 2000 AMPS) A. Switchboards shall have an individually mounted main switch section (if required by drawings) feeding a group- mounted distribution sections. The switchboard shall be front accessible. The contractor shall furnish and completely install all switchboards as shown on the drawings and described in these specifications. B. The switchboard enclosures shall be a completely self - supporting structure with 90 -inch high vertical sections bolted together to form the required arrangement. Provide a barrier between each section of switchboard. All sections shall be front aligned and may be rolled, moved or lifted into the installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the addition of floor sills. The structure frame shall be die formed 12 -gauge steel with reinforcing corner gussets. Bolt -on enclosure covers shall be code gauge steel. All steels surfaces shall be chemically cleaned prior to painting. Exterior paint color shall be ANSI 61 Light Gray. C. All buss bars shall be silver- plated copper with a minimum 98% conductivity. They shall be mounted on supports of high impact non - tracking, insulating material, and shall be braced to withstand the mechanical force exerted during short circuit conditions. Provide a minimum 50,000 amperes RMS Symmetrical short circuit bracing or as specified on drawings. A full length ground buss shall be secured to each vertical section. All lugs shall be UL Listed for use with copper or aluminum cable with ampacity on 75 °C conductor temperature ratings. D. Branch- Fusible Switches: Switches shall be of the positive, quick make, quick break type, horsepower rated, over center mechanism and approved for distribution service. The external handle shall be suitable for padlocking in the OFF position and is interlocked with the switch cover to prevent access to the switch interior when the switch is in the ON position - an interlock override release shall be provided. Fusible switch units shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing the adjacent units and shall be capable of withstanding the available let - through short- circuit current and ampacity as shown on the drawings. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16210 -3 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS E. Main Circuit Breaker shall be 100% rated, with solid state (microprocessor) trip unit. The breaker shall be manually operated type frame and be stationary mounted. Line and load side circuit breaker connections are to be buss type. 1. Breaker shall have provision to padlock all primary breaker contacts in OFF position to prevent unauthorized breaker closing. Padlock provision shall accept up to 3 padlocks with '/4" to 3/8" diameter shanks. F. Switchboard and panelboards shall not be series rated to obtain short circuit requirements indicated on drawings. Appropriate labels shall be included in the equipment and indicated in submittal. The test UL listed combination ratings shall also be included in the UL recognized Component Directory DKSY2 (UL Yellow Book). 2.2 PANELBOARDS (600 AMPS OR LESS) A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated on drawings, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with proper numbers of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead -front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboards switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with anti -turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for use with copper conductors. Select unit with feeders connecting at top of panel. Equip with copper buss bars with not less than 98% conductivity, and with full -sized neutral buss; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connection. Provide molded -case main and branch circuit - breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicated when tripped. Where multiple -pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poses simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturers as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards. Employ bolt on breakers of not less than 25,000 sym AIC. C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead -front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown. Equipped with anti -turn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for use with copper conductors; construct unit for connecting feeders at top of panel; equip with copper buss bars, full -sized neutral bar, with bolt -in type heavy -duty, quick -make, quick- break, single -pole circuit breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Provide suitable lugs on neutral buss for each outgoing feeder required; and provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16210 -4 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS enclosures fabricated by same manufacturers as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards. Employ breakers of not less than 10,000 sym AIC at 120/208 volts; and 14,000 sym AIC at 277/480 volts. D. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and NEMA types as indicated, code -gage, minimum 16 -gage thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps, and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges and door swings as indicated. Equip with interior circuit - directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for surface mounting. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed. E. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory - assembled, molded -case circuit breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings including RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, and ampere ratings as indicated on the drawings. Construct with overcenter, trip -free, toggle -type operating mechanisms with quick -make, quick -break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position, and operating in ambient temperature of 40 °C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL /CU rated. F. When panelboards are series rated to obtain short circuit requirements, appropriate labels shall be included in the equipment and indicated in submittal. The test UL listed combination ratings shall also be included in the UL recognized Component Directory DKSY2 (UL Yellow Book). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine area and conditions under which switchboards, panelboards and enclosures are to be installed, and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS A. Install switchboards, panelboards, and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA.'s "Standards of Installation," and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16210 -5 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers' published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torque tightening requirements specified in UL Std 486A and B. C. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically anchored. D. Provide properly wired electrical connections for switchboards, and panelboards within the enclosures. E. Provide engraved, plastic laminate labels for all switchboards and panelboards indicating name, voltage, phase, wire and short circuit rating. In addition, each branch device on the switchboard shall be labeled (engraved). Refer to Section 16050 for more information. F. Provide typed panelboards circuit directory card upon completion of installation work to match as -built conditions and nomenclature indicated on engineering drawings and submit directories to the Engineer for review prior to mounting in panelboard. 3.3 SWITCHBOARD BASES 3.4 GROUNDING ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4- inches high and 2- inches larger in all directions than the overall dimensions of the support unit. 2. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad. 3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units. 4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate. A. Provide equipment grounding connections for switchboards and panelboard enclosures as indicated herein. Tighten connection to comply with torque tightening requirements specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 16210 -6 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS ti A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows: Li B. Refer to Section 16350 for additional grounding requirements. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Tests shall conform to International Electrical Testing Association (INETA) Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment." A. Infrared Inspection (After Energized) B. Switchboards and Panelboards: 16 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. The scan is to include all electrical switchboards and panelboards. 2. All equipment should be energized at normal load levels for at least 1 to 2 hours prior to being scanned. 3. Access covers are to be removed and reinstalled by the electrical Contractor for the Engineer to inspect and scan all electrical junctions, buss, and cable. 4. The IR Scan will be made using an AGEMA 720 camera. The camera shall provide infrared photos clearly indicating problem areas. 5. All problem areas will be noted as to location, description, and recommended solution by providing a typed report including infrared and Polaroid pictures of all problem areas. 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Inspect for physical damage and code violations. b. Inspect for proper alignment, anchorage and grounding. c. Inspect for proper identification of protective devices and switches. d. Check tightness of accessible bolted buss joints. e. Physically test all electrical or mechanical interlocks to assure proper function. f. Clean interior and insulator surfaces once a month prior to job completion. g. Inspect for proper operation of space heaters and thermostat settings (if they exist). 2. Electrical Tests: a. Measure insulation resistance of each buss section phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground. b. Check switchboards and panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. 16210 -7 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS 3.7 DEMONSTRATION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION B. Touch -up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes. A. Subsequent to wire and cable hook -ups, energize switchboards and panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this section. 1. `Electrical Requirements." 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes general purpose and specialty dry type transformer with winding rated 600V or less. B. Related Sections: The following Division 16 Sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1.3 SUBMITTALS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. "Electrical Identification" for signs associated with transformer installations. C. All switchboards, panelboards, switchgears, transformers, disconnect switches, starters, etc., shall be fabricated by same manufacturer throughout the entire project. A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data for each transformer, including dimensional plans view electrical rooms, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances, installed devices, and material lists. 2. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer differentiating between manufacturer - installed and field- installed wiring. 3. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer of transformers certifying that their products comply with the specified requirements. 4. Product Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests required by the referenced standards. 16220 -1 TRANSFORMERS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A firm member of NEMA who is regularly engaged in manufacturing components that comply with the requirements of these Specifications and that have been used on at least five projects of similar size and scope as this Project. B. Field Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization- submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated. C. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code." D. ANSI /IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/IEEE Standard including C2, "National Electrical Safety Code," and C57.12.80, "Terminology for Power and Distribution Transformers." E. UL Listing and Labeling: Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL. F. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Compliance (NRTL): Items provided under this section shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL A. Transformers: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled units of types specified, having characteristics and ratings as indicated on drawings. Units shall be designed for 60 Hz service. B. Cores: Grain oriented, non -aging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. D. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. E. Wiring compartment and termination shall be accessible by removing enclosure front panels. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16220 -2 TRANSFORMERS 2.2 GENERAL PURPOSE, DRY -TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA Standard ST 20 "Dry- Type" Transformers for General Applications. B. Windings: 2 winding type. Three phase transformers shall use one coil per phase in primary and secondary. C. Provide aluminum windings. D. Sound Level: Sound levels shall not exceed the following: 150 KVA and below, 50 db; above 150 KVA, 60 db. E. Transformers shall have the following features and ratings: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Enclosure: Indoor, ventilated, drip proof in electric rooms. 2. Enclosure: Outdoor, ventilated raintight, NEMA 3R in concourses. 3. Insulation Class: 185 °C class for 371/2 KVA transformers or smaller; 220 °C class for transformers larger than 371 KVA. 4. Insulation Temperature Rise: 150 °C maximum rise above 40 °C, for 220 °C class insulation; 115 °C maximum rise for 185 °C class insulation. 5. Taps: For transformer 3KVA and larger, full capacity taps in high - voltage winding as follows: a) 3 KVA through 30 KVA: Four 2.5% taps, two above and two below normal voltage. b) 30 KVA through 500 KVA: Four 2.5% taps, two above and two below rated normal voltage. c) 500 KVA through 1000 KVA: Four 2.5% taps, two above and two below rated normal voltage. F. Accessories: As follows: 1. Wall mounting brackets: Manufacturers standard brackets for transformers sized up to 15 KVA where wall mounting is indicated on drawings. 2. Core and coil assemblies 30 KVA and larger to be mounted on rubber vibration isolators on concrete pads. 2.3 NOISE ISOLATION TRANSFORMER A. Transformers: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled units of types specified, having characteristics and ratings as indicated on drawings. Units shall be designed for 60 Hz service. 16220 -3 TRANSFORMERS B. Transformer core shall be constructed of high grade grain oriented silicon steel. C. Coils shall use high grade magnet wire. Coils shall have clearly marked terminal pads attached to a rugged fiberglass termination strip. Winding s shall be vacuum impregnated with nonhydroscopic thermosetting varnish for superior strength and heat transfer. D. Transformer shall have [2] 2.5 percent above nominal and [4] 2.5 percent below nominal universal full capacity taps. E. Insulation system shall be UL Recognized at 220 degree C and shall be capable of continuous operation at 40 degree C ambient without windings exceeding 150 degree C temperature rise. Surface temperature rise shall not exceed UL 50 degree C limit. Wiring compartment temperature rise shall not exceed UL 35 degree C limit. F. Floor mount enclosure shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel for indoor use. Weathershield kits shall be available to modify enclosures for NEMA 3R outdoor use. G. Wiring compartment shall be sized for aluminum cable rated 125 percent of current, using long shanked crimp type connectors. Wiring compartment shall be accessible by removing enclosure front panel. H. Vibration from core and coil assembly shall be isolated from enclosure by neoprene vibration pads and sleeves. A flexible copper grounding strap shall connect core to enclosure. A schematic connection diagram shall be located on enclosure nameplate for quick referral. A premium electrostatic shield shall be included, consisting of a full width copper sheet placed between primary and secondary windings. Effective coupling capacitance shall be thirty picofarads. Average common mode noise attenuation shall be 120 db. J. A rugged filter shall provide an average 60 db normal mode noise attenuation. K. Surge suppression components shall be included to eliminate low voltage spikes and surges. 2.4 K -RATED TRANSFORMERS A. General: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. 16220 -4 TRANSFORMERS Hot Spot K Factor Rating Temperature NL NLP 220 °C 4.0 13.0 185 °C 3.2 9.6 150 °C 2.7 6.9 1 i B. Ratings: C. Construction: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 2. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall have a minimum of 6 -2.5% full capacity primary taps for 480V primaries. Exact voltages and taps to be as designed on the plans or the transformer schedule. Transformer insulation shall be a UL recognized 220 °C system. Neither the primary nor the secondary temperature shall exceed 220 °C at any point in the coils while carrying their full rating of non - sinusoidal load. The maximum temperature hot spot temperatures shall not exceed the following values for the indicated K factors, defined as the sum of fundamental and harmonic I (pu) 2h2 per ANSI/IEEE C57.110 -1986. Manufacturers rating K factors by average temperature rise alone shall not be acceptable. 1. All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. The core flux density shall be well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating caused by harmonic voltage distortion. Manufacturers shall submit verification of induction levels well below the usual level for standard transformers. 2. Transformers shall be common core construction. Transformers utilizing more than one core, or Scott -T connections shall not be acceptable. 3. The transformer secondary neutral terminal shall be sized for 200% of the secondary phase current. 4. The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished utilizing a continuous process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing, followed by electrostatic deposition of a polymer polyester powder coating and baking cycle to provide uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be ANSI 49. 5. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50 °C rise above 40 °C ambient. 16220 -5 TRANSFORMERS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 6. Transformers shall be supplied with a quality, full width electrostatic shield resulting in a maximum effective coupling capacitance between primary and secondary of 33 picofarads. With transformers connected under normal, loaded operating conditions, the attenuation of line noise and transients shall equal or exceed the following limits: Common Mode: Traverse Mode: 7. Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the following: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for cooling air circulation. B. Identify transformers in accordance with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.2 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows: 1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4 inches high and 2 inches larger in all directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit. 2. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad. 3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units. 16220 -6 0 to 1.5Hz - 120db 1.5 to 10 kHz - 90db 10 to 100 kHz - 65db 100kHz to 40db 1.5 to 10kHz - 52db 10 to 100kHz - 30db 15 to 50kVA - 45db 51 to 150kVA - 50db TRANSFORMERS h • ..' t � 11 11 11 I I 3.3 GROUNDING 4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate. A. Ground transformers and tighten connections to comply with torque tightening requirements specified in UL Standard 486A. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect for physical damage, broken insulation, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and general condition. B. Thoroughly clean unit prior to making any tests. C. Perform insulation- resistance test. Calculate dielectric absorption ratio and polarization index. Make measurements from winding -to- winding and winding - to- ground. Test voltages and minimum resistance shall be in accordance with Table below: Minimum do Test Voltage 1000 volts Recommended Minimum Insulation Resistance in Megohms 500 D. Verify taps and connect transformer to desired tap, if applicable. E. Energize primary winding with system voltage. Measure secondary voltage with the secondary load disconnected. Record results. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interiors and exteriors of accessible components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and construction debris. Touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16220 -7 TRANSFORMERS 3.6 PROTECTION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 162204 A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations within enclosure of each transformer throughout periods during which equipment is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. f SFORMERS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all switchgear, and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes, as indicated by drawings and schedules, and as specified herein. B. Wires /cables, busses, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways required in conjunction with the installation of switchgear, and enclosures are specified in other Division 16 sections. C. All switchboards, panelboards, switchgear, transformers, disconnect switches, starter, etc., shall be fabricated by same manufacturer throughout the entire project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on switchgear and enclosures. B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for switchgear showing connections to electrical power service and feeders. C. Submit electrical room plan, view drawings at 1/4" scale with all electrical equipment, end and front elevation views of switchgear showing circuit breakers and ratings, buss work, conduit areas, dimensions, recommended housekeeping pad sizes, mounting of equipment supplied. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of switchgear and enclosures, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for no less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing switchgear similar to those required for this project. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16230 -1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR C. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as applicable to installation, and construction of switchgear and enclosures. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, 869, 486A, 486B, 891, and 1053 pertaining to switchgear accessories and enclosures. Provide switchgear unit which are UL- listed and labeled. 3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds Pub/No. 250, "Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)," Pub/No. SG3, "Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers," and Pub/No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Equipment Rated 600 Volts or Less." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store switchgear in a clean dry space. Protect units from dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and traffic; where necessary to store outdoors, store electrical components above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping. B. Handle switchgear unit substations carefully to prevent internal components damage, breakage, denting, and scoring enclosure finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged units to equipment manufacturer. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of switchgear, panelboards, and enclosures with installation of wires /cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceway work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SWITCHGEAR A. The switchgear shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with applicable standards of NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE. The enclosure shall be completely self - supporting, front and rear angle forming a single metal enclosed structure. The side, top, and rear covers shall be code gauge steel and finished with medium gray (ANSI #61) paint applies over a rust inhibiting phosphate primer. Frame structure members shall be die - formed, 11 -gauge steel bolted together and reinforced at corners. Switchboard frames are to be suitable to be bolted to floor sills embedded in concrete. The equipment shall be totally adjusted and tested at the factory and sectionalized for shipment so that the largest section does not exceed 49 inches wide, 60 inches deep, and 90 inches high to enable installation at the job site. 1CG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16230 -2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR B. The switchgear shall be provided with load and line side compression terminations for incoming and outgoing cables. C. All switchgear bussing, devices, and connections shall be braced to withstand the maximum short circuit current available from the utility transformer. The switchgear shall be labeled to indicate the maximum available fault current rating, taking into account the structure, bussing, switchgear main disconnect(s), and switchgear branch circuit devices. The short circuit current rating of the switchgear(s) shall not be less than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. The switchgear branch circuit devices short circuit current rating shall be fully rated or determined by UL labeled series connected ratings. The short time withstand rating for the main breaker and buss shall be rated for 30 cycles. D. The switchgear buss shall be silver - plated copper. The switchgear bussing shall be of sufficient cross sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 for temperature rise. The buss shall have a maximum ampacity of 2000 amperes and extended the full length of the switchgear. The buss shall be 100% rated. Provisions shall be provided for future splicing of additional sections. The neutral buss shall be 100% rated. E. The switchgear distribution section buss shall be of the same material as the through -buss and shall be rated at 2000 amperes. The distribution section neutral plate shall be of copper provided with Cu/A1 lugs for the devices installed and future specified devices. F. A copper 1600A, (2) 0.25 x 3 -inch ground buss shall be secured to each vertical section structure. Ground buss shall extend entire length of switchboard and shall be equipped with a 250 KCMIL terminal for connection to purchaser's ground system. A lug strap shall be provided for each vertical feeder section. G. Switchboard shall be arranged for connection to the supply source by cable with UL service entrance label, incoming line isolation and shall have side barriers between sections. H. Provide cable supports for each vertical section. I. A -B -C buss arrangement (left -to -right, top -to- bottom, front -to -rear) shall be used throughout to assure convenient and safe testing and maintenance. Where special circuitry precludes this arrangement, buss bars shall be labeled. J. Main and riser busses shall be fully isolated from breaker, instrument and auxiliary compartments. Buss bar material shall be bolted copper. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16230 -3 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR K. Breaker primary connections shall be copper -to- copper, silver - plated on stationary breakers. L. All feeder device line and load connection straps shall be rated to carry continuous current rating of device frame (not trip rating). Load connection straps shall be insulated and extended beyond the main buss. M. Service Entrance shall comply with UL Service Entrance requirements: Service entrance label, incoming line isolation barriers, neutral connection to switchgear ground for solidly grounded wye systems. N. Incoming Line Section shall be rated as indicated in drawings. Main cable connection as shown on drawing. 2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Main Breaker: B. Feeder Circuit Breakers ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. The circuit breaker shall be molded case, ,manually operated type the frame and rating (100 %) size as shown on the associated drawings or as listed in the equipment tabulation. The trip unit shall be provided with long time, short time, and ground fault trip functions. The main breaker shall be provided with instantaneous trip. It shall also be provided with kirk -key interlocks. 2. Main and tie protective devices shall be low voltage power circuit breakers. All protective devices shall be UL listed. 1. Feeder circuit breakers shall be molded case circuit breakers with solid state (microprocessor) trip unit. The breaker shall be manually operated type frame and be stationary mounted. Line and load side circuit breaker connections are to be buss type. 2. Provisions for all controls, future accessories and communications shall be factory wired. 3. Breaker shall have provision to padlock all primary breaker contacts in OFF position to prevent unauthorized breaker closing. Padlock provision shall accept up to 3 padlocks with 1/4-inch to 3/8 -inch diameter shanks. 4. Stationary breaker(s) shall be individually mounted with power terminals to accommodate cable connections. 5. The highest breaker shall not exceed 6' -6" above finished floor when installed on 4" housekeeping pad. 16230 -4 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR POI L. 2.3 POWER MONITORING EQUIPMENT A. Circuit Breaker Monitor: The main circuit breaker shall have a fully functioning microprocessor based circuit monitoring device (CMD) for measuring true RMS currents and voltages. The CMDs shall have a display meter with an easy to use, full- function, electronic meter. The metering values shall be phase selectable, include RMS current for each phase and neutral, Voltage (L -L and L -N), Watts, Watt - Hours, VAR Hours, Volt -Amp hours, Peak Current, Watt Demand, Peak Watts Demand, Peak volt - amperes Demand, volt - amperes Demand, Power Factor Average. The breaker- mounted solid -state device shall have a single -line LCD display visible front of switchgear. All monitoring devices in each switch gear shall be tied into central monitor located above the main breaker. 2.4 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR A. Switchgear shall be provided with a Transient Voltage Surge Suppresser (TVSS) inside enclosure, and shall be UL 1449 Listed and CSA Approved. The TVSS shall be manufactured by Current Technology Inc., Advanced Protection Technologies, United Power or approved equal. B. Electrical Requirements: The operating voltage and configuration is 277/480 volts, three phase wye, with parallel installation for unlimited power protection. The surge suppression and noise filtering unit shall be a United Power model SPD3- S2- 160K -34 -F, or as specified on the drawings. C. Protection Modes: The unit's primary mode of protection shall be line -to- neutral (L -N). The secondary modes of protection shall be line -to- ground (L -G) and neutral -to- ground (N -G). D. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity: Based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41 -1991 standard 8 x 20 microsecond current waveform, theminimum repetitive surge current capacity per phase shall be no less than 150,000 amps L -L and L -N, and 75,000 amps L -G and N -G. E. Performance Ratings: The unit's published performance ratings shall be the UL 1449 suppression ratings. The UL 1449 suppression rating shall be 800 volts L- N, 800 volts L -G, and 800 volts N -G. F. High - Performance Suppression System: The unit shall include a multitude of selenium cells and arrays of fused non - linear voltage dependent metal oxide varistors. G. High- Frequency Extended Range Tracking Filter: The unit shall include a UL 1283 high- frequency extended range tracking filter, and shall provide minimum insertion loss as follows: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16230 -5 SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR Insertion Loss (db) NOTE: H. Internal Connections: All internal wiring associated with the suppression/filter system and subject to surge currents shall utilize low- impedance copper buss bar and/or #2 AWG copper conductor, or larger. I. Field Connections: The unit shall accommodate up to #2 AWG copper conductor with integral fused disconnect switch. J. Integral Test Point: The unit shall incorporate an integral test point allowing easy off -line diagnostic testing which verifies the operational integrity of the unit's suppression/filter system. K. Installation and Start-Up Testing: The manufacturer, or their agent, shall inspect the unit after installation for proper connection, and then perform a start-up test using appropriate meters and test equipment. Testing shall include a demonstration of the unit's suppression capability using a transient generator. This testing shall be accomplished off -line. L. Annual Maintenance Testing: The manufacturer, or their agent, shall offer an annual test on the unit. Such testing shall include a demonstration of the unit's suppression capability using a transient generator and appropriate test equipment. 2.5 MIMIC BUS A. Provide mimic bus on switchgear, accurately depicting phase bus work and connections, meters and disconnecting means. Provide bus ' /a" thick, heat and impact resistant, beveled bakelite %2" wide secured to sheet metal with cadmium plated screws. Bus on the normal switchgear is to be colored black and red on the emergency switchgear. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE Attenuation Frequency: 100 kHz 1MHz 10 MHz Insertion Loss (Ratio): 50:1 350:1 500:1 34 51 54 16230 -6 100 MHz 250:1 48 Standardized insertion loss data obtained utilizing MIL -STD- E220A 50 ohm insertion loss methodology. SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHGEAR 3.3 SWITCHGEAR BASES A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16230 -7 A. Examine area and conditions under which switchboards, panelboards and enclosures are to be installed, and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Install switchboards, panelboards, and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standards of Installation," and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers' published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and tenminals to comply with torque tightening requirements specified in UL Std 486A and B. C. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically anchored. D. Provide properly wired electrical connections for switchgear. E. Provide engraved, plastic laminate labels for all switchgear indicating name, voltage, phase, wire and short circuit rating. In addition, each branch device on the switchgear shall be labeled (engraved). Refer to Section 16050 for more information. F. Provide typed panelboard's circuit directory card upon completion of installation work to match as -built conditions and nomenclature indicated on engineering drawings and submit directories to the Engineer for review prior to mounting in panelboard. 1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4- inches high and 2- inches larger in all directions that the overall dimensions of the supported unit. SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR 3.4 GROUNDING 2. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and comers of pad. 3. Install reinforcing bars, channel sills embedded into concrete to tie to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units. 4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate. A. Provide equipment grounding connections for switchboards and panelboard enclosures as indicated herein. Tighten connection to comply with torque tightening requirements specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. B. Refer to Section 16350 for additional grounding requirements. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Tests shall conform to International Electrical Testing Association (INETA) Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment." OFFICE A. Infrared Inspection (After Energized): ICG Seattle CENTRAL 1. The scan is to include all electrical switchgear field connections to buss bars and loads. 2. All equipment should be energized at normal load levels for at least 1 to 2 hours prior to being scanned. 3. Access covers are to be removed and reinstalled by the electrical contractor for the Engineer to inspect and scan all electrical junctions, buss, and cable. 4. The IR Scan will be made using an AGEMA 720 camera. The camera shall provide infrared photos clearly indicating problem areas. 5. All problem areas will be noted as to location, description, and recommended solution by providing a typed report including infrared and Polaroid pictures of all problem areas. B. Switchgear: 1. Visual and mechanical Inspection: a. Inspect for physical damage and code violations. b. Inspect for proper alignment, anchorage and grounding. c. Inspect for proper identification of protective devices and switches. d. Check tightness of accessible bolted buss joints. e. Physically test all electrical or mechanical interlocks to assure proper function. 16230 -8 1] SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16230 -9 Circuit Breakers: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Inspect for physical damage. b. Mechanical operational test will be made in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. c. Check tightness of all hardware connections. d. Check cell fit and element alignment. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Measure contact resistance. b. Check the following functions by primary current injection. (1) Measure minimum long -time pickup when possible. (2) Measure long -time delay at three (3) times long -time pickup current. (3) Measure short-time pickup. (4) Measure short-time delay at 1' /z times short-time pickup current. (5) Measure instantaneous pickup. (6) Measure ground fault pickup. (7) Measure ground fault delay at 1 'A times ground fault pickup. (8) Check trip unit reset operation. c. Perform insulation resistance test phase -to- ground, phase -to -phase and across open contacts. d. Metering and instrumentation (1) Visual and mechanical inspection. (a) Check all devices for physical damage and connection tightness. (b) Verify meter nameplate designation. e. Electrical Tests (1) Check calibration of all panel meters at zero, mid -scale and full -scale deflections by transfer standard. (2) Check calibration of watt -hour meters for proper registration by use of rotating standard at light, heavy, and 50% power conditions. (3) Verify all instrument multipliers and scale factors. f. Clean interior and insulator surfaces. g. Inspect for proper operation of space heaters and thermostat settings (if they exist). 2. Electrical Tests: a. Measure insulation resistance of each buss section phase -to -phase and phase -to- ground. b. Check switchgear for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. SERVICE ENTRANCE SWITCHGEAR 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. B. Touch -up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 16230 -10 A. Subsequent to wire and cable hook -ups, energize switchgear and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. SE RV IC E; E NTRAN CE SWITCHGEAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all circuit and motor disconnect switch work including fusing, electrical connections to motors, appliance and mechanical equipment as indicated on the drawings and schedules. B. Types of circuit and motor disconnect switches in this section include the following: 1. Equipment disconnects. 2. Appliance disconnects. 3. Motor - circuit disconnects. C. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following: D. All switchboards, panelboards, switchgears, transformers, disconnect switches, starters, etc., shall be fabricated by same manufacturer throughout the entire project. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. To resistive heaters. 2. From electrical source to motor starters. 3. From motor starters to motors. 4. To lighting fixtures. 5. To converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, rheostats, and similar current adjustment features of equipment. 6. To grounds including earthing connections. 7. To master units of communication, signal, and alarm. 8. To panelboards, contactors, time clocks and similar equipment. 16260 -1 MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND FUSES 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on circuit and motor disconnect switches, fuses, and equipment connectors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment shall be in compliance with codes and standards referenced in Section 16010. B. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches." Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches which have been UL listed and labeled. C. Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors," including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements for NEMA Stds Pub/No. KS 1, "Enclosed Switches," and No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)." E. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1, "Low - Voltage Cartridge Fuses 600 Volts or Less." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Furnish and install safety switches as required for motor outlets or other equipment. Switches shall be of size, number of poles, and fused or non - fused, as required for job conditions and the National Electrical Code. B. Switches shall be equipped with fuse contacts and jaws which ensure positive fuse and jaw contact by means of reinforcing spring clips of other approved means. All current carrying parts shall be silver - plated. Hinges shall be non - current carrying. Switches shall be so designed that they can be locked in either open or closed position. C. All safety switches shall be NEMA 1 enclosed Type "HD" (heavy duty) quick - make, quick - break, and have interlocking cover with handle that may either be front or side operating with padlocking provisions. Provide NEMA 3R weather proof enclosures where indicated on the drawings or exposed to exterior or damp locations. Incorporate rejection clips where used with Class "R" fuses. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16260 -2 MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND FUSES z. D. Fusible Switches: Heavy duty switches, with fuses of classes and current ratings indicated on drawings. See Section "2.3" for Fuse specifications. Where current limiting fuses are indicated, provide switches with non - interchangeable feature suitable only for current limiting type fuses. E. Non - fusible Disconnects: Heavy duty switches of classes and current ratings as indicated on drawings. F. Double -Throw Switches: Heavy duty switches of classes and current rating as indicated on drawings. G. Bolted Pressure Switches: Bolted pressure switches conforming to and listed under UL Standard 977; single or double -throw arrangement as indicated. For fusible units provide fuses as indicated on drawings. H. Accessories: 2.2 CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT A. General: For each electrical connection indicated provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat - shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wirenuts. All other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated. B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fitting of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with NEC requirements for raceways. Provide products complying with Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section "Raceways," and in accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and fittings: 1. Electrical Interlocks: Provide number and arrangement of interlock contacts in switches as indicated on drawings or specified elsewhere in specifications. 2. Special Enclosure Material: Provide special enclosure material as follows for switches indicated on drawings: a) Stainless Steel Type 304. b) Heavy case aluminum. 3. Captive Fuse Pullers: Provide built -in pullers arranged to facilitate fuse removal. 16260 -3 MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND FUSES C. Wires, Cables, and Connectors: 2.3 FUSES a) Rigid steel conduit. b) Rigid metal conduit fittings. c) Electrical metallic tubing. d) EMT fittings. e) Flexible metal conduit. f) Flexible metal conduit fittings. g) Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. h) Liquid tight flexible metal conduit fittings. 1. General: Provide wires, cables and connectors complying with Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section "Wires and Cables." 2. Wires /Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires /cables (conductors) for electrical connections which match, including sizes and rating, of wires /cables which are supplying electrical power. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 °C (68 °F). 3. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals and are recommended for use by equipment manufacturer for intended applications. 4. Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, wirenuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time - current and peak let- through current characteristics, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and constructed in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations. B. Class RK1 dual element time -delay fuses: Provide UL Class RK1 current limiting time -delay fuses rated 600 - volts, (250 volts where specified), 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting circuit breakers, motors and panelboards. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16260 -4 MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND FUSES C. Class RK5 dual element time -delay fuses: Provide UL Class RK5 current limiting time -delay fuses rated 600 volts, (250 volts where specified), 60 Hz, with 200,000 i RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting circuit breakers, motors, and transformers. f. 1 D. Class L time -delay fuses: Provide UL Class L time -delay fuses rated 600 volts, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate circuit and motor disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Install disconnect switches for use with motor -driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Install electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including wires /cables, raceway and equipment installation, as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work. C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment. D. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires and terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "nicking" copper conductors while skinning wire. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16260 -5 MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND FUSES F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torque tools, including torque screwdriver, beam -type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torque values contained in UL 486A. H. Provide PVC - coated conduit and fittings for highly - corrosive atmospheres. I. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections, and other electrical equipment connections, where subject to movement and vibration. J. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration, and also where connections are subjected to one or more of the following conditions: K. Fasten identification markers to each electrical power supply wire /cable conductor which indicates their voltage, phase and feeder number in accordance with Division 16 section "Electrical Identification." Affix markers on each terminal conductor, as close as possible to the point of connection. L. Provide flexible metal conduit or Type "S" rubber cords, pigtails, caps, etc., as required to constitute an operating system. All flexible cords shall have a grounding conductors. Ground all equipment. See Section 16350 "Grounding" for additional requirements. M. Prior to roughing -in, refer to all equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for details of equipment connections. Provide receptacles as required to match the cord caps on the equipment furnished. Provide either direct wiring or receptacles for final connection to equipment as required for the particular equipment furnished regardless of the type of outlet shown on the plans. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Exterior location. 2. Moist of humid atmosphere where condensation can be expected to accumulate. 3. Corrosive atmosphere. 4. Water spray. 5. Dripping oil, grease, or water. 16260 -6 MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND FUSES 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FUSES A. Install fuses as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC, and NEMA standards for installation of fuses. B. Coordinate work including electrical wiring, as necessary, to interface installation of fuses with other trades. C. Install fuses in fused switches. D. Provide hinged lockable NEMA -1 fuse cabinet in each main electrical switchgear room. Provide spare fuse of size and type for every five (5) fuses installed. A minimum of three (3) spare fuses shall be provided for each size installed. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground for electrical disconnect switches. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Except as otherwise indicated, do not test switches by operating them under load. However, demonstrate switch operation through six opening/closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation, and for verification of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 16260 -7 MOTOR DISCONNECTS AND FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attachment "C ": ICG Internal Document #170 - 100 -006 - Grounding Practice, 3/3/99, standard. Where contradictions occur between this section and the ICG Standard, the ICG Standard shall apply. B. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. C. Division -16 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. D. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding and bonding work specified elsewhere in these specifications. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Connect to the building system ground. Single point grounding system shall be provided by Lyncole Xit Grounding, contact Stephanie Woodbury at 1- 800 -962- 2610 or 310 - 214 -4000. Where contradictions occur between this section and Xit Grounding system design, Xit's design shall apply. B. Extent of electrical grounding and bonding work is indicated by drawings and schedules and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment. C. Type of electrical grounding and bonding work specified in this section includes the following: 1. Solidly grounded. D. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this section includes the following: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Metal water pipe attachment. 2. Building frames - structural steel attachment. 3. Grounding electrodes. 4. Separately derived systems. 5. Raceways. 6. Service equipment. 7. Enclosures. 8. Equipment. 9. Lighting Standards. 16350 -1 GROUNDING E. Refer to other Division -16 sections for wires /cables, electrical raceways, boxes and fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction with electrical grounding and bonding work; not work of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bounding products and associated accessories. B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for electrical grounding and bonding work which indicates layout of ground rods, location of system grounding electrode connections, routing of grounding electrode conductors, also include diagrams for circuits and equipment grounding connections. C. Submit ground riser diagram for entire project. Show bus bars with transformer ground electrode conductors, etc. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with electrical grounding work similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, and NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to systems, circuits and equipment. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards No.'s 467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment ", and 869 "Electrical Service Equipment ", pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. In addition, comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide grounding and bonding products which are UL- listed and labeled for their intended usage. 3. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16350 -2 GROUNDING PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING 1 A. Materials and Components: 1. General: Except as otherwise noted, provide electrical grounding and bonding system; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables /wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated provide products which comply with NEC, UL, and IEEE requirements and with established industry standards for those applications indicated. 2. Conductors: Unless otherwise noted, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding system connections that match power supply wiring materials and are sized according to NEC. �._ 3. Flexible Jumper Strap: Flexible flat conductor, 480 strands of 30 -gauge bare copper wire; 3 /," wide, 9-1/2" long; 48,250 CM. Select braid with holes sized for 3/8" diameter bolts, and protect braid with copper bolt hole ends. 4. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp manufacturer's for indicated applications. B. Ground Electrodes: I 1. Main Grounding Electrodes: The electrodes shall be the building' system cold water pipe and building steel bond shall be provided. Refer to drawings for additional requirements. 2. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat - shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturer's. l . 3. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds; and for methods used in correcting welding work. Provide welded connections where grounding conductors connect to I_ building steel or underground grounding. C. Grounding Connections: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Two styles of connections shall be available: one primarily for indoor and the other for outdoor applications. Both styles shall be manufactured by Cadweld or approved equal. 16350 -3 GROUNDING ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16350 -4 a) Connections to be used outdoors shall be suitable for exposure to the elements of direct burial without degradation over the lifetime of the grounding system. b) Connections to be made in finished buildings or confined spaces shall use the low smoke, low emission CADWELD®EXOLON® process which is metallurgically equal to the above connection. 2. Molds shall be made from graphite or other material withstanding welding temperatures and shall be designed to provide an average life of not less than 50 exothermic welds under normal conditions. 3. Molds shall bear permanent marking, indicating the name of the manufacturer, the mold model, the type and size of welding mixture compatible with the welding process, and the size of the conductor. Instructions detailing general safety information, and welding procedures shall be provided with each mold. a) The installer is prohibited from using a mold from one manufacturer with a different manufacturer's welding mixture. 4. Containers for weld metal shall be moisture resistant and packaged to prevent damage or spillage during shipping. Weld metal and starting material shall be pre- measured and packaged together in a non - absorbing container. The starting material, if used, shall be at the bottom of the container to allow the starting material to be dispersed uniformly over the top of the welding mixture when placed in the crucible for a more uniform ignition and exothermic welding process. 5. Starting material, if used, shall consist of aluminum and copper and iron oxides. It shall not contain phosphorous or any caustic, toxic or explosive substances. Weld metal used for grounding connections shall contain copper oxide, aluminum, and not less than 3 percent tin as the wetting agent. Weld metal used for cathodic connections shall not contain tin, but shall contain vanadium. A minimum of 80 percent of the weld metal shall screen out between 30 and 140 mesh. a) Weld metal packages shall be identified as to the part number and type of metals to be connected, such as copper to copper or copper to steel. Weld metal tube caps shall be color coded to indicate the alloy of the weld metal. b) Weld metal packages shall be clearly marked to indicate whether they are for standard outdoor or low emission or cathodic applications. GROUNDING u PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and bonding connections are to be made and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS A. General: Install electrical grounding and bonding systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable portions of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements. B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding and bonding system work with other work. C. Weld grounding conductors to underground grounding electrodes. D. Ground electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to grounding electrodes. E. Ground each separately- derived system neutral to: 1. Separate grounding electrode. 2. Building steel and cold water pipe. 3. Building ground ring. F. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed non- current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems. G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment grounding conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Lugs for cable size No. 2 and larger shall be Cadweld type GL or approved equal. H. Connect grounding electrode conductors to 1 -inch diameter, or greater, metallic cold water pipe using a suitably sized ground clamp. Provide connections to flanged piping to street side of flange. I. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16350 -5 GROUNDING connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. J. Install braided type bonding jumpers with code -sized ground clamps on water meter piping to electrically bypass water meters. K. Route grounding connections and conductors to ground and protective devices in shortest and straightest paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises. L. Apply corrosion - resistant finish to field- connections, buried metallic grounding and bonding products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, which are subjected to corrosive action. M. Install all connectors on clean metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. N. Provide separate equipment grounding conductor for all raceways. Conduit shall not be acceptable as equipment ground. O. All insulated ground "IG" receptacles shall be provided with an equipment grounding conductor and insulated ground conductor from the panel board to the outlet. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 5 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division -16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent, location, and details of lighting fixture work are indicated on drawings and in schedules. I .. B. Types of lighting fixtures in this section include the following: L 1. Fluorescent. 2. Incandescent and quartz. 3. Other lamps as noted on fixture schedule. C. Fixture: A complete lighting unit, including lamps and parts required to distribute light. Exact ceiling construction shall be verified prior to ordering. Minor changes in ceiling construction shall not be an extra cost to the project. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. All materials, accessories, and any other equipment necessary for the complete and proper installation of all lighting fixtures included in this Contract shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2. Fixtures shall be manufactured in strict conformance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. 3. Specifications and scale drawings are intended to convey the salient features, function and character of the fixtures only, and do not undertake to illustrate or set forth every item or detail necessary of the work. 4. Minor details, not usually indicated on the drawings nor specified, but that are necessary for the proper execution and completion of the fixtures, shall be included, the same as if they were herein specified or indicated on the drawings. 5. The Owner shall not be held responsible for the omission or absence of any detail, construction feature, etc., which may be required in the production of the fixtures. The responsibility of accurately fabricating the fixtures to the fulfillment of this specification rests with the Contractor. 16455 -1 LIGHTING FIXTURES 1.3 SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings, samples, and prototypes as specifically instructed below. A. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: B. Samples: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16455 -2 1. Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with a separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in "luminaire type" alphabetical or numerical order, with proposed fixture and accessory catalog numbers clearly indicated on each sheet. 2. Manufacturer's dimensioned scale drawings showing in complete detail, the fabrication of all lighting fixtures including overall and detail dimensions, finishes, metal thickness, glass thickness. Also including type, fabrication methods, support method, ballasts, transformers, sockets, type of shielding, reflectors, trims, hinges, gaskets, provisions for relamping, and all other information to show compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. Test Data: Submit certified test data and reports including photometric data rendered by an independent testing laboratory developed according to methods of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America as follows: a. For down and semi -down lights used for general illumination: (1) coefficients of utilization; (2) candlepower data, presented graphically and numerically, in 5 degree increments (5 degrees, 10 degrees, 15 degrees, etc.). Data developed for up and down quadrants normal, parallel and a t 22 ''A degree, 45 degree, 167 'h degree to lamps if light output is asymmetric: (3) zonal lumens stated numerically in 10 degree increments (5 degrees, 15 Degrees, etc.) as stated above. 4. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each lighting fixture, accessory and also include "trouble- shooting" maintenance guide. In addition to the product data and shop drawings, a maintenance manual in accordance with general requirements of division 1 shall be provided. 1. Samples may be requested for any or all of the fixtures specified. 2. Submit for approval samples called for by the Engineer when and where directed, the components tagged with the name of the project, and provided with a cord and plug, and specified lamps. Samples will not be returned. Allow two weeks from the date of receipt for thorough examination and review by the Architect and Engineer. 3. All fixture samples require a submission of material finish samples, component approval, and a complete operating prototype fixture to be reviewed prior to shipment of any material to the project. LIGHTING FIXTURES L 4. Fixtures under the contract shall be identical with the approved sample fixture. No fixture used as a sample will be allowed to be installed on the project. 5. In the event the submissions are disapproved, the fixtures will be returned to the contractor to immediately make a new submission of fixture or fixtures meeting the contract requirements. 6. All costs associated for samples are to be paid by the Contractor. No additional costs to the Owner for samples or mockups will be allowed. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for lighting fixtures showing connections to electrical power panels, switches, dimmers, controllers, and feeders. Differentiate between portions of wiring which are manufacturer installed and portions which are field installed. D. Shop drawings and samples requested shall be submitted for approval before fabrication. Any material produced prior to the approval of shop drawings or samples, and not in conformance with the Contract Documents, shall be disapproved with the Contractor bearing full responsibility and cost. E. When required and requested by the Architect and Engineer, samples submitted as per above shall be subjected to photometric, thermal, mechanical, electrical or water testing at an independent test laboratory at no expense to the Owner. F. No variation from the general arrangement and details indicated on the drawings shall be made on the shop drawings unless required to suit the actual conditions on the premises, and then only with the written acceptance of the Architect. All variations must be clearly marked as such on the drawings submitted for approval. G. Provide field mockups for verification purpose of illumination levels and aesthetics as directed by architect or Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. A minimum of two mockups is anticipated. H. Manufacturers or light fixtures not listed on the fixture schedule must be pre - qualified prior to bid. For approval of all manufacturer /fixture substitutions, the fabricator shall comply to specifications herein and as outlined below: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Manufacturer shall have not less than five years experience in design and manufacture of lighting fixtures of the type and quality shown. Prequalification submissions must include a list of completed projects and data catalogue pages and drawings indicating length of experience. 2. Manufacturer shall also submit a prototype sample of each fixture for review by the Architect and Engineer. Prototype samples shall be sufficiently detailed and operational to allow evaluation of compliance with the salient features of the specification. Preliminary design or shop drawings shall not be accepted in place of prototype samples. 16455 -3 LIGHTING FIXTURES 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3. Printed physical, electrical and photometric data clearly highlighted to show the differences between the proposed substitutions and the specified light fixtures. 4. Photometric information in IES standard format on a 3Y2 inch disk. 5. Point by point lighting calculations of areas affected by proposed substitution. 6. The Architect and Engineer shall determine whether the prototype sample complies with the specifications and shall reserve the right to disqualify any bidders. A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting fixtures of sizes, types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. InstaIler's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with lighting fixture work similar to that required for this project. C. Codes and Standards: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 220, 225, 250, 410, and 500 as applicable to installation and construction of building lighting fixtures. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds Pub/No's LE 1 and LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment. 3. IES Compliance: Comply with IES RP -1 pertaining to office lighting practices and RP -15, regarding selection of illuminance values for interior office lighting. 4. UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards, including UL 486A and 486B, pertaining to lighting fixtures. Provide lighting fixtures and components which are UL- listed and labeled. 5. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association standards and carry the CBM label. D. Special Listing and Labeling: Provide fixture for damp locations, wet locations, recessed in rated ceilings and walls that are UL listed and labeled for specific use. E. Materials and Equipment: 1. Materials, equipment, and appurtenances as well as workmanship provided under this Section shall conform to the highest commercial standards, and as specified and as indicated on drawings. Fixture parts and components 16455 -4 LIGHTING FIXTURES not specifically identified or indicated shall be made of materials most appropriate to their use or function and as such resistant to corrosion and thermal and mechanical stresses encountered in the normal application and function of the fixtures. 2. All fixtures shall be manufactured to a consistent level of quality. Size, color, and component parts shall be identical for all fixtures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, AND WARRANTY A. Deliver lighting fixtures in factory- fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect fixtures from damage. B. Store lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well - ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperature, humidity, laid flat and blocking off ground. C. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new. D. Provide a 5 -year warranty of failure in materials, workmanship, ballast, etc., in addition to and not limited to other rights the Owner may have under the contract documents. A full warranty shall apply for the first year and a prorated warranty for the last four years. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with other work including wires /cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling requirements. B. Sequence lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The Contractor shall base bid for lighting fixtures on the manufacturers' listed on the fixture schedule. B. Alternate manufacturer's identification by means of manufacturer's names is to establish basic features and performance standards. Alternate manufacturers' or substitutions must meet or exceed the standards of the primary manufacturer listed. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16455 -5 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.2 WIRING C. Qualifications: The contractor is allowed 60 days after the contract has been awarded to submit independent photometric tests and samples for all alternate fixtures. If these fixtures fail to comply with the specification requirements at that time, the Contractor will furnish acceptable fixtures at no additional cost to the Owner and with no delay to the project. D. Any submittals for cost reduction alternates or value engineering shall include unit prices for the specified manufacturer, the specified equal manufacturer, and the proposed alternates. A. All wiring shall comply with the following: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. All wiring devices within lighting fixtures or from the fixture to the splice with the project branch circuit wiring shall be as specified below. 2. Wiring between fluorescent lampholders and associated operating and starting equipment shall be of similar or heavier gauge than the leads furnished with the approved types of ballasts with equal or better insulating and heat resisting characteristics. 3. Wire leads to the receptacle or connector of any side -prong incandescent lamp shall be SF -2 (silicone rubber insulated) stranded wire (minimum No. of 18 AWG). Wire within housing entirely covered with flexible woven fiberglass sleeve. 4. Wiring shall be protected with tape or tubing at all points where abrasion may occur. 5. Wiring shall be concealed within the fixture construction except where design or mounting dictates otherwise. 6. Connections of wires to terminals of lampholders and other accessories shall be made in a neat and workwomanlike manner and electrically and mechanically secure with no protruding or loose strands. The number of wires extending to or from the terminals of a lampholder or other accessory shall not exceed the number which the accessory is designed to accommodate. 7. Joints in wiring within lighting fixtures and connections of the fixture wiring to the wiring of the building shall be specified in Division 16. 8. Wiring channels and wireways shall be free from projections and rough or sharp edges throughout, and all points or edges over which conductors must pass and may be subject to injury or wear shall be rounded and bushed. 9. Insulated bushings shall be installed at points of entrance and exit of flexible wiring. 16455 -6 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.3 MARKING OF FIXTURES A. Fixtures equipped for operation of rapid start lamps shall be clearly marked "USE RAPID START LAMPS ONLY." B. Fixtures designed for operation of lamps below the rated enclosure maximum shall be clearly marked "Lamp Watts Not to Exceed " to maintain the design energy load. 2.4 SOUND TRANSMISSION Sound transmission through the light fixture units, when spaced as indicated on drawings; shall be sufficiently attenuated to maintain speech privacy between adjoining spaces. Contractor to provide insulating battens around the fixtures where sound transmission levels are unacceptable. 2.5 THERMAL PROTECTORS A. Provide thermal protectors as required by the N.E.C., or as required by local Code, to prevent operation of lighting fixtures in enclosed spaces or adjacent to combustible materials at temperatures at or above 90 °C (194 °F). B. Fixture approved for operation in fire- resistant material at temperatures up to 150 °C (302 °F) shall be plainly marked. C. All incandescent fixtures shall be provided with thermal protectors except where otherwise indicated or where approved for operation without such protectors by the N.E.C. and by the local building authority. 2.6 LAMPS 10. Junction boxes attached to lighting fixtures shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Electrical Code and approved for the number of conductors indicated on the drawings. Supplementary junction boxes shall be installed where required to comply with Code. 11. When exposed, all junction boxes and conduit to be painted as per the Architects' direction at no additional cost to the Owner. A. Provide lamps as shown in the fixture schedule or as modified in reviewed shop drawings. B. Lamps as specified for the individual luminaries or lighting equipment shall be delivered and installed in fixtures and lighting equipment leaving these completely lamped and in normal operating condition. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16455 -7 LIGHTING FIXTURES 1. General Electric Lighting 2. Osram Sylvania, Inc. 3. Philips Lighting 4. Venture Lighting International, Inc. 5. Others only where specified. C. Thirty -two watt fluorescent lamps, unless otherwise designated, shall be of the rapid start type and deliver not less than 2,900 initial lumens for straight lamps. Fluorescent lamps are triphosphor, color temperature 3,000 °K, with a color rendering index of not less than 85, unless noted otherwise. D. Provide all incandescent lamps inside frosted, unless noted otherwise. E. Lamps produced by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 2.7 LAMPHOLDERS A. Lamp sockets shall be rigidly attached to fixture enclosure or husk. B. Incandescent lamp sockets shall be made of heavy duty heat - resistant porcelain. C. Plastic or metal sheet sockets are not to be used. D. Fluorescent lamp sockets operated with an open circuit voltage in excess of 300 volts shall be of the safety type, and open the supply circuit when the lamp is removed from the sockets. E. Provide nickel plated brass or nickel and silver plated contacts in all lampholders for tungsten halogen lamps and mogul base incandescent lamps. F. All lamp sockets shall be suitable for the indicated lamps and shall be set so that lamps are positioned in optically correct relation to all lighting fixture components. All adjustable sockets shall be preset at the factory for lamp specified. 2.8 FLOURESCENT LAMP BALLASTS A. All fluorescent lamp ballasts shall conform to the following: 1. All ballasts shall be "Class P" indicating approved integral ballast protection. Fuses in the primary leads shall be provided in addition to the "Class P" ballast. 2. All ballasts shall be of the high power factor type, energy saving, "super low heat" as manufactured by Universal, Motorola or approved equal. 3. All fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic, capable of maintaining a constant light output on all rapid start fluorescent lamps over operating ICG Seattle CENTRAL 16455 -8 LIGHTING FIXTURES OFFICE range of 90V to 145V (120V ballast). The total harmonic distortion (THD) of the ballast shall be less than 15 percent of the full light output current level. The ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats cathode filaments and then ignites the lamp. The ballast shall withstand line transients as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, category A; crest factor less than 1.4; power factor greater than 90% and operating frequency of 20KHZ or greater without a visible flicker. The case temperature shall not exceed 25 °C temperature rise over 40 °C ambient. Ballasts shall comply with FCC regulations Part 18, Class A. 4. U.L. and ANSI specifications with labels and/or symbols of approval by the U.L. and of certification by the Certified Ballast Manufacturers (C.B.M.) as tested by the E.T.L. 5. The component parts shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the latest requirements of the N.E.C. 6. Ballasts shall provide safe and reliable operation of the specified lamps. 7. Whenever possible, provide two lamp ballasts for fixtures with two fluorescent lamps or multiples of two lamps. 8. Identical ballasts shall be installed within each fixture type. 9. Fixture design, fabrication, and assembly shall be such as to prevent overheating or cycling of lamps and ballasts under normal operating temperature variations. 10. Provide the lowest sound rating available for the lamps specified and clearly show their respective sound ratings. Ballasts found by the Architect or Engineer to be unduly noisy shall be replaced without charge prior to acceptance of the work. 11. Dimmer type ballasts shall be of a design recognized and approved under the U.L. component program. These ballasts must coordinate with the dimming control devices specified for the particular application. 12. Where ballasts are remote from fixture housing, provide suitable enclosure for installation with the conduit and wire from the ballast to the lamp socket clearly marked "Caution ", "High Voltage ". All remote ballasts to be installed within the recommended distance from the lamp socket as per the manufacturer with access plates for maintenance and on neoprene pads for sound absorption. B. Ballasts manufactured by the following are acceptable: C. Contractor to coordinate ballast line side voltage with branch circuit voltage as shown on Contract Drawings. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Motorola 2. Advance 3. Universal 4. Approved equal or as specified in drawings. 16455 -9 LIGHTING FIXTURES CLASS MIN. WEIGHT OF COATING (mg/sq.in) SERVICE % MINIMUM REFLECTIVITY SPECULAR DIFFUSE MI SI 0.5 7.5 Normal interior service. Medium service, interior industrial, exterior when operated within glass. 83 82 75 73 2.9 REFLECTORS A. Reflectors and reflecting cones or baffles shall be as follows: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Absolutely free of any tooling marks including spinning lines, indentations caused by riveting or other assembly techniques. 2. No rivets, springs, or other hardware visible after installation. 3. First quality polished, buffed and anodized finish, " Alzak" or approved equal. 4. Specular finish color as selected by the Architect or as specified in the fixture schedule. 5. All reflector and baffles of modified elliptical contour, with no apparent brightness from above 40° above the nadir, with no lamp image or any part of the lamp visible from above 40° above the nadir. 6. Cone flange formed as an integral part of the cone and with identical color and finish. Width of the flange covers all ceiling openings with out light leaks or hardware visible. B. Other aluminum reflectors shall be as follows: 1. Formed and finished as noted on the Drawings and elsewhere in the Specification. 2. Reflectors free from blemishes, scratches, or indentations which would distort their reflective function. 3. Finished by means of the "Alzak" process or approved equal unless otherwise noted. C. Samples of colored aluminum finishes (black, brass, bronze, etc.) shall be submitted for approval before fabrication. D. All reflectors shall be finished according to the minimum requirements outlined • below. 16455 -10 LIGHTING FIXTURES 1 CLASS SE MIN. WEIGHT OF COATING (mg /sq.in) 10.0 SERVICE % MINIMUM REFLECTIVITY SPECULAR 78 DIFFUSE 65 Exterior industrial or commercial service exposed to atmosphere. Marine service enclosure. i 1. 2.10 LENSES 2.11 LOUVERS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Sand blasted. 2. Acid etched. 3. White Flashed. 16455 -11 A. All lenses secured by positive means with neoprene or silicone gasketing or washers as required to hold the lens tight within a frame or attach to a housing. B. All glass lenses shall be heat treated (tempered) or sealed with a clear acrylic laminate layer to provide a "safety glass" rating. All lenses which require removal for relamping or normal maintenance shall be attached to the fixture housing by a minimal length of safety chain to prohibit the lens from falling and striking surrounding surfaces. Glass edges exposed during the relamping process gasketed to prevent chipping or cracking. Glass lenses shall be a minimum 0.375" thick. C. Glass lenses specified as translucent or "opal" shall be treated as follows: D. Acrylic lenses shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic polymer, colorless, as manufactured by Rohm Hass or Dupont. All lenses shall be a minimum .156" thick. E. The quality of the raw acrylic material must exceed IES, SPI, and NEMA Specifications by at least 100 percent which, as a minimum standard, shall not exceed yellowness factor of 3 after 2,000 hours of exposure in the Fade -o -meter or as tested by an independent test laboratory. Acrylic plastic lenses and diffusers shall be properly cast, molded or extruded as specified, and shall remain free of any dimensional instability, discoloration, embrittlement, or loss of light transmittance for at least 15 years. A. All louvers shall be fabricated of the specified material. LIGHTING FIXTURES B. All fluorescent light fixture louvers shall be parabolic and shall be rated at 90 percent or over on the VCP index. C. Louver finishes shall be provided as specified. D. All plastic parabolic louvers shall be destaticized before and after fabrication to insure minimum maintenance. E. All metal louvers shall be coated with anti -rust material and electrostatically painted. F. All louvers shall be heat tested to withstand lamp operating temperatures with no deformation of shape, paint blistering or discoloration. 2.12 FIXTURE TERMS A. Fixtures shall have finish trim designed for the following types of ceiling systems: Ceiling Type Trim Type . Recessed Incandescent or Fluorescent Fixtures a) Plaster — Overlap Trim. b) Concrete — Overlap Trim. c) Tile — Overlap Trim. d) Gypsum — Overlap Trim. e) Metal Pan, Concealed M — Modular, Fit -in Support. f) Lay -in — Modular, Tile with Flush Fit -in. B. Provide trim details as shown on the Drawings or as specified, which are indicative of appearance and dimensional requirements. The trim finish and dimensions subject to the approval of the Architect. C. Mitered corners shall be continuously welded and smoothed before shop finish is applied. No lapping of trim metal for all flush mounted ceiling trims for rectangular or square recessed fixtures. D. Provide a mounting frame or ring with lock recessed or semi- recessed light fixture to secure the mounting frame to the ceiling and support any reflectors trims, or lenses. Ring shall be compatible with the ceiling and of sufficient strength to rigidly support the fixture and any stress applied in relamping. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE NOTE: Catalog numbers are included for reference. Provide all accessories and design features described herein regardless of whether such features are included in catalog reference including, mounting hardware, louvers, lenses, filters, transformers, etc. 16455 -12 LIGHTING FIXTURES 2.14 SUPPORTS FOR SUSPENDED FIXTURES 2.15 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16455 -13 2.13 LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPES AND CATALOG NUMBERS A. General: Various fixture types required are indicated on drawings fixture schedule. Fixtures must comply with minimum requirements as stated herein. Review architectural drawings and specifications to verify ceiling types, modules, suspension systems appropriate to installation. A. Provide separate and isolated suspension for all fixtures required by the local Building Department and seismic requirements. This may include rod hangers, hook hangers, or single stem hangers. A. Provide emergency lighting fixtures indicated on drawings in office area. Battery units shall be powered from the Telecomm DC plant as shown on the drawings. B. Light produced by these emergency fixtures shall provide one foot - candle maintained. A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed, and substrate for supporting lighting fixtures. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer. A. Contractor to coordinate exact quantities and critical dimension with field conditions. B. Contractor to verify and coordinate that appropriate framing, support structures, mounting brackets, and other required structural connections are provided by the General Contractor or other trades to insure a timely, neat installation of all luminaries. C. Contractor to coordinate and provide any associated mounting hardware, conduit connections, or associated appurtenances to effectively install the luminaries. Provide each light fixture with complete installation instructions. All light LIGHTING FIXTURES fixtures to be installed in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. D. Install lighting fixtures in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation," NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. E. Exact locations of all lighting fixtures including mounting heights and plan dimensions are as per the Architectural Drawings. Any ambiguities or conflicts in this dimensional information to be identified to the Architect prior to installation. F. Provide fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers to properly support fixture weight. Submit design of hangers, method of fastening, other than specified herein, for review by Architect. G. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures installed in other than suspended grid type acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling. H. Fasten fixtures securely to structural supports, and ensure that pendant fixtures are plumb and level. Provide individually mounted pendant fixtures longer than 2 feet with twin stem hangers. Provide stem hanger with ball aligners and provisions for minimum on inch vertical adjustment. Mount continuous rows of fixtures with an additional stem hanger greater than number of fixtures in the row. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers' published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified on UL Stds. 486A and 486B and the National Electrical Code. J. Support surface mounted fixtures greater than 2 feet in length at a point in addition to the outlet box fixtures stud. K. Fasten electrical lighting fixtures and brackets securely to indicate structural supports and ensure that installed fixtures are plum and level. L. Rigidly align all continuous rows of fixtures for true in -line appearance. M. Do not install exposed fixtures, reflectors or trims until all plastering and painting that may mar fixture finish is completed. Replace blemished, dented, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed. N. Support all fixtures independent of ductwork or piping. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16455 -14 LIGHTING FIXTURES 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace defective and burned out lamps for 3 months following the Date of Substantial Completion. B. At Date of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which have been operational over 200 hours and have a lamp life of less than 4,000 hours. 1. Refer to Division -1 sections for the replacement/restoration of lamps in lighting fixtures, where used for temporary lighting prior to Date of Substantial Completion. C. Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 5 %, but not less than 4 lamps in each case, of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space. 3.4 AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT A. All adjustable lighting units shall be aimed, focused, locked, etc., by the Contractor under the supervision of the Architect and Engineer. All aiming and adjusting shall be carried out after the entire installation is complete. All ladders, scaffolds, etc., required shall be furnished by the Contractor. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking setscrews and bolts and nuts shall be tightened securely. B. Where possible, units shall be focused during the normal working day. However, where daylight interferes with seeing, aiming shall be accomplished at night. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses. Two weeks prior to substantial completion, re -clean all fixtures for dust, fingerprints, smudges from all visible parts of the fixture. B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. C. At the time of final acceptance by the Owner, all lighting fixtures shall have been thoroughly cleaned with materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers, all broken parts shall have been replaced, and al lamps shall be operative. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16455 -15 LIGHTING FIXTURES 3.6 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting fixtures as indicating. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attachment "F ": ICG Internal Document #030 - 100 -001 - Fire Protection System Standard, 3/8/99. Where conflicts occur between this section and the ICG Standard, the ICG Standard shall apply. B. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Principal work in this Section: 1. The Contractor shall furnish and install an extension of the building, addressable, automatic fire alarm system, as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. 2. The system shall include installing, signal initiating devices, audible alarm devices, a conduit and wiring system, and all accessory devices compatible with the existing building system and required to provide a complete operating system for this space. 3. The contractor shall fumish any additional devices, not shown on plans but requested by the fire department during their walk -thru and/or shop drawing review, at no cost tot he owner the number of additional devices shall be limited to (5) detectors, (2) manual pull stations, (4) audible /visual alarms. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The system shall be U.L. listed for the applicable provisions of the National Fire Protection Association standard number 72 for local system with dry contacts for monitoring. Automatic devices shall be installed per 72 and 90A for fan shutdown, and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction. All equipment and devices shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for use with manufacturer's control panel. B. The system shall comply with Local Fire Department requirements. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Building standard. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16520 -1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals and shop drawings for Engineer review containing the following information for Fire Alarm. B. Incorporate Engineer comments prior to submission to the County. 1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Initiating Circuits: B. Indicating Circuits (D.C.): ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16520 -2 1. Two (2) sets of plan drawings prepared to scale. 2. Show all device and equipment locations, elevations, circuiting and one - line diagram. 3. Sequence of Operation. 4. Zone Schedule. 5. Wiring color code. 6. FACP standby battery calculation. Specify size in ampere hours. 7. Manufacturers' specification sheets for devices and equipment. C. Provide three bound sets of operating instructions, maintenance recommendations and parts lists for fire alarm system. Include wiring and connection diagrams modified to reflect as -built conditions. A. Initiation of any automatic or manual device in office areas and co- location rooms shall indicate zone (by area location and type of alarm, i.e., 1s` floor manual) on control unit annunciator and remote annunciator, sound all signal devices throughout project, release all electrically held open smoke doors, and trip alarm retransmission contacts. Signals may be silenced by "Signal Silencing Switch," trouble buzzer may be silenced by "Trouble Silencing Switch" and system reset by "Reset Switch ". 1. Shall be supervised, low- voltage power limited type circuits. Supervised for opens and grounds. 1. Shall be supervised power limited. Supervised for shorts and opens and grounds. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM C. Supervisory Circuits: 1. Low - voltage power limited type circuits. Supervised for opens and grounds. D. Supervision: 1. Except where otherwise stated in these specifications and/or plans, the fire alarm shall be electrically supervised power limited. E. Ground Detection: 1. Fire alarm system shall be isolated from ground. A ground fault occurring on any initiating, indicating, or annunciator circuits shall sound the trouble signal and cause a ground lamp to light. F. Power and Trouble Indicating Circuits: 1. Operating power circuit and standby power shall be supervised against loss or power and indicated by trouble signal and power trouble LED. A trouble condition in the system shall cause the trouble buzzer to sound and the trouble lamp to light. Restoration of the system to normal shall cause the trouble lamp to go out. The trouble lamp and the power -on lamp shall be visible through the frame mounted window on the front door of the control unit. 2. A 24V DC rectifier and filter power supply of sufficient capacity shall be included to power smoke detectors and signals as shown on plans. G. Battery Standby: 2.2 EQUIPMENT 1. Upon loss of primary operating power, system shall revert to a standby condition. The battery standby voltage shall be supervised and indicate trouble on the panel when the battery is disconnected. Battery capacity shall be such as to operate the system under standby conditions for 24 hours, after which it shall be possible to sound an alarm for 5 minutes. A. All equipment & wiring requirements shall be verified with manufacturer prior to commencing with work. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Manual Stations Non - Coded, Single Action. 2. Rate of Rise Thermal Detectors. 3. Smoke Detector, Photocell Type, 2 Wire. 4. Remote Alarm Lights. 16520 -3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 3 - EXECUTION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 5. AudibleNisual Alarm Indicating Signal, 6. Outside Bell and Light. END OF SECTION 16520 -4 3.1 WIRING A. All detection and audible signal circuit wiring shall be #16 solid AWG or #18 power limited minimum. No parallel branching of circuits allowed, i.e., total supervision per Article 760 of N.E.C. B. Testing, Guarantee and Service: 1. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the rY p P final testing of the system and it shall be subject to the approval and acceptance of the Fire Department. The manufacturer's representative �m shall submit to the Architect/Engineer in writing, certification that the fire alarm system is operational and all tests have been completed. 2. The equipment manufacturer shall be represented by a local service 1 i organization. The local company and service organization have been in business for a minimum of five years. 3 Contractor shall have drawings approved by Architect/Engineer and Fire Department prior to installation. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM :. 11 1) I1 11 11 e PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attachment "A ": ICG Internal Document #170- 100 -008 - Generator Equipment Standard, 3/3/99. Where contradictions occur between this section and the ICG Standard, the ICG Standard shall apply. B. Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work 1 of this section. C. Division -16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of diesel generator set work is indicated by drawings and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, diesel engine, electrical generator, engine 1... starting system including batteries, instrument control panel, transfer switches, fuel tanks, annunciator panel, exhaust silencer, wall thimble, and accessories. B. The generator and transfer switches shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Breaker shall be the same manufacturer as switchboards. Generator and transfer switch to be provided and shipped by owner's vendor. C. Types of generator set required for the project include the following: 1. Diesel engine-driven generator. g g 1 D. Refer to Division -3 sections for concrete and grout work required in connection with pads for engine -driven generator set; work of this section. E. Refer to Division -15 sections for fuel tank piping and associated accessories required for installation of diesel engine- generator unit. F. All generator fuel tank piping and accessories required are work of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS i A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on diesel engine -driven generator sets and components. Include manufacturer's standard product warranty, for duration of not less than two- years, for replacement of materials and equipment used in diesel generator systems. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16620 -1 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Single -step load pickup. 2. Transient and steady -state governing. 3. Safety shutdown device testing. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Rated power. 6. Maximum power. B. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit copies of pertinent drawings and schematic diagrams for approval and shall include the following: 1. Engine generator set including plans and elevations or riser views clearly indicating entrance points for each of the interconnections required. 2. Slip -over steel housing showing all pertinent dimensions and details. Exhaust silencer(s) will be supported above roof of the enclosure. 3. Engine generator /exciter control cubicle. 4. Fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion CFM requirements. 5. Exhaust muffler and vibration isolators. 6. Battery charger, battery, and battery rack. 7. Fuel tank connection points. 8. Automatic load transfer switch. 9. Legends for all devices on all diagrams. 10. A complete 2" 1 -0" scale drawing showing the exact generator and transfer switch system layout including all components and accessories being provided or required for operation as specified herein. 11. Main circuit breakers. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for diesel engine -driven generator units showing connections to electrical power panels, feeders, automatic transfer switches, and ancillary equipment. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer installed and portions that are field - installed. D. Agreement to Maintain: Prior to time of final acceptance, the Installer shall submit 4 copies of an agreement for continued service and maintenance of diesel engine -driven generator sets, for Owner's possible acceptance. Offer terms and conditions for furnishing parts and providing continued testing and servicing, including replacement of materials and equipment, for one -year period with option for renewal of Agreement by Owner. Refer to paragraph 16620- 2.10(L). E. Certifications: Provide diesel engine -drive generator sets certified test record of the following final production testing: 16620 -2 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS •r u�. F. Provide certified test record prior to engine -driven generator set being shipped from factory to project location. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of diesel engine -driven generator units and ancillary equipment, of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with diesel engine -driven generator units similar to that required for this project. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Agreement to Maintain: Engage Installer who is willing to execute with the Owner, required agreement for continued maintenance of diesel engine - driven generator units. C. Generator Supplier Qualifications: Generator supplier shall be factory- authorized distributor nearest to the project location for the system being provided. There should have been a distributor for that manufacturer for a minimum of fours, and shall certify that they employ at least two technicians who have attended all factory service schools. Supplier shall certify that they offer 24 -hour, 7 -day field service and maintain the manufacturer's recommended parts inventory on all field service vehicles, as well as a complete recommended service parts stock at their location nearest the project. D. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Codes Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 700, 701, and 702 pertaining to construction and installation of emergency and standby systems. 2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 37, "Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines ", and NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures ". 3. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 1008, "Automatic Transfer Switches," UL 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors," and UL 486B, "Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors." 4. "NSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA MG 1 "Motors and Generators," and MG 2, "Safety and Use of Electric Motors and Generators ". 16620 -3 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA's Stds Pub No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 -Volts Maximum)." F. IEEE Compliance: - Comply with applicable portions of IEEE Std 446, "IEEE Recommended Practices for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Industrial and Commercial Applications." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver diesel engine -driven generator properly packaged and mounted on pallets, or skids to facilitate handling of heavy items. Utilize factory- fabricated type containers or wrappings for engine - generator and components which protect equipment from damage. B. Store diesel engine -driven generator equipment in original packaging and protect from weather and construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping. C. Handle diesel engine -driven generator equipment carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and components. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Performance: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Standby kw 750 2. Power factor 0.8 3. Speed 1,800 RPM 4. Generator output voltage: 277/480V, 3- phase, 4 -wire, 60Hz. 5. Units shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide the rated kw at 200 ft. altitude and 120 °F ambient temperature. 6. It is intended that all products specified herein be of standard ratings, therefore the kw and kVA ratings, ampere ratings, withstand and closing ratings, etc., shall be the manufacturer's next larger size or rating when the specifications cannot be exactly met. 7. In a standby power capacity, the unit shall be capable of continuous service at rated output for the duration of any utility power failure. The engine and generator shall be the product of a single manufacturer; and 16620 -4 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS 1 1 i 1 1 B. Engine: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE that manufacturer and its authorized dealer shall have the responsibility to provide the diesel engine /generator set and its accessories which will meet the specified output at the required altitude and ambient temperature. It shall be a new factory assembled and tested set. It is the intent and purpose of these specifications to also secure for the Owner, the necessary controls and accessories to the extent that this equipment, in conjunction with the diesel/engine /generator set, will comprise a complete operating package unit. 8. Rating of the diesel engine /generator set shall be based on operation of the set when equipped with all necessary operating accessories, such as radiator fan, air cleaners, lubrication oil pump, fuel transfer pump, fuel injection pump, jacket water pump, governor, charging generator, alternating current generator, and exciter regulator. These ratings must be substantiated by manufacturer's standard published curves and test data. Special ratings or maximum ratings are not acceptable. 9. Voltage regulation shall be +/ -2.0 percent of rate voltage for any constant load between no load and rated load. 10. Frequency regulation shall be 5 percent from steady state no load to steady state rated load. 11. Total Harmonic distortion: The sum of AC voltage waveform harmonics, from non load to full linear load, shall not exceed 5% of rated voltage (L- N, L -L, L -L -L) and no single harmonic shall exceed 3% of rated voltage. 12. Telephone Influence Factor: TIF shall be less than 50 per NEMA MG 1- 22.43. 13. The diesel engine - generator set shall be capable of single step load pick up of 100% nameplate kw and power factor, less applicable derating factors, with the engine - generator set at operating temperature. 14. Motor starting capability shall be a minimum of 1250 kVA for the generator set. After an initial instantaneous voltage dip not to exceed 15 percent, the generator set shall be capable of sustaining a minimum of 90% of rated no load voltage with the specified kVA at near zero power factor applied to the generator set. 1. The engine shall be watercooled inline or Vee -type two or four stroke cycle compression ignition diesel. It shall meet specifications when operating on Number 2 domestic burner oil. The engine shall be equipped with fuel, lube oil, and intake air filters, lube oil cooler, fuel transfer pump fuel priming pump, service meter, gear driven water pump, and unit mounted instruments, including a fuel pressure gauge, water temperature gauge, and lubrication oil pressure gauge. All crankcase emissions will be directed through a demister unit, CRANK VENT from Diesel Research, Inc. or equivalent. 16620 -5 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS 2. Governor - The engine governor shall maintain frequency regulation not to exceed +/ -0.25% from no load to full rated load. Units shall be furnished with and electronic isochronous governor. Governor shall incorporate rack position limiter for start-up, field adjustable to minimize smoke during start-up and acceleration. 3. Mounting - The unit shall be mounted on a structural steel sub -base and shall be provided with suitable spring -type vibration isolators. Sub -base shall be sized to accommodate an under skid mounted double walled fuel tank (18 hours minimum size). 4. Safety Devices - Safety shut -offs for high water temperature, low oil pressure, low coolant level, low coolant temperature, low fuel, overspeed, and engine overcrank shall be provided. 5. Engine- mounted battery charging alternator, 45 ampere, and solid -state voltage regulator. 6. Accessories: Provide replaceable type oil filters, dry -type air cleaners, lubricating oils, greases, and coolant. 7. Install engine at sufficient height above base to permit dropping oil pan without removing unit. 8. All rotating parts shall be guarded against accidental contact. C. Generator: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. The generator shall be rated for continuous standby service at 0.8 power factor, 277/480 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 hertz, 1800 RPM. The unit shall be capable of 100% block load per NFPA 110. 2. The A.C. generator shall be; synchronous, four -pole, revolving field, drip - proof construction, single prelubricated sealed bearing, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan, and directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc(s). The starter shall have skewed laminations of insulated electrical grade seal, two thirds pitch windings. The rotor shall have amortissuer (damper) windings. The rotor shall be dynamically balanced. The exciter shall be brushless, three- phase, with full wave silicon diodes mounted on the rotating shaft and a surge suppressor connected in parallel with the field winding. 3. All insulation system components shall meet NEMA (MGIO221.40 and 16.40) standard temperature limits for Class H insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 105 °C. 4. The generator shall be broad range, 12 lead reconnectable. The generator shall be capable of delivering rated output (kVA) at rated frequency and power factor, at any voltage within the broad range. 5. The main generator and exciter insulation systems must be suitably impregnated for operation in severe environments for resistance to sand, salt, and sea spray. 16620 -6 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS D. Cooling System: E. Fuel System: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 6. A shunt excitation system shall derive excitation power from the main generator output. The automatic voltage regulator shall be temperature compensated, half wave phase controlled solid -state design and include an underspeed protection function. The regulator design shall include a torque- matching characteristic to allow the engine to use its fullest power producing capability (without exceeding it or overcompensating) as speed lower than rated, to optimize motor starting capability and to provide the fastest possible recovery from the transient speed dips. 7. Regulator - A generator - mounted, volts - per - hertz -type exciter /regulator shall be provided to match the characteristics of the generator and engine. Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 0.5% from no load to full rated load. Readily accessible voltage drop, voltage level, and voltage gain controls shall be provided. Voltage level adjustment shall be a minimum of plus or minus 5 %. The solid -state regulator module shall be shock - mounted and epoxy - encapsulated for protection against vibration and atmospheric deterioration. Provide terminal box for generator and exciter leads. The regulator must be sealed from the environment and isolated from the load to prevent tracking when connected to SCR loads. 1. Radiator - A radiator with blower type fan shall be sized to maintain safe operation at 130 °F ambient temperature. The fan shall be capable of accommodating air flow restrictions external to the radiator /generator package of at least 0.5" H ESP at 54,000 CFM. If a greater air is required, the fan shall accommodate an ESP ((required CFM) /54,000 CFM } 2. The engine cooling system shall be pre - treated by the engine supplier for the inhibition of internal corrosion. 1. Skid and double walled tank shall be built below the structural base of the generator set and shall have a 480 gallon capacity. No fuel piping shall be required. Engine shall be complete and ready to run when delivered to the site. Contractor shall provide all fuel required for site set -up and testing. After installation has been accepted, Contractor shall Atop-off': base tank with No. 2 fuel oil. 2. An engine driven, mechanical, positive displacement fuel pump; fuel /water separator; fuel filter with replaceable spin -on canister element; fuel pressure gauge and fuel priming pump; flexible supply and return fuel lines. 16620 -7 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS F. Exhaust System: G. Automatic Starting System: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 3. provide all necessary material to connect to a building provided storage tank with a dedicated volume equal to 24 hours of run time by the generator at full load. 1. Exhaust Silencer - A critical type silencer, muffler companion flanges, and two minimum 3 -0" long flexible stainless steel exhaust connectors properly sized shall be furnished and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Mounting shall be provided by the Contractor. The silencer shall be mounted so that its weight is not supported by the engine, nor will the exhaust system growth, due to thermal expansion, be imposed on the engine. The exhaust back pressure capability of the engine shall accommodate a minimum of 35" ESP including muffler and flex connectors. Maximum pressure drop of the muffler and flex connectors at full load shall be 10" w.c. 2. Insulation - The muffler and all indoor exhaust piping shall be lagged by the Contractor to maintain a surface temperature not to exceed 150° F. The insulation shall be installed so that it does not cover or interfere with the functioning of the flexible exhaust fitting. 3. Division 15 shall install exhaust pipe and insulation where not a part of a package unit. 1. Starting Motor - A 24 volt DC electric starting system with positive engagement shall be furnished. The motor voltage shall be as recommended by the engine manufacturer. 2. Automatic Control - Fully automatic generator set start-stop controls in the generator control panel shall be provided. Controls shall provide shutdowns for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspeed, overcrank and one auxiliary contact for activating accessory items. Controls shall include 3 complete cranking attempts without overheating before cranking cycle is lockout. 3. Jacket Water Heater - A unit mounted thermal circulation type water heater incorporating a thermostatic switch shall be furnished to maintain engine jacket water to 90° F. The heater shall be 120 volts, single phase, 60 hertz. Vee -type engines of 12 cylinders or more shall have one heater per each bank of cylinders. 4. Batteries - A lead acid battery set of the heavy duty diesel starting type shall be provided. Battery voltage shall be compatible with the starting system. The cold cranking amps as recommended by the engine manufacture necessary cables and clamps shall be provided. 16620 -8 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS H. Main Line Circuit Breaker: I. Generator Control Panel: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 5. Battery Trays - Battery trays shall be provided for each battery and shall conform to NEC 480 -7(b). They shall be constructed of wood and so treated as to be resistant to deterioration by battery electrolyte. Further, construction shall be such that any spillage or boil over battery electrolyte shall be contained within the tray to prevent a direct path to the ground. 6. Battery Charger - A current limiting battery charger shall be furnished to automatically recharge batteries. Charger shall float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. It shall include overload protection, silicon diode full wave rectifiers, voltage surge suppressor, DC ammeter, DC voltmeter, and fused AC input. AC input voltage shall be 120 volts, single phase. Amperage output shall be not less than 5 amperes. Alarm contacts shall be provided for low voltage and battery charger failure. Charger shall be wall mounted in NEMA 1 enclosure. 1. Type - A main line, molded case circuit breaker mounted upon and sized to the output of the generator shall be installed as a load circuit interrupting and protection device. It shall operate both manually for normal switching functions and automatically during overload and short circuit conditions. Manufacturer of breaker shall be the same as electrical equipment on this project. 2. The trip unit for each pole shall have elements providing inverse time delay during overload conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short circuit protection. The circuit breaker shall meet standards established by Underwriters Laboratories, National Electrical Manufacturers Association, and National Electrical Code. 3. Generator exciter field circuit breakers do not meet the above electrical standards and are unacceptable for line protection. 4. Circuit breaker shall have battery voltage operated shunt trip wired to safety shutdowns to open the breaker in the event of engine failure. 1. Generator mounted NEMA 1 enclosed solid state module for engine control and AC metering. Panel shall contain, but not be limited to the following equipment: a) Auto/Manual start-stop with LED indicators for low oil pressure, high coolant temperature, prealarm low pressure, prealarm high coolant temperature, low fuel, battery charger fault, low battery volts, low coolant temperature, not on auto, low coolant level, AC output fail over speed, over cranks and emergency stop. Safety shut -downs shall be automatic. 16620 -9 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS J. NFPA Requirements: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE b) Cyclic - cranking as specified by NFPA 110. (1 -60 seconds crank/rest). c) Adjustable cool down timer (0 -30 minutes). d) LCD readout for: engine oil pressure, coolant temperature, engine RPM, system DC volts, engine running hours, generator AC volts, generator AC amps and generator frequency. e) Engine control switch. f) Ammeter - Voltmeter phase selector switch. g) Emergency stop pushbotton. h) Indicator /display test switch. i) Voltage adjustment potentiometer. j) Auxiliary relay, 3PDT. k) Padlocking provisions. 1. Annunciator Panel — An annunciator panel shall be provided for remote mounting to give audible and visual warning of fault or alarm conditions in the generator set. The panel shall conform with requirements of the National Electrical Code, and the National Fire Protection Association publication NFPA -110A. The panel shall be located in the MCC control room adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Verify exact location of annunciator panel with owner prior to installing. K. Schedules Oil Sampling: 1. In order to forecast and minimize engine failure, the supplier of the equipment must provide an oil sampling analysis kit which operating personnel shall utilize for scheduled oil sampling. 2. Scheduled oil sampling shall be accurate within a fraction of one part per million for the following elements: a) Iron b) Chromium c) Copper d) Aluminum e) Silicon f) Lead 3. The sample shall be tested for the presence of water, fuel dilution, and anti - freeze. 4. All equipment needed to take oil samples shall be provided in a kit at the time of acceptance and shall include the following: a) Sample extraction gun (1) b) Bottles (10) 16620 -10 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS L. System Service Contract: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE c) Postage paid mailers (10) d) Written instruction (1) 1. The supplier of the standby power system must provide a copy and make available to the owner his standard service contract which, at the Owner's option, may be accepted or refused. This contract will accompany any documents, drawings, catalog cuts, specification sheets, wiring or outline drawings, etc. submitted for approval to the designing engineer. The Contract shall be for the complete services rendered over a period of one year. A. Examine areas and conditions under which diesel engine - driven generator units are to be installed and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DIESEL ENGINE - DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS A. Install diesel engine - driven generator units in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that engine- generator units fulfill requirements. Comply with NFPA and NEMA standards pertaining to installation of engine - generator sets and accessories. B. Coordinate with other work, including raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, fuel tanks, piping and accessories, as necessary to interface installation of engine- generator equipment work with other work. C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening valves for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A, 486B, and the National Electrical Code. D. Install units on vibration isolators in accordance with Division -15 section; and comply with manufacturer's indicated method of installation. 16620 -11 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS 3.3 GROUNDING 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Start-up Testing: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE E. Connect fuel oil piping to alternative generator equipment as indicated, and comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Align shafts of engine and generator within tolerances recommended by engine - generator unit manufacturer. G. Generator set shall be capable of start-up and accepting rated load within ten (10) seconds. H. Provide all conduit and wiring from building panelboard to feed miscellaneous . equipment such as jacket heaters, battery charger, etc. A. Provide equipment grounding connections for diesel engine -driven generator units. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. 1. Engage local equipment manufacturer's representative to perform start-up and building load tests upon completion of installation, with the Architect/Engineer in attendance; provide certified test record. Tests are to include the following: a. Check fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze in liquid cooled models for conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations under environmental conditions present. b. Test prior to cranking engine for proper operation, accessories that normally function while the set is in a standby mode. Accessories include: engine heaters, battery charger, generator strip heater, remote annunciator. c. Check, during start-up test mode, for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line -to line voltage and phase rotation. d. Test, by means of simulated power outage, automatic start-up, remote - automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic shut- down. Prior to this test adjust, for proper system coordination, transfer switch timers. Monitor throughout the test, engine temperature, oil pressure, battery charge level, generator voltage, amperes, and frequency 16620 -12 DIESEL GENERATOR SETS 01 • 1 j 3.5 PERSONNEL TRAINING ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 2. Perform and eight -hour load bank test with the following sequence: a. Two hours start -up 51% load. b. Two hours 100% load. c. One hour 125% load. d. Two hours 100% load. e. One hour 50% load. (Test results shall be documented and given to the er, gineer for review and approval.) 3. Upon completion of installation demonstrate capability and compliance of system with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. Initial testing and retesting to be at no cost to Owner. A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for starting -up, testing and operating diesel engine - driven generator sets. In addition, train Owner's personnel in periodic maintenance of batteries. END OF SECTION DIESEL GENERATOR SETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attachment `B ": ICG Internal Document 170 - 100 -008 - Automatic Transfer Switch Standard, 3/3/99. Where contradictions occur between this section and the ICG Standard, the ICG Standard shall apply. B. Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. C. Division -16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of transfer switch work, including associated control devices, is indicated by drawings and schedules and as specified herein. B. The generator and transfer switches shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. C. Types of transfer switches required for the project include the following: 1. Automatic transfer. D. Refer to other Division -16 sections for wires/cables, electrical raceways, boxes and fittings, which are required in conjunction with transfer switch work; not work of this section. E. Refer to Division -3 sections for concrete and grout work required in connection with transfer switch work; not work of this section. F. Refer to Division -15 section for vibration control and isolation required in connection with transfer switches; not work of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for electrical power transfer switches. B. Shop Drawings: Submit %2 " =1' -0" scale layout drawings of electrical generator and transfer switches showing accurately scaled equipment locations, housekeeping pad size, location and spatial relationships to associated electrical equipment in proximity. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16650 -1 TRANSFER SWITCHES C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for electrical transfer switches, and associated control devices showing connections to prime and alternate power sources, electrical load, and equipment components. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer - installed and portions that are field - installed. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualification: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical power transfer switches, of types, rating, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing electrical power transfer switches similar to that required for this project. C. Codes and Standards: ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical power transfer switches. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 1008, "Automatic Transfer Switches ", and UL 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide transfer switches and components which are UL- listed and labeled. 3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds Pub/No.'s ICS 2, "Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies ", ICS 6 and 250, pertaining to transfer switches. 4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 99; "Standard for Health Care Facilities ", and NFPA 101; "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures ", pertaining to transfer switches. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver transfer switches and associated devices in factory- fabricated type containers or wrappings, which properly protect equipment from damage. B. Store transfer switches and associated devices in original packaging and protect from weather and construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with watertight wrapping. 16650 -2 TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TRANSFER SWITCHES ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16650 -3 C. Handle transfer switches and associated devices carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace damaged equipment with new equipment. A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard design, materials and components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer for duty indicated, and as required for a complete installation. B. Automatic Transfer Switches shall be provided with 3 poles, current ratings and indicated on the drawings, for a normal and emergency source of 480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60Hz with neutral bus. The transfer switch shall be braced to have a short circuit rating of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. The transfer switches shall be listed per UL Standard 1008 as a recognized component for emergency systems and rated for total system load. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85% to 98% of nominal and the dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 75% to 98% of the pickup value. C. The automatic transfer switches shall be mechanically held, electrically operated type and suitable for continuous duty in an unventilated sheet metal enclosure without derating (NEMA Type A IEC Type PC). The transfer switches shall be inherently double throw so both sets of contacts move simultaneously when the switch is transferring. The transfer switches shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only two possible positions - normal and emergency. D. All main contacts shall be silver alloy wiping action type. They shall be protected by arcing contacts in sizes above 400 amperes. E. All switch and relay contacts, coils, springs and control elements shall be removable from the front of the transfer switch without removal of the switch panels from the enclosure and without disconnection of drive linkages or power conductors. Sensing and control relays shall be continuous duty industrial control type with minimum contact rating of 10 amperes. F. Automatic transfer switches utilizing components of molded case circuit breakers, circuit interrupters, disconnect switches, or parts thereof which had not been intended for repetitive switching are not acceptable. An overload or short- circuit shall not cause the transfer switch to go into neutral position. TRANSFER SWITCHES G. A time delay to override momentary normal source outages to delay all transfer switch and engine starting signals. The time delay shall be field adjustable from 0.5 to 15 seconds and factory set at 3 seconds. H. The switch shall transfer the load to the emergency power system after the generator set reaches proper voltage and frequency. Time delay transfer to emergency power adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds (set at 5 seconds) shall allow the engine - generator set to stabilize before application of load. A time delay on retransfer to normal source. The time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and normal source is available. The time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and factory set at 15 minutes. J. Independent single phase voltage and frequency sensing of the emergency source. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85% to 98% of nominal. Transfer to emergency upon normal source failure when emergency source voltage is 90% or more of nominal. K. Transfer switch shall be factory equipped with a means to prevent large inrush currents due to transfer between energized sources. This feature shall provide a field adjustable time delay during switching in both directions, during which time the load is isolated from both power sources, to allow residual voltage of motors or other inductive loads (such as transformers) to decay before completing the switching cycle. The programmed transition feature shall have an adjustable time range of 0 to 7.5 seconds. All transfer switched specified to be supplied without programmed transition shall be capable of addition of the programmed transition feature in the field without transfer switch replacement. Transfer methods that use the phase relationships between the two power sources to control a transfer initiation time are not acceptable. L. A contact that closes when normal source fails for initiating engine starting, rated 10 amps, 32 volt D.D. Contacts to be gold plated for low voltage service. M. Pilot lights to show switch position. N. One set of normally open and one set of normally closed auxiliary contacts. O. A test switch to momentarily simulate normal source failure. P. Harnessing between transfer switch and control panel shall have built -in disconnect for routine maintenance. Q. Transfer switch shall be furnished with an operator's manual providing installation and operating instructions. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16650 -4 TRANSFER SWITCHES 1 i i r 1 ... 1. i i 1.. i PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE R. Transfer switch shall be supplied in a NEMA 1 enclosure. S. Transfer switch shall be furnished with an adjustable exerciser circuit. Selectable exercise time of the day of month, time of day, and duration shall be provided. T. The control module shall direct the operation of the transfer switch. The module's sensing and logic shall be a built -in microprocessor -based system for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and inherent digital communications capability. The control settings shall be stored in nonvolatile EEPROM. The module shall contain an integral programmable clock and calendar. The control module shall have a keyed disconnect plug to enable the control module to be disconnected from the transfer mechanism for routine maintenance. The control module shall be mounted separately from the transfer mechanism unit for safety and ease of maintenance. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade plug - in type with dust cover. U. The control module shall include programming keypad, alpha - numeric display for monitoring settings and diagnostic values, key - lockable program selector switch, light - emitting diode status indications, and user instructions. These features shall be user accessible when the enclosure door is closed. V. The control module shall be capable of storing the following records in memory for access either locally (at the control module) or remotely (at a computer): 1. Number of hours transfer switch is in the emergency position (total and since record reset). 2. Number of hours the emergency is available (total and since record reset). 3. Total transfers in either direction (total and since record reset). 4. Date of record reset. 5. Date of last exercise period. 6. Date, time, and description of the last four source failures. 7. Elapsed time during the most recent source outage. W. Transfer switch shall have Isolation and Bypass feature. A. Examine areas and conditions under which transfer switches are to be installed and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 16650 -5 TRANSFER SWITCHES C. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Install transfer switches, including associated control devices as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that transfer switches comply with requirements. Comply with applicable requirements of NEC and NFPA pertaining to wiring practices and installation of electrical power transfer switches. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway, and electrical boxes and fittings, as necessary to interface installation of transfer switch work with other work. C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are no indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UH Stds 486A and B. D. Provide in conjunction with each and every automatic transfer switch the following: 1. 2 #12 -1 /2 "C from auxiliary contact (closed when switch in emergency position) on transfer switch to each elevator machine room which is served via that transfer switch. Terminate as and where required by the elevator vendor. 2. 2 #12 -1 /2 "C from auxiliary contact (closed before switch returns to normal power) on transfer switch serving elevators to each elevator machine room which is served via that transfer switch. Terminate as and where required by the elevator vendor. 3. 2 #12 -1 /2 "C from engine start contact on transfer switch to respective emergency generator control panel. 4. Wiring as necessary from transfer switch to remote annunciator panels and engine control panel for transfer switch position indicator lights. E. Provide all necessary wiring and conduit to the generator remote alarm panel in the MCC Control Room. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for transfer switch units as indicated. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure pennanent and effective grounding. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16650 -6 TRANSFER SWITCHES th (1 11 3.5 PERSONNEL TRAINING ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test transfer switches, by means of simulated power outage; automatic start-up by remote - automatic starting, transfer of load and automatic shutdown. Prior to these tests, adjust transfer switch timers for proper system coordination. B. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of transfer switches with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. Initial testing and retesting, where necessary, at no cost to Owner. A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for starting -up, testing and operating transfer switches an auxiliary equipment. END OF SECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of telephone system work is indicated by drawings and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, the provisions of empty raceway, pull boxes and outlet boxes. B. Raceways, electrical cable boxes and fittings, which are required in connection with the installation of telephone systems, are specified in other Division 16 sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of telephone system and accessories including, but not necessarily limited to raceways and pull boxes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate with local telephone company for service to building telephone system. B. Coordinate with electrical work including wires /cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways to properly interface installation of telephone system with other work. C. Sequence installation of telephone /data system with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 All Hardware /Software associated with systems or equipment included with Division 16 work shall be Year 2000 (Y2K) compliant. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE 16710 -1 TELE -DATA RACEWAYS SYSTEMS 2.2 Conduit, boxes, connectors and supports are specified in other sections of specification. 2.3 Install telephone raceway and accessories as indicated herein and specified in other sections of specification. A. Raceway shall be routed from device outlet box up into ceiling space with pull wire. B. Device outlet boxes shall be provided with blank coverplates. C. Provide capped bushings on conduits immediately after installation. D. Use only electrical 45 °or 90° sweeps. Do not place more than two 90° sweeps or exceed 100 ft. between pull boxes without providing a pull box. Unless otherwise noted the following conduit schedule shall be followed: 1. One Workstation or Communication Outlet - C. with pullwire. 2. Two Workstations or Communications Outlet - 1" C. with two pullwires. F. Fire seal all openings to maintain fire rating after telephone cables are installed. G. Place telephone and/or data label on pull and junction boxes. ICG Seattle CENTRAL OFFICE END OF SECTION 16710 -2 TELE -DATA RACEWAYS SYSTEMS ACTIVITY NUMBER: M99 -0182 DATE: 9 -30 -99 Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # _ After Permit Is Issued PROJECT NAME: ICG COMMUNICATIONS Original Plan Submittal XX Response to Phone call W /Bob # _ DEPARTMENTS: ic w Buildi % '- Division Fire Prevention Planning Division AA C. lbr & it:I ma a /1 114 Public Works Structural n Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Approved n Approved with Conditions \PRROUT[,OOC 5/99 � esrm■ \ c Cam. PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SHIP Incomplete Structural Review Required n REVIEWER'S INITIALS: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: . ..� .�.tY• „ni r .�.�.. �. ::L.' -.' .. �� > "}.. .:.a.'.'l ".?ha' 'y1v+' ::Pr "iT "'�'Y (;; •Y,�:r. DUE DATE: 10-5-99 Not Applicable No further Review Required DATE: DUE DATE 11-2-99 Not Approved (attach comments) CORRECTION DETERMINATION: DUE DATE Approved Approved with Conditions n Not Approved (attach comments) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DATE: ACTIVITY NUMBER: M99-0182 DATE:9 -22 -99 PROJECT NAME: ICG COMMUNICATIONS, INC XX Original Plan Submittal Response to Incomplete Letter # _ Response to Correction Letter # Revision # _after Permit. Is Issued DEPARTMENTS: Building Division Public Works DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete S2 Incomplete Comments: TUES /THURS ROUTING: Please Route JE Structural Review Required APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Approved \PRROUTG.DOC 5/99 c:bern eoprci. CDp9 PLAN REVIEW /ROUTING SLIP Approved with Conditions Fire Prevention /WC ' -Z7-`j Structural Planning Division Permit Coordinator DUE DATE: 9 -23 -99 n Not Applicable n No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE 10 -21 -99 Not Approved (attach comments) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: DUE DATE Approved Approved with Conditions C Not Approved (attach comments) ri REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: City of Tukwila John W. Rants, Mayor Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: Response to Incomplete Letter # ®'. Response to Correction Letter # Revision # after Permit is Issued El- Entered in Sierra on C l - AO CR Plan Check/Permit Number: 9 / - - o / 8 - 2- Project Name: e G S Q 4 -777. - Sw l /G Project Address: 222 Contact Person: Dc r?A/ l' ? Phone Number: 2a 70/a)72 c.zL Zo 6 !t`06 - 77/ / 0 Summary of Revision: ge.PO2 S -e 7 ! / d /1 -e CcSI % /i gpo6 lc-Tr) ( A've q- 7>oit. Sheet Number(s): "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including dote of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: c��LtC"" 06/29/99 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • (206) 431-3670 • Fax (206) 431-3665 Fire Department Review Control #M99 -0182 (512) Dear Sir: City of Tukwila Fire Department } rJ• rc.:: vei'.n.`P+eltmaYrtc!. September 27, 1999 Re: ICG Communications, Inc. - 12201 Tukwila Intl. Blvd. Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. H.V.A.C. units rated at greater than 2,000 cfm require auto - shutdown devices. These devices shall be separately zoned in the alarm panel and local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #1742) H.V.A.C. systems supplying air in excess of 2,000 cubic feet per minute to enclosed spaces within buildings shall be equipped with an automatic shutoff. Automatic shutoff shall be accomplished by interrupting the power source of the air - moving equipment upon detection of smoke in the main supply -air duct served by such equipment. Smoke detectors shall be labeled by an approved agency for air -duct installation and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. (UMC 608) Dedicated fire alarm system circuit breaker(s) shall be equipped with a mechanical lockout device. (NFPA 72 (1- 5.2.8.2)) Local U.L. central station supervision is required. (City Ordinance #1742) Remote indicator lights are required on all above ceiling smoke detectors. (City Ordinance #1742) Call the Tukwila Fire Department at 575 -4407 for John W. Rants, Mayor Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 5754439 Yours truly, City of Tukwila Fire Department Page number 2 The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau cc: TFD file n cd John W Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief approval of any system shut down. Have job site address, name and the Tukwila Fire Department Job Number available to confirm shut down approval. (City Ordinance #1742) Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (UFC 10.503) (City Ordinance #1742) 2. This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permits may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. Any overlooked hazardous condition and /or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404. Fax (206) 5754439 F625-052-000 (8197) DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES REGISTERED AS PROVIDED BY LAW AS CONST CONT GENERAL PARROTT MECHANICAL INC 6600 N GOVERNMENT WY COEUR D'ALENE ID 83815 A ...A ru. MECHANICAL ABBREVIATIONS ABV ABOVE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR APD AIR PRESSURE DROP BTUH BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR CAC - # CCU -# CD CFM CU UPFLOW COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONER COMPUTER ROOM CONDENSING UNIT AIR CONDITIONER CONNDENSATE PUM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CONDENSING UNIT A DB DRY BULB DIA DIAMETER DN DOWN DWG DRAWING EA EACH EAT ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE EF EXHAUST FAN ESP EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE EXH EXHAUST 'F DEGREES FAHRENHEIT FD FIRE DAMPER FL FLOOR FLA FULL LOAD AMPS FPM FEET PER MINUTE FT FEET GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE HP HORSEPOWER HD HEAD IN INCHES KW KILOWATTS LB /HR POUNDS PCUR MCA MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPS MBH THOUSAND BTU PER HOUR MOCP MAXIMUM OVER CURRENT PROTECTION MD MOTORIZED DAMPER NC NOISE CRITERIA OA OUTSIDE AIR OBD OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER PH PHASE RA RETURN AIR RLA RATED LOAD AMPS SA SUPPLY AIR SP STATIC PRESSURE TYP TYPICAL V VOLTS w/ WITH WB WET BULB MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL MOUNT AND CONNECT EACH ITEM OF EQUIPMENT IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE AN ON -SITE INSPECTION TO DETERMINE FULLY THE EXISTING CONDI- TIONS AND THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION. 3. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND OTHER MECHANICAL WORK IS INDICATED DIAGRAMMATICALLY BY THE DRAWINGS. DETERMINE EXACT LOCATIONS ON THE JOB SITE, SUBJECT TO STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS AND WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTORS. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL, AFTER INSTALLATION AND START -UP, THOROUGHLY CHECK EACH ITEM OF EQUIPMENT FOR VIBRATION TRANSMISSION TO THE STRUCTURE OR EXCESSIVE NOISE. IF EITHER OCCURS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CORRECTING THE FAULTY SITUATION IMMEDIATELY. 5. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIP- MENT'S ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS WITH THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR ORIGINATED MODIFICATIONS TO THE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION, DUE TO DEVIATIONS FROM THE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENTS "BASIS OF DESIGN" OR "PROTOTYPE" ELECTRICAL DATA. SHALL BE AT A COST TO THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE EXTERNAL TRAPS FOR CONDENSATE DRAIN LINES WHICH ARE NOT INTERNALLY TRAPPED. 7. FOR EXACT LOCATION OF ALL AIR DEVICES, SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. 8. DIFFUSERS SHALL BE FOUR -WAY BLOW UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED BY DIREC- TIONAL FLOW ARROWS OR NOTE ON "AIR DEVICES SCHEDULE". NECK SIZES AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. DUCT DROPS SHALL BE CLOSELY COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADES TO AVOID CONFLICT WITH. LIGHTING FIXTURES, CEILING GRID, SPRINKLERS, ETC. 9. ANY CHANGES TO DUCT DUE TO FIELD CONDITIONS SHALL BE. MADE 'ONLY IF THE DUCT SIZE FREE AREA IS MAINTAINED AND SHALL BE SUBMITTED . TO ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL 10. PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN ALL MITERED ELBOWS 30' OR GREATER. 11. CONNECT ALL DUCTWORK TO EQUIPMENT WITH FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. 12. CONTRACTOR SHALL BRACE DUCTWORK (AS REQUIRED) AT ALL FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO EN- SURE THAT DUCTWORK IS IN ALIGNMENT. 13. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION IV OF "HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS - METAL AND FLEXIBLE" AS PUBLISHED BY SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. (SMACNA), LATEST EDITION. 14. PROVIDE VOLUME DAMPERS IN ALL BRANCH DUCTS SERVING TWO OR MORE AIR DEVICES A 15. THERMOS •T i ATIO HOWN ARE APPROXIMATE AND SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH ARCHI- TECTURAL DRAWINGS. MOUNT THERMOSTATS 4' -0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. MECHANICAL SYMBOLS MD 93 A SFD SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: ❑ MECHANICAL L7 ELECTRICAL ❑ PLUMBING GAS PIPING CITY OF TUKWILA IDUILDING DIVISION SUPPLY AIR DEVICE RETURN AIR DEVICE EXHAUST AIR DEVICE NEW DUCTWORK SOUND LINED DUCT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES MOTORIZED DAMPER (M.D.) AIR OUT OF AIR TERMINAL AIR INTO AIR TERMINAL - PCD- PUMPED CONDENSATE DRAIN - CW- COLD WATER D- DRAIN Z� PITCH PIPING DOWN IN DIRECTION SHOWN 0 PIPE TURNING UP 0 PIPE TURNING DOWN - -- GATE VALVE UNION - -- SWING CHECK VALVE THERMOSTAT ROUND OR PHASE ELEVATION SHEET SHOWN ON OR SHEET TAKEN FROM CONNECTION POINT- NEW TO EXISTING POINT OF REMOVAL. SMOKE FIRE DAMPER DRAWING LIST M-t1 MECHANICAL COVER SHEET, GB'ERAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS M-21 NEW WORK BOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL M-3.1 NEW WORK ROOF PLAN- MECHANICAL M-4.1 DETALS AND SCHEDULES- MECHANICAL M-51 DETALS subject to errors and om:=.... .; approval cf plans does not authorize Ea violation of any adcpted code or ordnance. Receipt of contractor's copy of ap., . ad plane adeloskdped. By D. /t 99 0 CO Of THOUGH APPROVED OCT 1 2 1999 A. 'I.i I LILY( RECEIVED CITV OF TUKWILA UEi' 3 0 1999 PERMIT CENTER K.T. Associates, P.G. DBA K.T. Associates, P.C. of VA mnv. oe< nna , a Eng �n rinq 2323 Horse Pen Rd. Suite 500 Herndon, Vo. 20171 -3405 703 713 -0300 (703) 713 -0890 FAX www.KTA95.com W W w 0 U) U P W U 0U Ll- Z O 2O I- Oa cc IL 0 U Z a 0 Project S9921.00 Revisions: QC -KB REVISIONS 9/2/99 QC -RT REVISIONS 9/2/99 MECHANICAL COVER SHEET GENERAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS scats NONE Drawn PGP Checkocb Date 08 - 19 - 99 M - 1.1 Sheet 1 of 5 M99-018a NOTES: 7,E, AREA "7. 900 TYP OE • 900 TYP OF 4 1650 TYP OF 4 300 TYP OF 2 A A 10x10 NEW CAC UNITS BELOW MAIN DUCT. 2 FUTURE LOCATION OF CAC UNITS 3 RUN REFRIGERANT PIPING TO CONDENSER ON ROOF, EACH LINE REPRESENTS 2 PIPES OF A DUAL CIRCUIT SYSTEM, SIZE AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER 4 REFRIGERANT LINES UP CHASE TO ROOF 5 DISCHARGE PCD INTO JANITOR'S SINK 6 CONNECT CW TO BACKFLOW PREVENTER AS SHOWAON PLUMBING DRAWINGS. NOT USED. SIZE OF INTAKE Ryl 14 LONG. CAC- BALANCE OA FOR 60 CFM ox1, BALANCE RA F OR 360 CFM 10x10, BALANCE RA 03R 540 RISER ROOF, SPLIT INTO 2-9x18 AND TRANSITION AS SHOWN. 20x20 SUPPLY RISER TO ROOF, SPLIT INTO 12x20 AND 8x20 AND TRANSITION AS SHOWN. 0 INSTALL DRAIN AT THE BOTTOM OF DRIP PAN AND RUN TO DRIP PAN UNDER CAC. TRANSFER AIR OPENING ABOVE CEILING. r 17 RUN, SIZE AND TRAP REFRIGERANT LINES AS MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDS. tOOo NOT USED. -----,.- SED E CF22 II ihallimArAliumal....... la 1 ;.......51-1 ..r......i.,..Nriwrio 18x ■ _ =11 Agoo 11 -----------__ , CW 16 —MOIR ff IRC; mil 1 k ,,x 900 4 ...,_ z\ 100 TYP OF 8 10 18 GAUGE AUXILIARY SHEET METAL PAN WITH 1 1/2" HIGH HEMMED EDGES. INSTALL LEAK DETECTOR IN PAN AND EXTEND PAN 6" BEYOND UNIT DIMENSION 10 CONDENSATE PUMP UTILITY LIFT PUMP, LITTLE GIANT WC-20 OR APPROVED EQUAL (9 INTERLOCK MD TO SUPPLY FAN FLEX CONNECTION 0 NO WORK IN THIS AREA. DROP DUCT BELOW BEAM AND BACK UP TO JOISTS PIPING BELOW DUCT AND CAP FOR UNIT. @ DROP 0 3/ PCD AND 1/2 CW FUTURE z\ 900 TYP OF 4 GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL CW PIPING IS 1/2" 2. RUN ALL DUCTWORK TIGHT TO THE BOTTOM OF THE JOISTS_ 0 900 TYP OF 4 48x30 L2s. NEW WORK FLOOR PLAN—MECHANICAL SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" 4. FUTURE CAC UNITS SAME SIZE AS CURRENT CAC UNITS. 3. BALANCE ALL DIFFUSERS FROM CAC-1 TO CAC-4 IN THE CO LOCATION, TRANSMISSION AREA AND BATTERY RECTIFIER AREA TO 508 OF THEIR INDICATED CFM. 7 L A 1320 i . TYP OF 8 _700 SIZE PER DRAWINGS. ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4"=1 TYPICAL FOR UNITS 2 Sc 3 REFRIGERANT PIPING, CW PCD REFRIGERANT LINES 28x 8 t ° —SIZE PER DRAWINGS. AT OD I E N ELEVATION SCALE. 1/4"=.1' -0" TYPICAL FOR UNITS 1 & 4 FAF PtlINGarq,8Kwo APPR.Ovi our 1 2 IH9 REFRIGERANT LINES K.T. Associates, P.C. DBA K.T. Associates, P.C. of VA 2323 Horse Pen Rd. Suite 500 Herndon, Va. 20171-3405 (703) 713-0300 (703) 713-0890 FAX www.KTA95.com w z 0 co w <0 0 u_ D 0 cr H w 0 Project: 59921.00 Revidone OC-KB REVISIONS 9/2/99 A QC-R1 REVISIONS 9/10/99 A CUSTOMER REQUEST 9/21 A REVISION 9/22 s Ep 3 (1 1999 PERMIT CENTER NEW WORK FLOOR PLAN MECHANICAL Sc ale; AS NOTED Drawn PGP Checked SN Date 08 Sheet M-21 2 of 5 0 RUN REFRIGERANT TUBING TO CONDENSING UNIT. EXISTING 111/2" 0 RUN REFRIGERANT PIPING TO COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS EACH LINE REPRESENTS TWO PIPES OF A DUAL CIRCUIT SYSTEM. CONNECT NEW 1 1/2" GAS LINE TO EXISTING NATURAL GAS LINE. ROOF DR-VN s ," ' G L FUTURE UNIT (TYPICAL) NEW WORK ROOF PLAN- MECHANICAL CITY OF TWA!, APPROVED OCT 12199,9 A QC-KB REVISION 9/2/99 QC-RT REVISION 9/9/99 CUSTOMER REQUEST 9/21 A ROOF COORDINATION 9/22 ,A REVISION 9/24 NEW WORK ROOF PLAN MECHANICAL PLAN L2L DBA K AtroZ of VA .4=4" 2323 Home Pen Rd. Suite 500 Herndon, Va. 20171-3405 P01 (703 713-0890 FAX www. A95.com 713-0300 SPLIT SYSTEM SCHEDULE UNIT DESIGNATION INDOOR UNIT OUTDOOR UNIT NDOOR OUTDOORS TOTAL CFM 0 CFM CF M ESP IN H2O COOLING TOTAL MBH COOLING SENS. MBH ENT. AIR DB /WB ° F AMBIENT °F HEATING FAN HP FAN: V /PH /HZ CAPACITY MBH COMPRESSOR QUANTITY UNIT RLA EACH MCA MOCP COND. FANS QUANTITY COND. FANS FLA EA. COND. V /PH /HZ SEER NOTES AHU -1 CU -1 900 60 0.3 22 17 75/62 85 5 KW 1/3 208/1/60 34 1 11 20 20 1 0.98 208/1/60 10.0 1,2,3.5 AHU -2 CU -2 600 60 0.2 16 12 75/62 85 2 KW 1/4 208/1/60 34 1 8.0 20 20 1 0.98 208/1/60. 10.0 1,2,3,4,5 NOTES: 1. EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. 2. PROVIDE WITH CONDENSATE PUMP. 3. PROVIDE WITH 2" THROW AWAY FILTER IN METAL FILTER FRAME. 4. PROVIDE LOW AMBIENT CONTROLS DOWN TO 10 F. 5. PROVIDE CONDENSER COIL GUARD. COMPUTER ROOM SPLIT SYSTEM A C UNIT SCHEDULE UNIT DESIGNATION INDOOR UNIT OUTDOOR UNIT INDOOR OUTDOORS TOTAL CFM O.A. CFM ESP IN H2O COOLING TOTAL MBH COOLING SENS. MBH ENT. AIR DB /WB ° F AMBIENT °F REHEAT KW FAN HP ELEC. DATA HUMIDIFIER LBS /HR BASIS OF DESIGN CAPACITY MBH COND. FANS QUANTITY COND. FLA ELEC. DATA BASIS OF DESIGN V /PH /HZ WSA V /PH /HZ WSA CAC -1 CCU -1 12,000 - 0.5 297.9 263.6 72/60 84 22 7.5 480/3/60 88 29 DATA AIRE MODEL DEAD U - -26 MATCH TO INDOOR 3 6.3 480/3/60 20 DATA AIRE MODEL DARC 28 CAC -2 CCU -2 12,000 - 0.5 297.9 263.6 72/60 84 22 7.5 480/3/60 88 29 DATA AIRE MODEL DAAD U -26 MATCH TO INDOOR 3 6.3 480/3/60 2D DATA AIRE MODEL DARC 28 CAC -3 CCU -3 12,000 - 0.5 297.9 263.6 72/60 84 22 7.5 480/3/60 88 29 DATA AIRE MODEL DAAD U -26 MATCH TO INDOOR 3 6.3 480/3/60 20 DATA AIRE MODEL DARC 28 CAC -4 CCU -4 12,000 - 0.5 297.9 263.6 72/60 84 22 7.5 480/3/60 88 29 DATA AIRE MODEL DAAD U -26 MATCH TO INDOOR 3 6.3 480/3/60 20 DATA AIRE MODEL DARC 28 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE WITH CONDENSATE PUMP, STANDARD FACTORY MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL SYSTEM AND LOW AMBIENT CONTROL DOWN TO -20°F 2. PROVIDED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE 0 SIDEWALL SUPPLY REGISTER (TITUS 131 RS) AREA SERVED I CFM RANGE SIZE THROW MAX APD MAX NC NOTES: 0 -200 10x6 4 0.1 25 1,2.3 200 -1000 24x12 14 0.1 25 1,2,3 1000 -1500 36x12 14 0.1 30 1,2,3 1500 -2000 42x12 15 0.1 35 - 1,2,3 0 SQUARE LAY -IN LOUVERED FACE DIFFUSER ( TITUS TMS) 0.7 CFM RANGE NECK FACE THROW MAX APD MAX NC NOTES: 5 -150 6 "0 24x24 11 0.1 20 1,2 151 -275 8 "0 24x24 11 0.1 20 1,2 276 -425 10 0 24x24 14 0.1 25 1,2 PERFORATED FACE RETURN AIR GRILLE (TITUS PXP) CFM RANGE NECK FACE THROW MAX APD MAX NC NOTES: 0 -800 22x22 24x24 - 0.03 - - © EGGCRATE GRILLE (TITUS 50R) CFM RANGE SIZE THROW MAX APD MAX NC NOTES: 0 -1000 24x14 - 0.03 25 5 AE141111110 FM 1O EXHAUST REGISTER (TITUS 25RL) CFM RANGE SIZE MAX APD MAX NC NOTES: - 100 1 10x6 0.1 35 4 1000 -1400 30x12 0.1 35 4 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE WITH VOLUME DAMPER AT SPIN -IN FITTING. 2- BALANCE TO CFM INDICATED ON. PLANS. 3. PROVIDE WITH OPPOSED BLADE BALANCING DAMPER AND STRAIGHTENING VANES. 4. PROVIDE. WITH OPPOSED BLADE BALANCING DAMPER 5. PROVIDE. WITH AUXIUARY BORDER FOR INSTALLATION IN PARTITION. I ROOFTOP UNIT SCHEDULE DESIG. AREA SERVED EER AT ARI MIN. O.A. CFM SUPPLY FAN COOLING CAPACITY HEATING CAPACITY COMPRESSOR COND. FANS ELECTRICAL APPROX WEIGHT LBS. BASIS OF DESIGN_ TRANS NOTES CFM ESP IN W.G. HP TOTAL MBH SENS. MBH EAT DB /WB °F MB AMBIENT °F INPUT MBH OUTPUT MBH EAT DB °F N0 . RLA CA. N0. FLA EA. V /PH UNIT MCA RTU -1 3RD FLOOR 16 3300 3300 0.7 1.5 96.6 58.8 85/73 85 219 175 21 2 1 0.0 2 2.4 460/3 24.3 982 YC•091D _ 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 NOTES: 1. HORIZONTAL DISCHARGE 3. TWO POSITION MOTORIZED O.A. DAMPER w /SPRING 5. 2" THROW -AWAY FILTERS 8. S •• LY 'IR T. R OSTAT • CO R•L NIT. A 2. ROOF CURB RETURN 6. LOW AMBIENT CONTROL TO 20 -F 9. SUPPLY AIR THERMOSTAT TO CONTROL UNIT. 4. CONDENSER COIL GUARD 7. SMOKE DETECTOR TO SHUT OFF UNIT 1 AND DAMPER IN ALARM CONDITION. EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE DESIGN. AREA SERVED CFM SP HP POWER BASIS OF DESIGN NOTES EF -1 3RD FLOOR 2,250 0.4 1/2 480/3/60 GREENHECK CUBE 180 HP 1 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE INTEGRAL BACK DRAFT DAMPER, INTEGRAL DISCONNECT SWITCH. PROVIDE RUBBER SHIELD BETWEEN PIPE & CLAMP OF DISSIMILAR METAL. VERTICAL CHANNEL SECURE TO STRUCTURE ABOVE AND FLOOR BELOW TUBING CLAMP 9 WALL MOUNTED PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL NO SCALE "B -LINE" B62 STEEL CHANNEL 12" ABOVE FLOOR, 12" BELOW CEILING AND AT MIDPOINT. BOLT TO VERTICAL CHANNELS. PROVIDE SADDLES FOR INSULATED PIPING. REFRIGERANT PIPING. RUN, SIZE AND TRAP PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. PROVIDE UNISTRUT SUPPORT TO INSURE PIPING WILL NOT FLEX OR SWAY. NEOPRENE ISOLATION PAD EQUIPMENT SUPPORT CURB THYCURB OR APPROVED EQUAL ROOF AIRFLOW CONDENSER DETAIL DISCONNECT SWITCH RATED WALL PIPE INSULATION PIPE PREFABRICATED CURB (MINIMUM 12" HIGH) ROOF to 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I PIPE PENETRATION DETAIL NO SCALE FLASHING -2" OVERLAP OF CURB RTU -1 UNION GAS COCK 6" MIN. CITY 3F (SERIES APPROVED OCT 1 2 1999 GAS CONNECTION DETAIL'' NO SCALE • - CAP DAMMING MATERIAL (FIBERGLASS OR MINERAL WOOL) FIRESTOP SEALANT (1/2" THICK). SEALANT SHALL BE SIMILAR TO DOW CORNING FIRESTOP 2000. CAST IRON SLEEVE A GAS SUPPLY LINE KT Assocates P .. D BA KT Associates, PC C of VA 2323 Horse Pen 9 R d Suite 500 Herndon, Va. 20171 -3405 703' 713 -0300 (703) 713 -0890 FAX www.KTA95.com Revisions. A QC REVISIONS 9/3/99 Q 2 CUSTOMER REQUEST 9/21 CIN OF TUKWILA FED 3 0 1999 PERMIT CENTER LOT BOLT CONDENSER SEE OOR T TO SUPPORTS. FOR SIZE PROVIDE SHIMS v Z AS REQUIRED P '( TO LEVEL UNIT. DUCT ROOF PENETRATION DETAIL NvIct - Iii NO SCALE _ MECHANICAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULES Scala NONE Drawn PGP Checked Data 08 -19-99 SECURE FAN CURB WITH STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS 2" FROM EACH CORNER (12" ON CENTER) PREFABRICATED CURB (MINIMUM 12" HIGH) FLEX CONNECTOR SPUN ALUMINUM DISCHARGE APRON NO SCALE NOTES 1. CURB AND FAN SHALL BE FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER. 2. RUN POWER SUPPLY LEADS IN CORNER INSIDE CURB. EXHAUST FAN DETAIL ALUMINUM BIRDSCREEN AT PERIMETER OF FAN DISCHARGE CURB CAP 1/2" NEOPRENE GASKET ALL AROUND GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPER EXHAUST DUCT — SEE FLOOR PLAN FOR SIZE Z l�� I I, ROOFTOP UNIT Project 89921.00 SECURE TO LUMBER WITH 1 -1/2" GALVANIZED WOOD. SCREWS. USE BRASS SCREWS FOR COPPER PIPING. PROVIDE ASPHALT PROTECTION BOARD BETWEEN WOOD AND ROOF MEMBRANE NOTE: PIER OR CURB BASE SEE DETAIL BELOW COMPOSITION FLASHING NOT TO SCALE ROOF PIPE OR ANGLE SUPPORT LENGTH AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT PIPING SUPPORTS FOR PIPING BELOW RAISED FLOOR SHALL BE SIMILAR. ROOF MOUNTED PIPING SUPPORT DETAIL NO SCALE 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2 "x1/4" STRUCTURAL. STEEL ANGLE SUPPORTS ALL AROUND DUCTWORK. SPACING OF SUPPORTS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS OF DUCTWORK WATER TIGHT. PIER OR CURB BASE DUCT SUPPORT DETAIL CAP FLASHING 0 ROOFTOP UNIT A GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE STRAP (TYPICAL). USE GALVANIZED SADDLES FOR INSULATED PIPING. USE COPPER COATED PIPING CLAMPS. FOR UNINSULATED COPPER PIPING. REFRIGERANT PIPING (TYPICAL). 4x4 PRESSURE TREATED DOUGLAS FIR LOCATE MAXIMUM 6 FEET ON CENTER AND WITHIN ONE FOOT OF CHANGE IN DIRECTION OF PIPING. NO SCALE WELD PIPE TO PLATE 2" STL. PRIMED PIPE COLUMN PITCH POCKET EXTENDED RUNNOUT BRANCH DUCT TO ENSURE MAX. FLEX LENGTH OF 10 FT. 2 "x2 "x1/8" PRIMED STEEL ANGLES. ROOF NOTES NO SCALE 1. LIQUID AND SUCTION LINES, GLYCOL SUPPLY & RETURN LINES FROM CONDENSING UNITS. & DRYCOOLERS TO BE PIPED THROUGH PORTAL SYSTEM. 2. PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL SNAPLOCK SWIVEL CLAMPS FOR ALL PIPES ENTERING PORTAL SYSTEM. WELD PIPE TO PLATE 4x4x1/4 STEEL PLATE. WELD TO JOIST. CONDENSING UNIT MOUNTING DETAIL 3/8" DIA STL. BOLT & ISOLATOR AT ALL 4 CORNERS. BOLT CU UNIT TO BEAM FLANGE. DRAIN ONTO ROOF REFRIGERANT /GLYCOL PIPING PORTAL SYSTEM DETAIL NO SCALE VOLUME DAMPER FLEXIBLE DUCT LOUVER OR PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSER STAINLESS STEEL TIE —BAND (TYP.) MAIN DUCT —SEE PLANS FOR ROUTING SQUARE TO ROUND DUCT FITTING (IF REQUIRED) CEILING DIFFUSER HOOK -UP DETAIL 3" X RTU -1 CONDENSATE DRAIN DETAIL A NOT TO SCALE PROTECTIVE RUBBER CAPS ACRYLIC COATED RIB REINFORCED PLASTIC CURB COVER ROOF CURB —1 MIN. HAND TIGHT SCREW PLUG MOMENTARY SWITCH WITH PILOT LIGHT (NOTE 3) DUCT MOTOR FUSIBLE ROD ACCESS PANEL (NOTE 4) WALL COND. PUMP NOTES NO SCALE A. 1/8" PER FOOT OF SLEEVE HEIGHT. B. 1/8" PER FOOT OF SLEEVE WIDTH. NOTES: 0 PROVIDE VIBRATION ISOLATION RAIL BETWEEN RTU AND CURB. ® PROVIDE FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION AT UNIT. POWER SUPPLY WITHIN CURB. O PROVIDE 3" MINIMUM RIGID INSULATION OVER ROOF INSIDE CURB. COVER WITH 2 LAYERS OF 5/8" PLYWOOD WITH STAGGERED JOINTS. SEAL JOINTS & EDGES WITH NON — HARDENING SEALER OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE. MAINTAIN 10 FT CLEARANCE TO EXHAUST & PLUMBING VENTS. RTU -1 DETAIL NO SC AIR HANDLER INSTALLATION DETAIL DUCT 1. PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES BETWEEN WALL AND SLEEVE AS FOLLOWS: 2. DAMPER SLEEVE SHALL BE OF A GAUGE NOT LESS THAN DUCT TO WHICH IT IS CONNECTED. 3. SWITCH SHALL BE MOUNTED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE (NOT SMOKE WALL) ADJACENT TO DAMPER MOTOR AND WITHIN 24" OF DUCT ACCESS PANEL. 4. PROVIDE DUCT ACCESS PANEL OF SUFFICIENT SIZE FOR PHYSICAL INSPECTION OF DAMPER BLADES. PANEL SHALL BE ON SAME SIDE OF WALL AS DAMPER MOTOR. 5. MOUNTING ANGLES SHALL BE MINIMUM OF 1 -1/2"x 1 -1/2"x 16 GAUGE STEEL. FASTEN ANGLES TO SLEEVE WITH 1/4" BOLTS MAXIMUM, 6" ON CENTERS. ANGLES SHALL BEAR MINIMUM OF 1" ON WALL 'BEYOND EXPANSION GAP. ANGLES SHALL CONTINUOUSLY BEAR ON WALL ALL AROUND OPENING ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL BUT SHALL NOT BE SECURED TO THE WALL ANGLES SHALL OVERLAP EACH OTHER AT CORNERS. CONTINUOUSLY CAULK. PERIMETER OF ANGLES ALL AROUND ON BOTH SIDES OF WALL DO NOT CAULK BETWEEN ANGLE FACE AND WALL. 6. PROVIDE BREAKAWAY JOINT BETWEEN SLEEVE AND DUCT WITH STANDARD SLIP CONNECTOR (NO SCREWS ALLOWED), BOTH SIDES OF WALL. 7. DAMPER AND SLEEVE SHALL BE A FACTORY INSTALLED ASSEMBLY BY THE DAMPER MANUFACTURER. B. SHOULD THIS DETAIL CONFLICT WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS SHALL BE FOLLOWED. VIBRATION ISOLATOR (TYP. OF 4) EXTENDED DRAIN PAN BELOW REFRIGERANT PIPING CONNECTIONS THREADED ROD ( TYP. OF 4 SMOKE —FIRE DAMPER CAULK AROUND BOTH SIDES OF DAMPER SECURE TO JOISTS — FLEX CONNECTOR (TYP.) SOUND LINED PLENUM SUPPLY DUCT EXPANSION GAP (NOTE 1) DAMPER SLEEVE (NOTE 2) BREAKWAY JOINT (NOTE 6) MOUNTING ANGLES (NOTE 5) CAULK q DI CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED OCT 1 2 1999 ,US Noi LD SMOKE /FIRE DAMPER DETAIL - WALL INSTALLATION NO SCALE K.T. Associates, F.C. D. K.T. Associates, F.C. of VA = t E: ^i 2323 Horse Pen 9Rd. "9 Suite 500 Herndon. Va. 20171 -3405 (703) 713 -0300 (703 ) 713 -0890 FAX www-KTA95.com Rn ni L\QC —KB REVISIONS 9/2/99 LE QC —RT REVISIONS 9/9/99 E CENU KWI , CIN R OF c[� 3 0 1999 PERMIT C`NTER MECHANICAL DETAILS Sc ab: NONE DrawIM PGP Checked Dabs 08 -19-99